Reference No.

83130 55124
PDM−Version C

CVOR 431

Conventional VHF Omnidirectional Radio Range

Technical Manual

Part 2
Operation and Maintenance

As for details, the electrical and mechanical information given in the

documentation supplied with each equipment prevails

All rights reserved

2012
Thales Air Systems GmbH
Stuttgart
Printed in Germany
 NAVAIDS
Conventional Navaids Documentation Structure

CVOR 431

The equipment documentation comprises:

Part Technical Manuals Code No.

1 Equipment Description 83130 55123
2 Operation and Maintenance 83130 55124

Volume Drawing Set Code No.

A Delivery List, Parts List, 83051 48600
Schematic diagrams and Layout Drawings
B Delivery List, Parts List, 83051 48600
Schematic diagrams and Layout Drawings
C Delivery List, Parts List, 83051 48600
Schematic diagrams and Layout Drawings

Ed. 09.10 Info 1

 NAVAIDS

GENERAL
As for details, the electrical and mechanical information given in the documentation supplied with each equip-
ment prevails. Despite of careful editing work technical inaccuracies and printing faults cannot be excluded
in this publication. Change of text remains reserved without notification.
Thales reserves the right to make design changes, additions to improvements in its products without obligation
to install such in products previously manufactured or installed.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT AND HANDLING REPLACEMENT PARTS
Subassemblies and components which are sent to the manufacturer for repair or returns must be packed in
a way that no damage of the parts could arise. It is recommended to use the original packing, e.g. of the spare
part, or a comparable packing in corresponding performance to ensure a safe shipping of defective subassem-
blies or components. For technical support and information on how to order or sent back replacement parts,
contact your equipment provider listed below.
Germany: Thales Air Systems GmbH
Lilienthalstrasse 2
70825 Korntal−Münchingen Germany
Tel: +49 711 86032−151
Fax: +49 711 86032−804
Italy: Thales Italia SPA
Via E. Mattei, 1
20064 Gorgonzola (MI) Italy
Tel: +39 02 95095−405
Fax: +39 02 95095−331
United States: Thales ATM Inc.
23501 West 84th Street
Shawnee, Kansas 66227 USA
Tel: +1 913 422−2600
Fax: +1 913 422−2962
LIMITATION OF USE
The use of this manual is limited to the operation and maintenance of the system stated in the title page. It shall
not be used for purposes of product manufacture. The installation drawings in the manuals, e.g. foundations
and site drawings are for information only. The as−built engineering drawings for the site are the only one to
be used. The information in the technical manuals is thought to be used by skilled workers to install the antenna
and perform the related electrical and mechanical adjustments. The leader of the installation team should be
an engineer, technician or experienced master craftsman. Special training and initiation by Thales are urgently
recommended. The fitters should be trained craftsman, for example mechanics, electricians or locksmiths.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The safety regulations laid down by the local authorities (e.g. concerning accident prevention, work safety or
operation of electronic equipment and navigation systems) must be observed at all times. The purpose of safe-
ty precautions is to protect persons and property, and they must always be heeded. Station shutdown due
to repair and maintenance: The responsible authorities must be notified of any work which may require opera-
tion of the system to be interrupted, in accordance with national regulations. Further information due to system
handling is contained in the correspondent sections.
COPYRIGHT
Reproduction of this manual is not permitted without written authorization of Thales.
TRADEMARKS
Microsoft and MS−DOS are registered trademarks, WINDOWS is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
IBM is a registered trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation. Pentium is a registered
trademark of the Intel Corporation. All other mentioned product names may be trademarks of the respective
manufacturers and must be observed.

Ed. 09.10 Info 2

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Preliminary Remarks

PRELIMINARY REMARKS
The equipment manuals for CVOR 431 (50 W and 100 W, single or dual) comprise:
PART CONTENTS CODE NO.
1 Equipment Description 83130 55123
2 Operation and Maintenance 83130 55124
This Technical Manual Part 2 includes the Operation and Maintenance with the chapters below:
1 General Information
2 Installation
3 Operation
4 Alignment Procedure
Annex Alignment Procedure 8 Point Ground Check Option
5 Maintenance
6 Fault Location and Repairs
Annex PC User Program (Specific Procedures)
The 50 W and 100 W installations (single or dual) differ only slightly with respect to equipment, func-
tions and operation, separate descriptions are not therefore provided for these two versions, but in-
stead any special features of either are pointed out. The content of part 1 "Equipment Description"
will as well−known presupposed. The 8 point ground check option is integrated in the text where it
is useful. For the alignment procedure the individual steps used for 8 PGC are described in an Annex
to Chapter 4.
Since it is not possible to include modifications, such as those which may be made to circuitry details
or dimensioning in the interests of technical progress, in the Technical Manual, we should point out
that questions of detail should always be answered using the technical documentation supplied with
the system. It is possible that reference numbers of drawings or subassemblies used in this descrip-
tion are no longer contained in the set of drawings supplied (Volume A to C), but rather than (to con-
form with the system) they have been replaced by new drawings with another number. Please carry
out a once−only check on the basis of delivery list supplied and exchange where appropriate.
Description and use of the ’PC User Program’ will be found for use of ADRACS in the Tech. Man.,
Code No. 83140 55324, the one for use of MCS in the Tech. Man., Code No. 83140 55325.
MARK SYMBOLS
To get the best out of the navigation systems Navaids 400 you should study the contents of this manu-
al carefully. In particular you should familiarize yourself with the marks given in this manual which are
highlighted for easy recognition:

CAUTION WARNING

Cautions call attention to methods Warnings call attention to methods,

and procedures which must be procedures or limits which must be
followed to avoid damage to followed precisely to avoid injury to
equipment. persons.

NOTE or REMARK : For more information about operations.

Ed. 05.06 A
CVOR 431
Preliminary Remarks Operation and Maintenance

Table of effective pages

Basic edition: 01.04 / Revision: 01.12

Pages Ed.−No. Pages Ed.−No. Remarks

Title 01.12 6−1 05.06

Info 1 and 2 09.10 6−2 to 10 01.04
A 05.06 6−11 to 12 01.12
B 01.12 6−13 to 15 11.05
I to XIV 01.12 6−16 to 17 01.12
AV−1 to 16 08.09 6−18 05.06
6−19 01.12
1−1 to 4 01.04 6−20 05.06
1−5 05.06 6−21 06.08
1−6 01.04 6−22 to 44 01.12
1−7 05.06
1−8 to 10 01.04 Annex SP 09.09 PC User Program
2−1 to 4 01.04
2−5 01.12
2−6 to 11 01.04
2−12 03.11
2−13 01.04
2−14 05.06
2−15 to 16 01.04
2−17 to 27 05.06
2−28 to 29 01.12
2−30 05.06
2−31 to 40 01.12
2−41 to 52 05.06
3−1 07.09
3−2 05.06
3−3 01.12
3−4 08.10
3−5 to 8 05.06
3−9 to 18 07.09
4−1 to 40 01.12
A4−1 to 3 09.10 Annex 8 PGC option
A4−4 01.12
A4−5 to 12 09.10
5−1 to 18 01.12

Trademarks: Microsoft and MS−DOS are registered trademarks, WINDOWS is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. IBM is a registered trademark of the International
Business Machines Corporation. Pentium is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation. All other mentioned product names may be trademarks of the
respective manufacturers and must be observed.

Note Despite of careful editing work technical inaccuracies and printing faults cannot be excluded in this publication. Change of text remains reserved without notification.

B Ed. 01.12
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1

1.1 STORING AND UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.1.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.2 STORING AND UNPACKING THE CVOR ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−3
1.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−4
1.3.1 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−4
1.3.1.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−4
1.3.1.2 Precautionary Measures against Damage caused by Animals . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−4
1.3.1.3 Equipment Safety Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−4
1.3.2 Personnel Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−5
1.3.3 Tools and Special Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−5
1.4 LIST OF RECOMMENDED INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . 1−7

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1

2.1 SELECTING THE INSTALLATION SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1
2.2 VOR SHELTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−2
2.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−2
2.2.2 Shelter Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−2
2.2.3 CVOR Container Shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−3
2.2.3.1 Mounting the Counterpoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−6
2.2.3.2 Installation of the CVOR Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−8
2.2.3.3 Assembly of an Obstruction Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−12
2.2.3.4 Antenna Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−13
2.2.4 Installation of the Field Monitor and Monitor Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−14
2.2.5 Installation of the Monitor Dipoles for 8 Point Ground Check Option . . . 2−15
2.3 INSTALLATION AT THE RACK IN THE SHELTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−17
2.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−17
2.3.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−17
2.3.2.1 Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−17
2.3.2.2 Connection of Battery Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−18
2.3.3 RF−Connections at Transmitter Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−21
2.3.4 Connection of optional ETX−CPU board in the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−22

Ed. 01.12 I
CVOR 431
Table of Contents Operation and Maintenance
Section Title Page

2.3.5 External Interface Connections and Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−23

2.3.5.1 DME−IDENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−23
2.3.5.2 DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−23
2.3.5.3 LGM1 or ETX−CPU COM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−23
2.3.5.4 LGM2/DME or ETX−CPU COM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−24
2.3.5.5 LGM3/NDB or ETX−CPU COM3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−24
2.3.5.6 ANALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−25
2.3.5.7 Local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−25
2.3.5.8 VAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−25
2.3.5.9 VARP LOCAL VOICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−25
2.3.5.10 ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−25
2.3.5.11 PTT−LINE/LGM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−25
2.3.5.12 OIO LCP IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−26
2.3.5.13 OIO LCP OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−26
2.3.6 External Interfaces, Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−27
2.3.6.1 Connection of Remote Control RMMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−27
2.3.6.2 Connection of a local PC or Laptop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−27
2.3.6.3 Connection of Voice Signal for VAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−27
2.3.6.4 Connection of auxiliary Inputs/Outputs (LCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−27
2.3.6.5 Connection of auxiliary Analog and Temp inputs (CSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−27
2.3.7 ETX CPU option, Pin Assignment of Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−30
2.4 INSTALLATION OF 8 PGC OPTION AT THE CVOR RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−31
2.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−31
2.4.2 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−31
2.4.2.1 Connections at Transmitter Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−32
2.5 GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−37
2.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−37
2.5.2 Strip or mesh Ground Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−37
2.5.3 Ground Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−38
2.5.4 Ground Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−38
2.5.5 Estimating the Ground Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−38
2.5.6 Measuring the Ground Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−38
2.5.7 Earthing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−40
2.6 COLLOCATION WITH DME/TACAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−41

II Ed. 01.12
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Table of Contents
Section Title Page

2.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−41

2.6.2 Connection FSD 40/45 to CVOR 431 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−41
2.6.2.1 CSB−Version, I/O−panel at the rear of cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−41
2.6.2.2 CSB−Version, I/O−panel on top of the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−41
2.6.2.3 IOM−Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−42
2.6.2.4 Configuration of CVOR 431 and DME FSD 40/45 or TACAN FTA 43 . . . . . . . 2−42
2.6.3 Connection TACAN FTA 43 to CVOR 431 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−42
2.6.4 Connection of DME 415/435 to CVOR 431 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−49
2.6.4.1 Ident and RS232 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−49
2.6.4.2 Configuration of CVOR 431 and DME 415/435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−49
2.7 INSTALLATION OF THE DME ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−52

CHAPTER 3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1

3.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1
3.2 LOCAL CONTROL INTERFACE (LCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1
3.2.1 Indicators and Controls on LCP Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−2
3.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS ON THE SUBASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−3
3.3.1 Subassembly CSL, Setting BCD−Switch for TSG−operation . . . . . . . . . 3−6
3.4 NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
3.4.1 Switching On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
3.4.2 Set to Remote Mode (on LCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
3.4.3 Change over from Remote to Local (on LCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
3.4.4 Change Over to Maintenance Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
3.4.5 Change over to Monitor Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−8
3.4.6 Monitoring ATIS or Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−8
3.4.7 Functional Check of Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−8
3.4.8 Switching Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−8
3.5 LCP AND LCD SCREEN FOR SYSTEM DISPLAY AND CONTROL . . . . . . . . 3−9
3.5.1 General Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−9
3.5.2 Principle Operation of the Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−10

CHAPTER 4 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1

4.1 GENERAL PREREQUISITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.1.1 Local Operation via Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.1.1.1 PC with MCS User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.1.1.2 PC with ADRACS User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−4

Ed. 01.12 III

CVOR 431
Table of Contents Operation and Maintenance
Section Title Page

4.1.2 Recommended Measuring Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−4

4.1.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−4
4.1.4 Special Setups for Alignment without Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.1.4.1 RF Phasing (SBA to CSB) with 8 PGC Monitor Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.1.4.2 RF Phasing (SBB to CSB) with 8 PGC Monitor Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.1.4.3 Check of Sense of Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−6
4.1.5 Labelling of Parameters, Access to Adjustment Windows
(from ADRACS software V3.8 and MCS software V1.8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−7
4.2 FIRST SWITCHING ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
4.2.1 Status of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
4.2.1.1 Special Jumper Settings before Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
4.2.2 Switching On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
4.2.3 General Remarks to the PC User Program Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
4.2.4 Preparing the Installation SITE with PC User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−10
4.2.4.1 Use of MCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−10
4.2.4.2 Use of ADRACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−10
4.2.5 Check and Enter Station Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−11
4.3 ANTENNA ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−13
4.3.1 Mechanical Presettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−13
4.3.2 Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−13
4.3.2.1 Dipole A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−13
4.3.2.2 Dipole B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−13
4.3.2.3 Lower Radiator (LR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−14
4.3.2.4 Upper Radiator (UR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−14
4.3.2.5 Decoupling Dipole A − B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−14
4.3.3 Decoupling and Circular Pattern of LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−14
4.3.3.1 Decoupling LR − Dipole A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−14
4.3.3.2 Decoupling LR − Dipole B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−15
4.3.3.3 Circular Pattern of LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−15
4.3.4 Decoupling and Circular Pattern of UR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−15
4.3.5 Fine Matching of Omnidirectional Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−15
4.3.5.1 LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−15
4.3.5.2 UR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−16
4.3.5.3 Matching Device Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−16

IV Ed. 01.12
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Table of Contents
Section Title Page

4.3.6 Decoupling Dipole A − B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−16

4.4 RF−PHASING OF OMNIDIRECTIONAL RADIATOR LR − UR . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−17
4.4.1 Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−17
4.4.2 RF Phasing of UR − Dipole A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−17
4.4.2.1 TX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−17
4.4.3 RF Phasing of LR − Dipole A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−17
4.5 CHECK OF MONITORS (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−19
4.5.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−19
4.5.2 Monitor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−19
4.5.2.1 30 Hz AM Modulation Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−19
4.5.2.2 9960 Hz Modulation Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−19
4.5.2.3 30 Hz FM Modulation Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−19
4.5.2.4 Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−19
4.5.3 Monitor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−19
4.6 SETTING OF TRANSMITTERS AND MONITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−21
4.6.1 Adjustment of Carrier Power TX1/TX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−21
4.6.2 RF−Phasing (SBA/SBB to CSB), 30 Hz AM and Sense of Rotation of TX1 4−21
4.6.2.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−21
4.6.2.2 RF Phasing (SBA to CSB) and 30 Hz Modulation Depth Setting . . . . . . . . . . 4−21
4.6.2.3 RF Phasing (SBB to CSB) and 30 Hz Modulation Depth Setting . . . . . . . . . . 4−22
4.6.2.4 Check of Sense of Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−22
4.6.3 RF Phasing (SBA/SBB to CSB), 30 Hz AM and Sense of Rotation of TX2 4−22
4.6.4 Setting of TX1 and Monitor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−22
4.6.4.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−22
4.6.4.2 RF Level Monitor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−23
4.6.4.3 30 Hz Modulation Depth Monitor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−23
4.6.4.4 Subcarrier TX1 (9960Hz AM Depth, FM Index) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−23
4.6.4.5 Azimuth TX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−23
4.6.4.6 Identity and Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−23
4.6.5 Setting of TX2 with Monitor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−23
4.6.5.1 Control of TX2 with Monitor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−23
4.6.5.2 Subcarrier, Azimuth, Identity and Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−23
4.6.6 Setting and Check of Monitor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−24
4.6.6.1 Monitor 2 with TX1 on Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−24

Ed. 01.12 V
CVOR 431
Table of Contents Operation and Maintenance
Section Title Page

4.6.6.2 Monitor 2 with TX2 on Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−24

4.7 GROUND CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−25
4.7.1 Preparation of Monitor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−25
4.7.2 Error Curve TX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−25
4.7.3 Error Curve TX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−25
4.7.4 Reset of Monitor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−25
4.8 SETTING OF MONITOR ALARM LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
4.8.1 Monitor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
4.8.1.1 Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
4.8.1.2 RF−Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
4.8.1.3 Distortion 9960 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
4.8.1.4 30 Hz AM Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
4.8.1.5 9960 Hz Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
4.8.1.6 30 Hz FM Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
4.8.1.7 Identity AM Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
4.8.1.8 Distortion 30 Hz FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
4.8.1.9 Carrier Frequency Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−27
4.8.1.10 Alarm Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−27
4.8.2 Monitor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−27
4.9 BATTERY MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−27
4.10 NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−28
4.10.1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−28
4.10.2 TX1 Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−28
4.10.3 TX2 Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−28
4.11 FLIGHT−CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−29
4.11.1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−29
4.11.2 Correction of TX1 and Monitor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−29
4.11.2.1 30 Hz AM Modulation Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−29
4.11.2.2 9960 Hz Modulation Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−29
4.11.2.3 30 Hz FM Modulation Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−29
4.11.2.4 Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−30
4.11.2.5 Identity Modulation Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−30
4.11.2.6 Voice Modulation Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−30
4.11.3 Correction of TX2 and Monitor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−30

VI Ed. 01.12
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Table of Contents
Section Title Page

4.11.4 Adjustment of Monitor 2 with TX1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−30

4.11.5 Check of Monitor Alarm Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−30
4.11.5.1 Azimuth Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−31
4.11.5.2 30 Hz AM Modulation Depth Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−31
4.11.5.3 9960 Hz Modulation Depth Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−31
4.11.6 Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−31
4.12 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MONITOR DISPLAY OF THE RF LEVEL
AND THE POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−40

ANNEX CHAPTER 4 FIRST SETUP WITH 8 POINT GROUND CHECK OPTION . . . . . . . . . . A4−1

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1

5.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
5.1.1 Elimination of Static Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
5.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−2
5.2.1 Damage check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−2
5.2.2 Check of Transmitter Parameters and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.2.3 Check of Battery Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.2.4 Documentation of System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.2.5 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.2.6 Cleaning and Maintenance of Antenna and Counterpoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−4
5.2.7 Evaluation of 8 Point Ground Check (8PGC) Measurement Results . . . . 5−5
5.3 NORMAL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−7
5.3.1 Replacing the Lithium Batteries (MSG−C, MSP−CD, LCP) . . . . . . . . . . . 5−7
5.3.2 Maintaining Emergency Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−8
5.3.2.1 Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−8
5.3.3 Matching the Charging Voltage of BCPS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−8
5.3.3.1 Reasons for Voltage Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−8
5.3.3.2 Matching the Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−9
5.4 STARTUP, CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE LEAD BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . 5−11
5.4.1 Startup Specifications for the Lead Battery in Navigation Installations . . 5−11
5.4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−11
5.4.1.2 Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−12
5.4.1.2.1 Accumulator Acid and Specially Purified Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−12
5.4.1.2.2 Mixing Sulphuric Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−12
5.4.1.2.3 Relationship between the Acid Density and the Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−13

Ed. 01.12 VII

CVOR 431
Table of Contents Operation and Maintenance
Section Title Page

5.4.1.2.4 Basic Rules for Handling Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−14

5.4.1.2.5 Filling the Batteries with Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−15
5.4.1.3 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−15
5.4.1.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−15
5.4.1.3.2 Dry Pre−charged Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−15
5.4.1.3.3 Non Pre−charged Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−15
5.4.1.3.4 Initial Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−16
5.4.2 Care and Maintenance of the Lead Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−17
5.4.2.1 Maintenance Accessories and Scope of Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−17
5.4.2.1.1 Keeping the Lead Battery Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−18
5.4.2.1.2 Measuring the Acid Density (not for maintenance−free batteries) . . . . . . . . . 5−18
5.4.2.1.3 Topping Up the Cells (not for maintenance−free batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−18
5.4.2.1.4 Measuring the Cell Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−18

CHAPTER 6 FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1

6.1 FAULT LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.1.2 Fault Evaluation with PC and PC User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.1.3 Fault Location Support CVOR (50 W and 100 W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.1.3.1 Power Supply and Module Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.1.3.2 Localization of the defective Equipment Part (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−2
6.1.3.3 Status Check of the Microprocessor of the MSG−C (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−2
6.1.3.4 RF−Level too low or missing (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−3
6.1.3.5 Modulation Depth of the Carrier is too low (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−4
6.1.3.6 Modulation by Sidebands too low or wrong (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−5
6.1.3.7 Wrong Carrier Frequency (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−7
6.1.3.8 Azimuth Indication (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−8
6.1.3.9 Fault in the Monitor (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−9
6.1.3.10 Fault of the Local Control Panel (LCP) (9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−11
6.2 REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−13
6.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−13
6.2.1.1 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−13
6.2.1.1.1 General Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−13
6.2.1.1.2 Work on the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−13
6.2.1.1.3 Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−13

VIII Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Table of Contents
Section Title Page

6.2.1.1.4 Components Containing Beryllium Oxide Ceramics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−14

6.2.1.1.5 Handling Lead Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−14
6.2.2 Correcting a Processor Standstill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−15
6.2.2.1 Failure in the Monitor Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−15
6.2.2.2 Failure in the Transmitter Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−15
6.2.2.3 Failure in the LC−CPU Processor (LCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−15
6.2.3 Replacing Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−17
6.2.3.1 Disconnecting the Voltage before Replacing Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−17
6.2.3.2 Subassemblies in the Transmitter Rack and Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−17
6.2.3.2.1 Replacing EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−20
6.2.3.2.2 Creating new Checksum for MSP EPROM in the PC User Program . . . . . . . 6−20
6.2.3.2.3 Replacing and Reconfiguring the Subassembly LCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−21
6.2.3.2.4 Reconfigure the LCP board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−22
6.2.3.3 CVOR Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−22
6.2.4 Test after Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−22
6.2.5 List of DIP Switches and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−23
6.2.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−23

Ed. 01.12 IX
CVOR 431
Table of Contents Operation and Maintenance

X Ed. 01.12
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Table of Contents

LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.−No. Title Page

Fig. 1−1 CVOR in 10 ft container shelter for all types of transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
Fig. 1−2 CVOR with packing for rail or road transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
Fig. 1−3 Packaging for rail and road transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
Fig. 1−4 Packaging for CVOR antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−3
Fig. 2−1 CVOR siting criteria (general data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1
Fig. 2−2 CVOR 10 ft shelter, foundations (informative view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−2
Fig. 2−3 Correct lifting with a lifting harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−3
Fig. 2−4 10 ft CVOR container shelter, dimension and general view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−4
Fig. 2−5 10 ft CVOR container shelter without counterpoise, inner design . . . . . . . . . 2−5
Fig. 2−6 Standard shelter, electrical installation CVOR (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−5
Fig. 2−7 Assembly of counterpoise (j 5 m) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−6
Fig. 2−8 CVOR antenna in transportation crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−9
Fig. 2−9 Locking device at antenna base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−10
Fig. 2−10 Mechanical alignment of antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−10
Fig. 2−11 Securing the CVOR antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−11
Fig. 2−12 Mechanical alignment of the CVOR antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−11
Fig. 2−13 Connecting diagram for CVOR antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−12
Fig. 2−14 Adapter for obstruction light (Ref. no. 38150 28182) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−12
Fig. 2−15 Adapter for CVOR antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−13
Fig. 2−16 Arrangement and installation CVOR field monitor (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−14
Fig. 2−17 Height position of 8 PGC monitor dipoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−15
Fig. 2−18 Connections at the BCPS connection plate, C−bar and bottom plate . . . . . 2−19
Fig. 2−19 Power supply cabling: BCPS connection plate, C−bar and bottom plate, . . 2−20
PMM
Fig. 2−20 CVOR Transmitter rack, top view, connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−21
Fig. 2−21 ETX−CPU board, connection to motherboard BP−C and cabinet top . . . . . 2−22
Fig. 2−22 External wiring of auxiliary OIO connectors of LCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−28
Fig. 2−23 Transmitter cabinet, rear side, interface connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−29
Fig. 2−24 CVOR transmitter rack, top view, replaced cover with additional connectors 2−32
Fig. 2−25 Transmitter cabinet, new cabling for 8 point ground check option . . . . . . . . . 2−33
Fig. 2−26 System cabling CVOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−35
Fig. 2−27 Different types of ground conductor configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−37
Fig. 2−28 Determining of the ground resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−39

Ed. 01.12 XI
CVOR 431
Table of Contents Operation and Maintenance

Fig.−No. Title Page

Fig. 2−29 Interface Assignment of LGM2 and DME−Ident in CVOR 431 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−43
Fig. 2−30 AF−distribution box, assignment of terminals (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−43
Fig. 2−31 CSB−Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, connection CVOR to DME . . . 2−44
Fig. 2−32 CSB−Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, ident connection CVOR . . . . 2−44
to DME
Fig. 2−33 CSB−Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, RS 232 connection . . . . . . . . . 2−44
CVOR/DME
Fig. 2−34 CSB−Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, connection CVOR to DME . . . . . . . 2−45
Fig. 2−35 CSB−Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, ident connection VOR/DME . . . . . 2−45
Fig. 2−36 CSB−Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, RS 232 connection CVOR/DME . . 2−45
Fig. 2−37 IOM−Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, connection CVOR . . . 2−46
to DME
Fig. 2−38 IOM−Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, ident connection . . . . 2−46
CVOR/DME
Fig. 2−39 IOM−Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, RS 232 connection . . . 2−46
CVOR/DME
Fig. 2−40 Cable connection CVOR to TACAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−47
Fig. 2−41 Ident connection CVOR/TACAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−47
Fig. 2−42 RS 232−connection CVOR/TACAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−47
Fig. 2−43 Cable connections to CVOR and DME 40/45 (DME with individual internal . 2−48
or external modem for RC connection)
Fig. 2−44 Cable connections to CVOR and TACAN (TACAN with individual internal or 2−48
external modem for RC connection)
Fig. 2−45 Collocation CVOR/DVOR with DME 415/435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−50
Fig. 2−46 Ident connection CVOR/DVOR to DME 415/435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−50
Fig. 2−47 RS232 connection CVOR/DVOR to DME 415/435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−50
Fig. 2−48 Cable connections to CVOR/DVOR and DME 415/435
(DME with individual internal or external modem for RC connection) . . . . . . 2−51
Fig. 2−49 Arrangement and installation of the DME antenna (example AAN 96/86), . . 2−52
principle view
Fig. 3−1 Local Control Interface (LCI), example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1
Fig. 3−2 Indications and controls on the subassemblies inside the rack (1) . . . . . . . . 3−4
Fig. 3−3 Indications and controls on the subassemblies inside the rack (2) . . . . . . . . 3−5
Fig. 3−4 Structure of an LCP window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−9
Fig. 3−5 Hierarchy of all LCP windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−9
Fig. 3−6 Status window after start of application (example, main state NORMAL) . . . 3−10
Fig. 3−7 MONITOR select and Monitor Data window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−10

XII Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Table of Contents
Fig.−No. Title Page

Fig. 3−8 TRANSM select and Transmitter Data window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−11
Fig. 3−9 ALERTS select and Show Alerts window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−11
Fig. 3−10 STATUS select and return to Status window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−13
Fig. 3−11 CONTROL select and MON/TX Control window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−13
Fig. 3−12 MENU select and Menu List window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−14
Fig. 3−13 SUPPLY VOLTAGES select and Supply Voltages window (example) . . . . . . . 3−14
Fig. 3−14 BATTERY DATA select and Battery Data window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−15
Fig. 3−15 CONFIGURATION DATA select and Configuration Data window (example) . 3−15
Fig. 3−16 FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT select and 1st step window (example) . . . . 3−16
Fig. 3−17 Select parameter to change in Flight Check Adjustment 2nd step window . 3−16
(example)
Fig. 3−18 Select digit and change value in Flight Check Adjustment 2nd step window 3−17
(example)
Fig. 3−19 Confirm/abort changes in Flight Check Adjustment 3rd step window . . . . . . 3−17
(example)
Fig. 3−20 INFO select and Station Information window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−18
Fig. 4−1 Example of dialog window ’Station Configuration’ (ADRACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−7
Fig. 4−2 Examples of dialog window ’Alarm Limits’ and dialog window ’Calibration’ . 4−12
Fig. 4−3 Dipole slot length of CVOR antenna as a function of frequency . . . . . . . . . . . 4−32
Fig. 4−4 Adjustment of the omnidirectional radiator capacitors as a function of . . . . 4−33
the frequency
Fig. 4−5 Alignment of circular pattern for LR and UR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−34
Fig. 4−6 Monitor calibration for measurement of isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−35
Fig. 4−7 Measurement of isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−35
Fig. 4−8 Measurement of circular pattern of omnidirectional radiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−36
Fig. 4−9 Simulator test setup with individual components (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−36
Fig. 4−10 Simulator test setup with Monitor Signal Simulator (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−37
Fig. 4−11 Alignment of antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−38
Fig. 4−12 Transmitter cabinet, rear side, potentiometers on CCP−V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−39
Fig. 5−1 Accumulator acid chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−12
Fig. 5−2 Chart showing the relationship between the acid density and the . . . . . . . . 5−13
temperature
Fig. 6−1 Push buttons and indications on the subassemblies LC−CPU, MSP and . 6−16
MSG−C
Fig. 6−2 Locations in the CVOR rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−18
Fig. 6−3 Preparation and adjustments during a subassembly replacement . . . . . . . . 6−19

Ed. 01.12 XIII

CVOR 431
Table of Contents Operation and Maintenance

Fig.−No. Title Page

Fig. 6−4 LCP front panel with LCP Control Menu and LCP Warning text (example) . 6−21

XIV Ed. 01.12

 NAVAIDS 400
Conventional Navaids List of Abbreviations

ABKÜRZUNGSVERZEICHNIS
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
LISTE D’ABRÉVIATIONS
LISTA DE ABREVIATURAS
A Antenne
Antenna
Antena
AC Alternating Current
Courant alternatif
Corriente alterna
ACA Analogical Carrier Amplifier (BITE signal)
Amplificateur pour porteurs analogiques (signal BITE)
Amplificdor portador analogico (señal BITE)
ACC Alternating Current Converter
ADC Analog−Digital Converter
Convertisseur analogique/numérique
Convertidor analógico/digital
ADCS Analog−to−digital Converter Subsystem
Sous−système convertisseur analogique/numérique
Subsistema convertidor analógico/digital
ADR Analog Display Routine
Routine affichage analogique
Rutina de indicator analógico
ADRACS Automatic Data Recording And Control System
ADSB Alternating Double Sideband
Bande latérale double alternante
Banda lateral doble alternante
ADU Antenna Distribution Unit
Antennen−Verteileinheit
Ensemble de distribution d’antenne
Unidad de distribución de antena
AF Audio Frequency
Basse fréquence
Audiofrequencia
AFC Automatic Frequency Control
Commande automatique par fréquence
Control automático de frecuencia
AGC Automatic Gain Control
Commande automatique de gain
Control automático de ganancia
AM Amplitude Modulation
Modulation d’amplitude
Modulación de amplitud

Ed. 08.09 SOAC AV−1

NAVAIDS 400
List of Abbreviations Conventional Navaids
AMP AMPlifier
Amplificateur
Amplificador
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASB Alternating SideBand
Bandes latérales alternantes
Banda lateral alternante
ASC Antenna Switch Control
Commutateur d’antennes de commande
Control de conmutador de antena
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Code standard américain pour l’échange d’informations
Código stándard americano para el intercambio de informaciones
ASM Antenna Switch Module
Module de commutateur d’antennes
Módulo de conmutador de antena
ASU Antenna Switching Unit
Ensemble de commutation d’antennes
Unidad de conmutación de antena
ATC Air Traffic Control
Contrôle du trafic aérien
Control del tráfico aéreo
ATIS Air Traffic Information System
Système d’informations du trafic aérien
Sistema de informaciones del tráfico aéreo
ATM Air Traffic Management
AWD Automatische Wähleinrichtung für Datenverbindungen
Automatic dialling equipment for data connections
Dispositif automatique de sélection pour liaisons d’acheminement de données
Dispositivo automático de selección para comunicaciones de datos
BAZ Back−Azimuth
BCD Binär Codiert Dezimal
Binary Coded decimal
BCPS Battery Charging Power Supply
Chargeur de batterie et bloc d’alimentation
Chargador de bateria y equipo de alimentación
BD Baud
Baud
Baudio
BF Basse Fréquency
Audio Frequency
Baja frecuencia (audiofrecuencia)
BIT(E) Built−in Test (Equipment)
Dispositif de test intégré
Dispositivo de test integrado

AV−2 SOAC Ed. 08.09

 NAVAIDS 400
Conventional Navaids List of Abbreviations
BKZ BefehlsKennZahl
Command code number
Numéro indicatif de commande
Número indicador de orden
BNC Bayonet Navy Connector
Koaxialverbinder mit Bayonetkupplung
BP Backplane
Rückwandverdrahtung
bro. broches
polig
pin
BSE Betriebs− und Schutzerde
System and protective ground
Prise de terre de système et terre de protection
Puesta a tierra del sistema y de protección
BSG−D Blending Signal Generator
Générateur de signaux de transition
Generador de señal de transición
BST Baustahl
Structure steel
Acier de construction
Acero de construcción
BUSGNT Bus Grant
Autorisation de bus
Autorización de bus
BUSRQ Bus Request
Demande de bus
Solicitud de bus
CA Carrier Amplifier
CAB Cabinet
Armoire
Armario
CAT Category
Kategorie
Category
Categoría
CCA Circuit Card Assembly
Baugruppe
Assemblage de la carte de circuit
CCITT Commitée Consultatif International Téléphonique et Télégraphique
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee
CCP Control Coupler
Coupleur de commande
Acoplador de control

Ed. 08.09 SOAC AV−3

NAVAIDS 400
List of Abbreviations Conventional Navaids
CDI Course Deviation Indicator
Indicateur de déviation (cap)
Indicador de desviaciòn de rumbo
CD−ROM Compact Disc − Read Only Memory
Disque compact −Mémoire à lecture
Disco compacto − Memoria permanente
CE Conformité Européen oder/or/ou Communautés Européennes
CEE International Commmision on Rules for the Approval of Electrical Equipment
CLR; CL Clearance signal
Signal de Clearance
Señal de Clearance
CMOS Complementary Metaloxide Semiconductor
Semi−conducteur oxyde métallique complémentaire
Semiconductor complementario de óxido metálico
CONC Phone Concentrator
Telefon−Umschalteinrichtung
Installation de commutation téléphonique
Centralilla teléfonica
CPU Central Processing Unit
Zentrale Prozessoreinheit
CR Carriage Return
Retour du chariot
Retorno de carro
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
Tube cathodique
Tubo catódico
CRS; CS Course signal
Kurssignal
Signal de directif
Señal de rumbo
CSB (1) Carrier signal with SideBands (HF)
Signal de porteuse avec bandes latérales
Señal de portadora con bandas laterales
CSB (2) Control&Status Board (part of the LCSU)
CSL Control and Selector Logic
Logique de commande et de sélection
Lógica de control y de selección
CTOL Conventional Take−off and Landing
Décollage et atterrissage classiques
Despegue y aterrizaje convencionales
CTS Clear to Send
Prêt à émettre
Listo para transmitir

AV−4 SOAC Ed. 08.09

 NAVAIDS 400
Conventional Navaids List of Abbreviations
CU Combining Unit
CW Continuous Wave
Fortlaufende Welle
Ondes continues
Ondas continuos
DAC Digital/Analog Converter
Convertisseur numérique/analogique
Convertidor digital/analógico
DAS DME−based Azimuth System
Système d’azimut basé DME
Sistema de acimut basado en DME
DC Direct Current
Courant continu
Corriente continua
DCC DC−Converter
Convertisseur de courant continu (Convertisseur CC)
Convertidor de corriente continua (convertidor CC)
DCC−MV DC−Converter Multivolt
Convertisseur CC−Multivolt
Convertidor CC−Multivolt
DCC−MVD DC−Converter Multivolt Doppler
Convertisseur CC−Multivolt Doppler
Convertidor CC−Multivolt Doppler
DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation
Differenz der Modulationsgrade
Différence de taux de modulation
Diferencia de grados de modulación
DDS Direct Digital Synthesis
DFS Deutsche Flugsicherung
Administration of air navigation services
Bureau de la sécurité aérienne
Instituto de protección de vuelo
DFT Diskrete Fourier Transformation
Discrete Fourier Transformation
DIF Differenzsignal
Difference signal
Signal différentiel
Señal diferencial
DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm
German industrial standard
Norme industrielle allemande
Norma industrial alemana
DIP Dual−In−Line Package
DMA Direct Memory Access

Ed. 08.09 SOAC AV−5

NAVAIDS 400
List of Abbreviations Conventional Navaids
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
Equipement de mesure de la distance
Equipo de medición de la distancia
DSB Double Sideband
Bandes latérales doubles
Banda lateral doble
DSP Digital Signal Processing
Digitaler Signal Prozessor
DSR Data Set Ready
Enregistrement des données prêt
Registro de datos listo
DTR Data Terminal Ready
Terminal de données prêt
Terminal de datos listo
DU Distribution Unit
Verteilereinheit
Ensemble de distribution
Unidad de distribución
DVOR Doppler Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Radio Range
Radiophare omnidirectionnel VHF Doppler
Radiofaro omnidireccional VHF Doppler
EC European Community
ECU Executive Control Unit
Ausführende Steuereinheit
Ensemble de contrôl exécutif
Unidad de control ejecución
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule, programmable et erasable électrique
Memoria permanente borrable eléctricamente y programada
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
ENBT Enable Bus Transfer
Validation transfert de bus
Conexión transferencia de bus
EPLD Electrically Programmable Logic Device
Elektrisch programmierbare Schaltungseinheit
Montage programmable électrique
Circuito programado eléctricamente
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule, programmable et erasable
Memoria permanente borrable y programada
EUROCAE European Organization for Civil Aviation Electronics
Organisation européenne pour l’électronique de l’aviation civile
Organización europea para la electrónica de la aviacion civil

AV−6 SOAC Ed. 08.09

 NAVAIDS 400
Conventional Navaids List of Abbreviations
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
Administration fédérale de l’aviation
Administración federal de aviación
FET Feldeffekttransistor
Field−effect transistor
FFM Farfield Monitor
(FF) Moniteur de champ lointain (zone Fraunhofer)
Monitor campo lejano
FIFO First In/First Out
Premier entré/premier sortie
Primera entrada/primera salida
FM Frequency Modulation
Modulation de fréquence
Modulación de frecuencia
FPE Functional Protection Earth
Betriebsschutzerde
FSK Frequency−Shift Keying
Frequenzumtastverfahren
Manipulation par déplacement de fréquence
Método de manipulación de frecuencia
GP, GS Glide Slope, Glide Path
Gleitweg
Radiophare d’alignement de descente
Transmisor de trayectoria de descenso
HF Hochfrequenz
Radio frequency
Haute fréquence
Alta frecuencia
IC Integrated Circuit
Integrierter Schaltkreis
Circuit intégré
Circuito integrado
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
Organisation de l’aviation civile internationale (OACI)
Organización de aviación civil international (OACI)
IF Intermediate Frequency
Zwischenfrequenz (ZF)
ILS Instrument Landing System
Système d’atterrissage aux instruments
Sistema de aterrizaje por instrumentos
IM Inner Marker
Radiobalise intérieure
Radiobaliza interior
INC Indication and Control
Anzeige und Steuerung

Ed. 08.09 SOAC AV−7

NAVAIDS 400
List of Abbreviations Conventional Navaids
Indicateur et contrôle
Panel de indicaciones y control
INT Interface Unit
Schnittstelleneinheit
Unité d’interface
Unidad de interfase
INTFC Interface Board for monitor
Schnittstellenkarte für Monitor
Platine d’interface du moniteur
Placa enchufable de la interfase de monitor
I/O−Port Input/Output−Port
Ein−/Ausgabeport
Porte d’entrée/sortie
Puerto de entrada/salida
ISO International Organization for Standardization
Internationale Organisation für Normung
Organisation Internationale de Normalisation
I/Q In Phase/Quadraturphase
In−phase/Quadratur−phase
KADP Kabeladapter
Cable adapter
Adaptateur de cable
Adaptador de cable
LCC Local Communication Control
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
Ecran à cristaux liquides
Indicador de cristal liquido
LCI Local Control Interface
Interface de commande locale
LCP Local Control Panel
Panneau de commande locale
LCSU Local Control and Status Unit
LCU Local Communication Unit
LED Light Emitting Diode
Diode électroluminiscente
Diodo electroluminiscente
LF Line Feed
Avancement de ligne
Avance de línea
LG−A Localizer/Glide Path − Audio Generator
LLZ/GP − Générateur Audio
LG−M Localizer/Glide Path − Monitor Processor
LLZ/GP − Processeur du Moniteur
LGM Modembezeichnung (LOGEM)
Modem assignation

AV−8 SOAC Ed. 08.09

 NAVAIDS 400
Conventional Navaids List of Abbreviations
LLZ/LOC Localizer
Radiophare d’alignement de piste
Localizador
LP Leiterplatte
Printed circuit board
Plaquette à circuits imprimé
Placa de circuito impreso
LPF Low Pass Filter
Filtre passe−bas
Filtro de paso bajo
LRCI Local/Remote Communication Interface
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
LSB (1) Lower Sideband (HF DVOR)
Bandes latérales inférieures
Banda lateral inferior
LSB (2) Least Significant Bit (digital)
m Modulationsgrad
Mod−Depth
Taux de modulation
Profundidad (grado) de modulación
MCS Monitoring and Control System
MEU Marker Extension Unit
Unité de radiobalise d’extension
Fuente de alimentación suplementaria de la radiobaliza
MIA Monitor Interface Adapter
Adapteur d’interface du moniteur
Adaptador de la interfase de monitor
MIB Monitor Interface Board
Platine d’interface du moniteur
Placa enchufable de la interfase de monitor
MLS Microwave Landing System
Système d’atterrissage aux micro−ondes
Sistema de aterrizaje por microondas
MM Middle Marker
Radiobalise médiane
Radiobaliza intermedia
MOD Modulation
Modulation
Modulación
MODPA Modulator/Power Amplifier
Modulateur/Amplificadeur de puissance
Modulador/AmplificadorAlimentación
MOD−SBB Modulator Sideband Blending (DVOR)
Modulateur de transition des bandes latérales
Modulador de transición de banda lateral

Ed. 08.09 SOAC AV−9

NAVAIDS 400
List of Abbreviations Conventional Navaids
MON Monitor
Moniteur
Monitor
MOS Metallic Oxide Semiconductor
Semi−conducteur métal oxyde
Semiconductor de óxido metálico
MPS Minimum Performance Specification
Spécification de rendement minimum
Especificación de rendimiento mínimo
MPU Marker Processing Unit
Unité de marqueur de traitement
Procesador de radiobaliza
MSB Most Significant Bit
MSG Modulation Signal Generator
Générateur de signaux de modulation
Generador de señal de modulación
MSP Monitor Signal Processor
Processeur de signaux de moniteur
Procesador de señal de monitor
MSR Monitor Service Routine
Routine de service de moniteur
Rutina de servicio de monitor
MTBF Meantime between Failures
Temps moyen entre défauts
Tiempo medio entre fallos
MTTR Meantime to Repair
Temps moyen de réparation
Tiempo medio de reparacion
MUX Multiplexer
Multiplexeur
Multiplexor
MV Multivolt
NAV Navigation
Navigation
Navigation
Navegación
NAVAIDS Navigational Aids
Navigationsanlagen
Aide de navigation
Radioayudas a la navegación
NC Normally closed
Normalement fermé
Normalmente cerrado
NDB Non−Directional radio Beacon
Radiophare omnidirectional
Radiofaro omnidireccional

AV−10 SOAC Ed. 08.09

 NAVAIDS 400
Conventional Navaids List of Abbreviations
NF Niederfrequenz
Audio frequency
Basse fréquence
Baja frecuencia
NFK Niederfrequenzknoten (Sternverteiler)
Star distributor (for audio frequency)
NFM Nearfield Monitor
Moniteur de champ proche
Monitor campo cercano
NM Nautical Mile
Mile nautique
Milla náutica
NO Normally open
Normalement ouvert
Normalmente abierto
OAB Optocoupler Adapter Board
Platine d’adaptateur d’optcoupleur
Placa enchufable del adaptador optoacoplador
OACI Organisation de l’aviation civile internationale (= ICAO)
International Civil Aviation Organization
Organización de aviación civil international
OIO Opto Coupler Isolated Input/Output
OM Outer Marker
Radiobalise extérieure
Radiobaliza exterior
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
Carte à circuit imprimé
Tarjeta de circuito impreso
PDME Precision DME
DME de précision
DME de precición
PE Protection Earth
PEP Peak Envelope Power
Spitzenleistung
Puissance de pointe
Potencia punta
PIR Portable ILS Receiver
PLL Phase Locked Loop
Boucle à verrouillage de phase
Bucle de bloqueo de fase
PM Phase Modulation
Pasenmodulation
Modulation de phase
Modulación de fase

Ed. 08.09 SOAC AV−11

NAVAIDS 400
List of Abbreviations Conventional Navaids
PMC Phase Monitor and Control
Moniteur de phase et commande
Monitor de fase y control
PMM Power Management Module
POP Power on Parallel
POSN./Pos. Position
Axe
Posición
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule et programmable
Memoria permanente programada
PRUM Protector Unit Marker
Radiobalise d’unité de protection
Unidad de protección de la radiobaliza
PRUT Protector Unit Tower
Unité de protection
Unidad de protección
PS Power Supply
Bloc d’alimentation
Equipo de alimentación
PSI Power Supply Interface
Interface du bloc d’alimentation
Interfase equipo de alimentación
PSS Power Supply Switch
PSW Interrupteur de puissance
Interruptor de alimentación
PSN Position
Position
Axe
Posición
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PTT Post Telephone and Telecommunications (Authority)
PVC Polyvinylchlorid
Polyvinyl chloride
Chlorure de polyvinyl (C.P.V.)
Chloruro de polivinilo
PWR Password Routine
Routimne de mot de passe
Rutina de contrasena
RAM Random Access Memory
Mémoire à accés aléatoire
Memoria de acceso aleatorio
RC Remote Control
Télécommande
Control remoto

AV−12 SOAC Ed. 08.09

 NAVAIDS 400
Conventional Navaids List of Abbreviations
RCMS Remote Control Monitoring System
Système de télécommande et de surveillance
Sistema de control y monitoreo remotos
RCSE Remote Control and Status Equipment
RCSR Remote Control Service Routine
Routine de service de télécommande
Rutina de servicio de control remoto
RCSU Remote Control Status Unit
REU Remote Electronic Unit
RF Radio Frequency
Haute fréquence (HF)
Radiofrecuencia
RIA Remote Interface Adapter
Adaptateur d’interface de télécommande
Adaptador de interfase telemando
RIAX Remote Interface Adapter extended
Adaptateur d’interface de télécommande étendé
Adaptador suplementario de interfase telemando
RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computing
Rechner mit reduziertem Befehlssatz
RL Radio link
Richtfunkverbindung
Liaison hetzienne
Radioenlace dirigido
RMMC Remote Monitoring and Maintenance Configuration
ROM Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule
Memoria permanente
RST Restart
Remettre en marche
Nueva puesta en marche
RTC Real Time Clock
Echtzeituhr
Rythme en temps réel
Reloj en tiempo real
RTCR Real Time Clock Routine
Routine de rythme en temps réel
Rutina de reloj en tiempo real
RTS Request to send
Marche l’émetteur
Activación del transmisor
RWY Runway
Landebahn
Piste d’aviation
Pista de aterrizaje

Ed. 08.09 SOAC AV−13

NAVAIDS 400
List of Abbreviations Conventional Navaids
RX Receiver
Récepteur
Receptor
RXC Receiver Clock
Rythme du récepteur
Reloj de receptor
RXD Receiver Data
Données de récepteur
Datos de receptor
RXRDY Receiver Ready
Récepteur prêt
Receptor listo
S Switch
Commutateur
Conmutador
SB Sideband
Bandes latérales
Banda lateral
SB1, SB2 Sideband 1, Sideband 2
Bandes latérales 1, 2
Banda lateral 1, 2
SBA Sideband A (used in VOR)
Bandes latérales A (utilizé en VOR)
Banda lateral A (utilizado para VOR)
SBB Sideband B (used in VOR)
Bandes latérales B (utilizé en VOR)
Banda lateral B (utilizado para VOR)
SBO Sideband Only
Bandes latérales seulement
Banda lateral solamente
SBR Subrack
Sous−bâti
Subrack (con junto)
SCC Serial Communication Controller
SDM Sum of Depths of Modulation
Somme des taux de modulation
Suma de grado de modulación
SMA Subminiature connector type A
Miniatur HF−Steckverbinder für Mikrowellenanwendungen
SPDT Single Pole Double Throw
Commutateur unipolaire
Conmutador unipolar doble
SP3T Single Pole 3 Throw
Commutateur unipolaire triple
Conmutador unipolar triple

AV−14 SOAC Ed. 08.09

 NAVAIDS 400
Conventional Navaids List of Abbreviations
SRAM Static Random Access Memmory
STOL Short Take−Off and Landing
Système de décollage et d’atterissage court
Despegue y aterrizaje corto
SUM Summensignal
Summation Signal
Signal de la somme
Señal de suma
SW Software
SYN (1) Synchronisation
Synchronisation
Sincronización
SYN (2) Synthesizer
TACAN Tactical Air Navigation
Navigation aérienne tactique
Navigación aérea táctica
TCXO Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator
Temperatur kompensierter Quarzoszillator
Oscillateur à quartz compensé par témperature
Oscilador de cuarzo termo compensado
TEG Test Generator
Générateur de test
Generador de test
THR Threshold
Schwellwert
Valeur de seuil
Nivel determinado
TNC Threaded Navy Connector
Koaxialverbinder mit Gewindekupplung
TNV Telephone Network Voltage
TOR Time Out Routine
Routine de temps de suspension
Rutina de tiempo de suspensión
TTL Transistor−Transistor Logic
Logique transistor−transistor
Lógica transistor − transistor
TX Transmitter
Emetteur
Transmisor
TXC Transmitter Clock
Rythme d’émetteur
Reloj de transmisor
TXD Transmitter Data
Données d’émetteur
Datos de transmisor

Ed. 08.09 SOAC AV−15

NAVAIDS 400
List of Abbreviations Conventional Navaids
TXRDY Transmitter Ready
Emetteur prêt
Transmisor listo
USART Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
Récepteur/émetteur universel synchrone/asynchrone
Receptor/transmisor universal síncrono/asíncrono
USB Upper Sideband (HF DVOR)
Bandes latérales supérieures
Banda lateral superior
UV Ultraviolet
Ultraviolet
Ultravioleta
VAM Voice Amplifier
Amplificateur vocal
Amplificador vocal
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VGA Video Graphic Adapter
VHF Very High Frequency
Hyperfréquence
Hiperfrecuencia
VOR Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Radio Range
Radiophare omnidirectionnel VHF
Radiofaro omnidireccional VHF
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
Taux d’ondulation
Grado de ondulación
VTOL Vertical Take−off and Landing
Décollage et atterrissage verticaux
Despegue y aterrizaje vertical
WI Width signal
Breite−Signal
Signal faisceau
WT Wechselstrom−Telegrafie
Voice−frequency carrier telegraphy
Télégraphie harmonique à ondes porteuses
Telegrafía armónica
ZF Zwischenfrequenz
Intermediate Frequency
ZU Zeichenumsetzer
Modem for data transfer
Convertisseur de signaux
Convertidor de señal

AV−16 SOAC Ed. 08.09

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance General Information

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 STORING AND UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT
1.1.1 General
The equipment should be unpacked as soon as possible in order to check that it is complete and
intact. The place of storage used for any intermediate storage period must be dry. The temperature
range specified in the technical data in Part 1 must be conformed with. The table below is an example
of the type of packing.
Pack- Contents Ref. No. Dimensions with Gross
age packaging (mm) weight (kg)
1 1 Shelter including: 3000 x 2440 x 2440 1,900
cabinet CVOR (equipped):
− 50 W dual or single or 83011 40100 / 40150
− 100 W dual or single 83011 40200 / 40250

enclosed: 1 Matching Device 58317 24013

Documentation CVOR
2 1 CVOR antenna 83131 72401 3500 x 1100 x 1300 500
2,400

Fig. 1−1 CVOR in 10 ft container shelter for all types of transport

Pack- Contents Ref. No. Dimensions with Gross
age packaging (mm) weight (kg)
1 1 Cabinet CVOR (equipped) 1940 x 830 x 880* approx. 279
1980 x 880 x 890** approx. 323
− 50 W dual or single or 83011 40100 / 40150
− 100 W dual or single 83011 40200 / 40250
2 Documentation CVOR
3 1 CVOR antenna 83131 72401 3500 x 1100 x 1300 approx. 500
* Corrugated paper container ** wooden crate

Fig. 1−2 CVOR with packing for rail or road transport

1.1.2 Unpacking
The equipment and components are also packed in wooden crates for transport by sea. These wood-
en crates should always be deposited with the side marked "Oben" (Top) facing upwards.
− Open the lid of these crates using a hammer and nail puller. Remove the filler. Remove the equip-
ment in the plastic sheeting horizontally, and lay it down so that the side marked "Oben" faces up-
wards. Cut open the plastic sheet and remove the equipment.

CAUTION

The packaging with the transmitter cabinet (Fig. 1−3) should always be laid down so that
the pallet (Fig. 1−3/4) is at the bottom. In addition arrows and inscriptions painted on the
crate indicate the side which must face upwards.

Ed. 01.04 1−1

CVOR 431
General Information Operation and Maintenance
− Cut through the three plastic ribbons (Fig. 1−3/2) with scissors and remove. Lift off the telescope
box (Fig. 1−3/1), 2 people required. Remove the foam panel (Fig. 1−3/8). Carefully lift the
transmitter cabinet (Fig. 1−3/6), 2 people required, and install in a vertical position.

WARNING

Hold the transmitter cabinet firmly in position until the support angles (Fig. 1−3/3 and 5)
have been dismantled. Pay special attention when removing the lower support angle.

− Undo the two screws (M10) left and right on the upper support angles (Fig. 1−3/5). Remove the
screws and washers and the upper support angles left and right. Tilt the transmitter cabinet (Fig.
1−3/6) forward slightly, hold it and dismantle the lower support angle (Fig. 1−3/3). Then carry the
transmitter cabinet to its point of installation and screw to the floor.
− Open the front door and remove the foam panel behind it. Unscrew and remove both retaining
supports (Fig. 1−3/8) which fix the subassemblies of the trandmitter subracks for transport.
− Close the front door.

Store away all despatch packaging (Fig. 1−3), so that it can be used again for transport purposes
if required. Use the original packaging components to repack. Repack the equipment and subassem-
blies as described above, but in reverse sequence.

8
7

ÂÂÂ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
3

1
2
Telescope box
Plastic ribbon
ÂÂÂ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÂÂÂ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÂÂÂ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
5
3 lower support angle

Ä
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
(ref. no. 36480 28009)
4 Pallet 4

ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
5 upper support angle (2x)
(ref. no. 36385 28026)
6
7
8
Transmitter cabinet
Foam panel
Retaining support (2x)
ÄÄÄÄÂ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
Fig. 1−3 Packaging for rail and road transport

1−2 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance General Information
1.2 STORING AND UNPACKING THE CVOR ANTENNA

The CVOR antenna is supplied in a crate with dimensions approx. 3500 x 1300 x 1100 [mm].

CAUTION

This crate is not suitable for stacking, and should not be subjected to any load. The crane
driver must be instructed that it is essential to pull the lifting cable under the pallet. The
crate may be transported using the fork lift truck, because the pallet has been designed
accordingly.

If intermediate storage is necessary, the crate or the unpacked antenna should be stored in a dry
room. It is advisable to check the intactness of the antenna immediately after it is received. An un-
packed antenna should always be stored on the pallet.

loosen and remove

5 parts with crowbar

approx.
1300 mm

pallet = carrying surface

approx. 3500 mm
plastic sheeting stapled
to the wooden section

remove wooden clamps

Fig. 1−4 Packaging for CVOR antenna

The antenna should be unpacked with care. On no account should the crate be forced open with a
hammer. A crowbar (nail puller) should be used to remove the nails and loosen the side sections. The
pallet, the lid and the side panels should be preserved for transport at a later date. After removing the
crate sections remove the plastic sheeting 3 m x 5 m. This too should be stored for use at a later date.
The ends of the antenna are secured with two wooden clamps for protection during transport. Re-
move these wooden clamps.

CAUTION

The antenna may only be lifted at the ends. Four persons should carry it. Weight of anten-
na: With crate 495 kg, without crate 115 kg.
If no fork lift truck is available, the antenna should be unloaded on delivery such that the distance over
which the unpacked antenna is transported is as short as possible.

Ed. 01.04 1−3

CVOR 431
General Information Operation and Maintenance

1.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION

1.3.1 Safety Precautions
It is the task of the site supervisor or construction manager to make available the materials supplied
by Thales, independently procured special materials and tools. For every site strict attention should
be paid to safety regulations issued by the local authorities.
1.3.1.1 General Rules
The following rules should be observed for prevention of accidents:
− Consumption of alcohol in any form is forbidden on the installation site.
− Drunken persons, or those under influence of alcohol will not be tolerated on the installation site.
− Protective goggles and safety gloves are to be worn when work is being carried out on batteries.
Rinsing water, soda and several cleaning cloths should be available.
− Sturdy shoes, safety gloves and safety helmets are to be worn. Safety belts with rescue line and
carbine swivel have to be used working on the counterpoise platform.
− Protruding nails, strips etc. must be removed immediately. Ladders and planks must always be
carefully checked before use.
− Do not tread on protruding plank sections.
− Never leave objects on scaffolding or ladders.
− Scaffolding or frames are to be erected sturdily and must always be tested before use.
− Test electrical devices and extension cables for accident safety.
− Remove fuses before carrying out work on mains.
− Wear protective goggles when carrying out sanding or drilling operations.
− Sand off burr from chisels and punches in good time.
− Test striking tools for tightness of fit.
− Do not put pointed or sharp objects into working−clothing pockets.
− Jewelry such as chains and rings should be removed when working on building sites −
especially when working with electrical devices.
− Always keep escape routes clear.
− Every employee on an installation site should know:
 where the First−Aid box is kept
 the telephone number of the nearest casualty doctor and eye specialist
 where the fire extinguisher is kept
 the location of hazardous areas on the way to the work place, or at the work place itself.
1.3.1.2 Precautionary Measures against Damage caused by Animals

Damage caused by animals is highly improbable. The door should be locked in the absence of the
personnel. During installation and maintenance period it is absolutely essential that the radome re-
mains closed overnight as well as during work breaks in the daytime. Otherwise it is likely that birds
will build their nests inside the radome.

1.3.1.3 Equipment Safety Notes

Subassemblies should not be removed whilst under voltage. The consequence of this type of action
is the likelihood of permanent damage and the transmitter cabinet can not be set in operation cor-
rectly.
Never energize the installation with a non−grounded rack. The first electrical connection to be made
should be the rack ground. If there is no ground, the equipment central processing unit may develop
a fault or become blocked.

1−4 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance General Information
1.3.2 Personnel Requirement

At least 4 persons are required to install the shelter. In addition to the crane driver, at least two further
persons are required to install the antenna on the counterpoise. It is however advisable to keep four
persons ready for all installation work, so that a standby is available in case of unforeseen events.
If the antenna is lifted onto the shelter roof using improvised means and without a crane truck, then
four persons are absolutely essential, and a fifth person would simplify operations.

1.3.3 Tools and Special Materials

The delivery list provided by Thales should be checked at as early a date as possible in order to iden-
tify materials not included in the Thales scope of delivery which may be essential for the infrastructure
of the overall installation. For example, materials for grounding the CVOR installation must be pro-
vided. Suggestions and instructions on correct grounding are contained in Chapter 2. The following
tools and equipment are the minimum required to unpack and assemble the equipment and the an-
tenna system (not including the DME or the TACAN):

1 crane truck, lifting capacity
500 kg, min. jib reach 3 m, lifting height approx. 7 m;
alternatively a 10 to 12 m long guyed auxiliary mast with block and tackle can be used
(see also installation of CVOR antenna)
1 crowbar
1 hammer 1000 g
2 ratchets with sets of sockets
1 three−square scraper
1 inch ruler
1 spirit level
1 impact drill, min. power 600 W
1 set screwdrivers, blade width 3.5 mm to 8 mm
various flat and round files
various carbide drills
various twist drills for metal
2 Protective goggles
1 Safety belt with rescue line and carbine swivel
1 First Aid box
4 (5) Safety helmets, safety gloves
The list does not include standard tools, such as cable stripping knives, various pliers, side cutting
pliers, metal cutters, chisels, center punches, or electrical instruments, such as continuity testers,
voltage testers or a digital multimeter.

Ed. 05.06
01.04 1−5
CVOR 431
General Information Operation and Maintenance

1−6 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance General Information
1.4 LIST OF RECOMMENDED INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORIES

The following list contains recommendations for instruments, cables, attenuators, adapters and other
accessories, which may be used for installation, maintenance and trouble shooting of navigation
equipment, or at least will make the work easier. This equipment (or that with comparable characteris-
tics) is normally present within large workshops or central repair facility. If not, it can be supplied op-
tionally by Thales. A selection of necessary equipment and accessories to be provided can be defined
in consultation with Thales.
However, the minimum test equipment and accessories actually required for installation and commis-
sioning is listed in the Alignment Section. This equipment is typically recommended to be always
available at or near equipment to support troubleshooting and repairs. For the appropriate works the
necessary equipment is mentioned in the chapters concerned.

Ed. 05.06
01.04 1−7
CVOR 431
General Information Operation and Maintenance

1−8 Ed. 01.04

 Navaids 400
Operation and Maintenance General Information

ILS CVOR DVOR Marker

Designation Code No . Remarks/Type

Digital Voltmeter 97991 28217 x x x

Dual trace oscilloscope 97991 28454 TDS 360 x x x x
Thruline Wattmeter 97991 28040 0.45...2300 MHz x x x x
Monitor dipole, mobile 58317 24019 x
Dipole 60 cm 38826 28006 x
Mon. dipole add. parts mobile 83131 72409 x
Tripod 19614 72801 G5K, No. 1151 x
VOR−Monitor signal simulator 83134 31600 x
ILS/VOR signal analyzer 97991 28447 7010 portable x x
Attenuator 100 W/30 dB 49901 28051 50 Ohm
RBU100.8654.37 x
Probe 19983 15001 x

Measuring element 50 W 97991 28043 50 C, Bird, 100...250 MHz x x x

Measuring element 25 W 97991 28111 25 D, Bird, 200...500 MHz x
Measuring element 10 W 97980 28193 10 C, Bird, 100...250 MHz x x
Measuring element 5 W 97991 28112 5 D, Bird, 200...500 MHz x
Measuring element 1 W 97991 28192 095−1, Bird, 275...450 MHz x
Measuring element 1 W 97991 28193 275−1, Bird, 100...250 MHz x x x
Measuring element 5 W 97991 28041 5 C, Bird, 100...250 MHz x x
Measuring element 100 W 97991 28182 100 C, Bird, 100...250 MHz x x

Directional coupler 97991 28273 HP 778 D x x x

Terminating resistor 97991 28274 HP 8491 A, 30 dB, opt. 30 x x x
Attenuator 100 W/30 dB 97499 28007 50 Ohm BN 745395 x x x
3−dB−coupler 49901 23002 CH−132, M.SMA x x x
VHF−dummy load 1 W 24338 20401 50 Ohm, BN753790 x
Attenuator 20 dB/3,5 W 49901 20402 50 Ohm BN654104 x x x
Attenuator 10 dB/1 W 49901 20405 50 Ohm R414510 TNC x x x
Attenuator 6 dB/2.5 W 49901 20403 50 Ohm R414506 TNC x x x
Attenuator 20 dB/1 W 49901 20406 50 Ohm R414520 TNC x x x
Attenuator 10 dB/10 W 49901 28044 50 Ohm BN745383 x −

Adapter 24334 20323 TNC male/fem. BN150419 x x x

Adapter 24334 20342 TNC male/male BN746700 x x x
Adapter 24334 20403 TNC fem./fem. BN746600 x x x
Adapter 24334 20404 BNC male/banana SHU06996 x x x
Adapter 24334 20408 BNC male/TNC fem. BN712100 x x x
Adapter 24334 20409 TNC male/N fem. BN725900 x x x

x = available (optional)

Ed. 01.04 1−9

Navaids 400
General Information Operation and Maintenance

ILS CVOR DVOR Marker

Designation Code No Remarks/Type

Adapter 24334 20412 TNC fem./N male BN 725800 x x x

Adapter 24334 28017 SMA male/TNC fem. BN150907 x x x
Adapter 24334 28018 SMA fem./TNC male BN150908 x x x

RF−cable, 0,5 m 24029 28051 TNC male/male x x x

RF−cable, 2 m 24029 28052 TNC male/male x x x
RF−cable, 2 m 24029 28207 BNC male/male x x x

RF−cable, 55°/113MHz 27288 03859 TNC male/fem. x

RF−cable, 30 m 24029 28062 TNC male/male BN201961 x x
RF−cable, 0,08 m 24029 28185 TNC male/fem., 50 Ohm x x
RF−cable, 0,60 m 24029 28187 TNC male/fem., 50 Ohm x x x
RF−cable, 0,40 m 24029 28373 N male/TNC male, 50 Ohm x x x
RF−cable 27288 03856 SMA/TNC x
RF−cable 27288 03886 SMA−N RG400 x
AF−cable, 3 m 24029 28218 Banana pin/banana pin, shielded x x x
AF−cable 24039 28136 ∅ 2.52 , 300 mm yellow/green x
AF−cable 24039 28137 ∅ 2.52 , 520 mm yellow/green x
AF−cable 24039 28138 ∅ 2.52 , 520 mm blue x
AF−cable 24039 28139 ∅ 2.52 , 520 mm brown x

Coaxial adapter 97243 21318 BNC fem./TNC fem. BN712300 x x x

Coaxial adapter 97243 21319 BNC fem./TNC male BN712000 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21320 BNC male/BNC male BN591700 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21321 BNC fem./N male BN999400 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21322 TNC fem./N fem. BN726000 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21323 SMA fem./TNC fem. BN150906 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21324 SMA fem./BNC fem. BN640802 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21325 SMA male/BNC fem. BN640800 x x x

Others (Used for battery charging/maintenance):

Acid syringe with areometer

Acid jug
Funnel
Container (non−metallic) with distilled water
Cleaning agent (vaseline, soda, waste wool)

x = available (optional)

1−10 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation

CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
2.1 SELECTING THE INSTALLATION SITE

The area in which a CVOR is to be installed is determined by the responsible Civil Aviation Authority
according to the international air traffic regulations. This area is generally sufficiently large to allow
a point with the optimum topography and thus the optimum propagation conditions to be choosen.
This point is determined by means of a site survey at which a surveyor must always be present. Thales
can provide an engineering consultant on site for this survey. When the installation site has been de-
termined precise bearings must be taken, either with reference to trigonometrical points or − if a satel-
lite receiver is available − via satellite radio for increased precision.

Individual tree with height up to 12 m

Group of trees
Telephone lines
Buildings with metallic content 2,5°

Radial power lines up to 10 kV

2°
Shrubbery, wire fences up to 1.20 m Power lines <10 kV
Sheds, individual trees with heights 7 m if horizontal spread <10°
1,5°

CVOR Station 1° Dense forest.

Buildings with metallic content
0,5°
Metallic buildings (hangars)
type h = 3 m

65 m
250 m
terrain slope 400 m
terrain slope
<2,3% terrain slope 600 m
<4%
<8%
terrain slope not specified

TOP VIEW

ÄÄÄÄ
flat, obstacle free r250 m r400 m
terrain

ÄÄÄÄ
r600 m
r65 m

ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ group of trees
h<12 m

ÄÄÄÄ
<7°

wire fences h<7 m

h<1,2 m
h<10 m forest
no metallic <10°
h<13 m
objects
metallic buildings

power lines h<7 m

h<8 m
power lines h<10 m

Fig. 2−1 CVOR siting criteria (general data)

Ed. 01.04 2−1

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.2 VOR SHELTER

2.2.1 General
The following type of shelter is available to build up an CVOR installation:
− 10 ft CVOR container shelter Ref. No. 83134 60010
An adaptation plate ref. no. 35980 28001 is available for adaptation to existing shelter/buildings.

2.2.2 Shelter Foundation

The following drawing shows the foundations for the standard 10 ft shelter which is used in a modified
version for a CVOR Installation. The drawings are for information only.

1 2 15
3
4
15
15
22,5

25

min. 10
48
door 5 *)
279
ÉÉ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÉÉ
35
min. 100

ÉÉ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÉÉ
249

ÉÉ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÉÉ
8

A ÉÉ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÉÉ 9

View A−A
90° rotated
50

5 *)

A 50

NOTE:
− Dimensions in cm
− Concrete quality B25

1 Tube for data, signal and monitor cable Optional

2 Tube for mains voltage supply cable 7 Bitumen coating (Nitroprime−10)
3 Tubes diameter 100 mm ∅ each 8 Damp proof course (min. 150 µm)
4 Arrangement for cable entry through the shelter floor 9 Stone bedding (Layer height approx. 150 mm)
5 Recess (4x) only for use of rag bolts
*) ommitted for shelter fixing with anchor rods
6 selected filling, 100 % compressed

Fig. 2−2 CVOR 10 ft shelter, foundations (informative view)

2−2 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.2.3 CVOR Container Shelter
See Figs. 2−3 to 2−6.
The Navaids equipment can be supplied already installed in a 10 ft Standard Shelter (type 1D) which
is offered by Thales. To cover the requirements the shelter is based on the definition on transport con-
tainers ISO/DIN standards. The shelter consists of a self−supporting, distortion resistant steel frame
construction with eight ISO corners and walls made of sandwich panels in standardized container
dimensions.

WARNING

Sturdy shoes, safety gloves and safety helmets are to be worn during installation. Safety
belts with rescue line and carbine swivel have to be used working on the counterpoise
platform. Avoid walking on the counterpoise outer parts during antenna installation.

During installation, the shelter should be placed on the foundations such that the door is oriented
according to the site survey and project drawings. The shelter is anchored to the four foundation
blocks using the ISO corners and twist locks. The power supply (mains) and signal (RC, field monitor)
feeder cables enter from below through openings in the shelter floor.

NOTE: When installing the antenna it should be remembered that the roof of the shelter may be
mounted by two persons max., though the lateral counterpoise sections should not be
used as a working surface.

No risk is involved if these sections are mounted briefly occasionally, providing all sup-
ports are fitted correctly.

A completely flat, electrically homogeneous counterpoise surface, which remains stable

in windy conditions, is essential for the quality of the radiated signal. A check should be
performed following installation to ensure that the surface of the counterpoise has no un-
even points higher than 5 mm or cracks longer than 50 mm.

When transporting the shelter by crane or helicopter, care should be taken to ensure that the angle
between the lifting harness and the crate is at least 60° (see Fig. 2−3).

min. 60°

Fig. 2−3 Correct lifting with a lifting harness

Ed. 01.04 2−3

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

Support for A/C counterpoise

5000 diameter

2554

2438
2991 2438
(Dimensions in mm; Tare weight approx. 900 kg, without counterpoise)

CVOR antenna radome

mounting for CVOR antenna

counterpoise (diameter 5 m)

Air Conditioner

supports for lateral parts

of the counterpoise

Lead through used

for DVOR antenna 10 ft Container Shelter
connections

Ventilation of battery box

Fig. 2−4 10 ft CVOR container shelter, dimension and general view

2−4 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation

mounting hole for CVOR antenna Matching Device CVOR

Location

Â
Â
Concrete foundation
Location of cabinets
cable feed opening (CVOR, DME, TACAN)

Battery Box

Fig. 2−5 10 ft CVOR container shelter without counterpoise, inner design

Wiring Diagram of electrical Installation

option box Main Distribution Panel

Main Fuse
switch
L1 *
L2

L3
Residual
Current Breaker
N 40
I>
0.03
FI1
B2A

B10A B18A C20A C20A C20A C20A

B10A
B10A

PE F4 F3 F1 F2 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9
change o.

Overvoltage
Protection 4 3 1 Spare 2 5 6 7 8 9 10
optional
..
optional

BCPS θ junction box

DME

+
− 48 V set to heater
36 °C
TX DME A/C1 A/C2
Earth Collector Bar

BCPS if available Temp.

TX Rack Sensor
DME Inside Light Socket outlets Air−Conditioner
etc.
Single Phase "Option"
F21 (2x G0.2A)
F20 (2x K50A)

20 protected wires
(or ten pairs)
−
Station Ground

+
twilight obstruction lights
Signal lines 90 V/Type F
Emergency battery switch 1 2
NF 600 OHM 48 V
Line Terminal Box (AF−distribution)

Fig. 2−6 Standard shelter, electrical installation CVOR (example)

Ed. 01.04 2−5

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.2.3.1 Mounting the Counterpoise

   A,B,C 14,11
44

22,23,27

5

counterpoise

eye bolt

warning sign
ACCESS PROHIBITED

outer part outer part

pivot to hang outer parts

(assembly aid)

center part
5 support 22 hex. nut 44 eye bolt
6 angle 23 spring washer
9 clamp 25 hex. screw
10 contact plate 26 spring washer
11 cover 27 hex. screw
14 L ring 28 spring washer
15 fittings 29 washer
16 fittings 38 round seal
18 sealant pistol 41 hex. screw NOTE:
19 sealant 42 hex. nut
20 plate screw 43 spring washer  means detailed figures

Fig. 2−7 Assembly of counterpoise (∅ 5 m) (1 of 2)

2−6 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
1 Assembly of center part  33,34 11
A
Unscrew antenna opening cover (11), re−use (33) and (34) to se-
cure (14) (see  A).

ø 480
Mount L ring (14) with (33) and (34), then seal the joint between shel-
ter roof and L−ring completely using the sealant provided (18,19) 14
33,34
(see  B).
19 (18)
complete seal
Secure the 4 contact plates (10) to the two longer sides of the center B
part using plate screws (20). Cut off excess material (see ).

ø 480
Secure connection fittings (15) and (16) to upper ISO corners of ø 488
shelter with (9, 25, 26) (see ). center part

Lift center part onto shelter roof (use ring screws (44) as eye bolts) 38
and center. C
Screw connection fittings (15) and (16) to center part using (41, 42,
43) and (27, 28, 29) (see ).
ø 480

Remove the four ring screws (44).  10 20

center part
Insert round seal (38) between L ring of shelter roof and plate ring
of center part (access from inside shelter) (see  C).

cut off excess parts

2 Assembly of outer parts
 16 mirror symetrical
41
Secure four angle connectors (6) to lower shelter frame using (27, connection fitting
15 42
28) (see ). 43
27
28
Hang outer part onto pivots of center part, lift supports and screw 25 29
to outer part using connections (22, 23, 27). 26
front door
9

Screw outer parts and center part together using (27, 28; 14 re-  5 27, 28
quired per side) (see ).

3 Assembly of the CVOR antenna

After positioning and securing the CVOR antenna with the counter-
poise, seal the base ring and the antenna flange completely with
6
sealant (19). Use sealant pistol.
 27, 28

outer part

center part

Fig. 2−7 Assembly of counterpoise (∅ 5 m) (2 of 2)

Ed. 01.04 2−7

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.2.3.2 Installation of the CVOR Antenna

See Figs. 2−8 to 2−13.

NOTE: The antenna should not normally be unpacked from its transportation crate until it is in
the immediate vicinity of the shelter.

WARNING

When installing the antenna on the shelter roof, observe any relevant safety regulations.
(regard also information in section 2.2.3).
At least 3 to 4 people are required for handling the antenna, which weights approximately
115 kg. Handle the antenna carefully during transportation and installation. Take particu-
lar care with the antenna connection.
a) Installing the antenna with the aid of a crane:
− If a crane is used to install the antenna, hooks or similar should only be secured to the jack rings
on the cover plate (Fig. 2−8/4).
− Unpack the antenna (Fig. 2−8/2) and keep the joint sealing compound (washing bottle)
(Fig. 2−8/3) in a safe place.
− Raise the antenna onto the shelter roof with the aid of the crane, and position with the antenna
connection in the recess provided in the antenna adapter plate.
b) Installing the antenna without aid of a crane:
− Construct a sloping plane with two sufficiently stable beams and secure to the roof structure.
− Position the beams sufficiently far apart for the ends of the antenna to be laid on them.
− Roll the antenna up the beams, then install and position with the antenna connection in the recess
in the antenna adapter plate.

WARNING

Secure the antenna with anchoring wires or supports to prevent it falling over until it has
been screwed tight.

c) Further steps

− Mark the position of the two overlapping quarter−shells of the antenna cover (radome) and re-
move the shells.

CAUTION

There is a risk of damage to the antenna system when the quarter−shells are removed!

− Remove the transportation safeguard (2 angle bars) (Fig. 2−11/3).

− Position the ø 13 mm holes in the antenna base ring (Fig. 2−11/5) so that they are exactly congru-
ent with those in the antenna adapter plate (with the center section of the cover above it).

2−8 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
− Screw the antenna adapter plate (Fig. 2−9/1) to the antenna base ring (Fig. 2−9/3) to standard
tightness using 8 hexagonal bolts (Fig. 2−9/2).
− Remove the anchoring wires or supports.
− Screw the lower mount for the quarter−shells (Fig. 2−11/7) to the antenna adapter plate
(Fig. 2−11/8) to standard tightness using 8 hexagonal bolts.
− Loosen the 8 hexagonal bolts (Fig. 2−9/5) until the antenna base can be turned on the antenna
base ring.
− Insert a metal rod (Fig. 2−10/3) (or a long, sturdy screwdriver) into the two holes at the bottom of
the inner tube (Fig. 2−10/2).
− Turn the inner tube (and thus also the antenna system) as shown in Fig. 2−12 until the imaginary
line from the monitor mast to the longitudinal axis of the inner tube divides the 90° angle between
the two dipole halves into two sectors of 45°.
− Tighten the 8 hexagonal nuts (Fig. 2−9/5) to standard tightness.
− Remove the metal rod (or similar).
− Seal the joint (Fig. 2−11/4) with the joint sealing compound (Fig. 2−8/3).
− Secure the matching device subassembly in the immediate vicinity of the opening in the center of
the ceiling using self−tapping screws.
− Connect the coaxial cables (see Fig. 2−13).

1 2

1 Transportation crate
2 CVOR antenna
3 Joint sealing compound
4 Cover plate with 2 jack rings

Fig. 2−8 CVOR antenna in transportation crate

Ed. 01.04 2−9

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

1 Antenna adapter plate

2 Hexagonal bolt
3 Antenna base ring
4 Washer
5 Hexagonal nut
6 Antenna base
(welded to inner tube)
7 Inner tube
8 Hexagonal bolt
9 Ring

Fig. 2−9 Locking device at antenna base

1 Radome (quarter shells)

2 Inner tube
3 Metal rod
4 Antenna base
5 Lower mount for quarter shells

Fig. 2−10 Mechanical alignment of antenna

2−10 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation

3
1 Underlapping quarter shells
2 Inner tube
3 Transportation safeguard
4 Joint 4
5 Antenna base ring
6 Antenna base
7 Lower mount for quarter shells
8 Antenna adapter plate 8 7 6 5

Fig. 2−11 Securing the CVOR antenna

monitor mast

45° 45°
CVOR antenna rotating

CVOR−antenna
Dipole A
Dipole B

Fig. 2−12 Mechanical alignment of the CVOR antenna

Ed. 01.04 2−11

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

CVOR Antenna
83131 72401

A LR UR B
Z1
connecting panel
from transmitter cabinet

IN SB1
(SBA) (W1) 24029 28537
Matcher
Power divider LR
J3 J1 J2
IN CARR. CSB J1 (W5) 24029 28378
UR
(W3) 24029 28537 J2 J1 J2

Matching Device (W6) 24029 28378

58317 24013
Z2
IN SB2
(SBB) (W2) 24029 28537

NOTE:The antenna should be connected to the matching device and the transmitter as shown in the diagram.
The matching device plate is located underneath the shelter roof next to the circular opening for the CVOR antenna.

Fig. 2−13 Connecting diagram for CVOR antenna

2.2.3.3 Assembly of an Obstruction Light

If the antenna has to be fitted with obstruction lighting, the procedure is as follows:
− Remove the cover plate and keep in a safe place.
− Position the adapter for the obstruction light (Fig. 2−14) and screw to standard tightness.
− Lay the supply cable in the inner tube.
− Connect the lamp socket.
− Screw the lamp housing to the PG16 thread (PG16 = 16 mm armored thread).
− Connect the supply cable in the shelter.

PG16

Fig. 2−14 Adapter for obstruction light (Ref. no. 38150 28182)

2−12 Ed. 03.11

01.04
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.2.3.4 Antenna Combinations
See Fig. 2−15.

The antenna can be combined with other antennas by mounting various adapters on the antenna
dome. In addition to the standard cover (antenna cover), Ref. no. 32436 28075, the following adapters
are available:

− Adapter for DME antenna ANS 96/86 + 87) Ref. no.. 32436 28078
− Adapter for TACAN antenna cable Ref. no. 32436 28077

Refer also to Section 2.7 Installation of DME antenna.

Adapter for DME antenna (ANS 96/86+87) Adapter for TACAN antenna cable
Ref. no. 32436 28078 Ref. no. 32436 28077

Fig. 2−15 Adapter for CVOR antenna

Ed. 01.04 2−13

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.2.4 Installation of the Field Monitor and Monitor Mast

See Fig. 2−16.
Install the CVOR field monitor to a mast at a distance of 7...8 m from the center at the north side, e.g.
between the dipole A (SBA) and dipole B (SBB).

Two monitors at an angle of 90° may be used optionally.

The required mast shall have the following characteristics: length approx. 7000 mm, ø130...180 mm,
material: wood; it is normally supplied by the customer. The mast can also be supplied by Thales (Ref.
No. 83130 03442).

wooden mast

field monitor dipole

NORTH CVOR monitor mast (monitor 1)

approx. 4500

protective pipe
7000...8000

approx. 1000

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
CVOR Antenna
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
cable duct
500...1000
(dipole A, B) min. 1600

max. 2500
CVOR monitor mast (monitor 2)
optional

ARRANGEMENT

grounding conductor

INSTALLATION

(dimensions in [mm])

Fig. 2−16 Arrangement and installation CVOR field monitor (example)

2−14 Ed. 05.06

Ed. 01.04
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.2.5 Installation of the Monitor Dipoles for 8 Point Ground Check Option
See Fig. 2−17.

To perform the installation of the monitor dipoles for CVOR 8 point ground check option, mounting
kits are available for the CVOR cabinet (Ref.No. 83135 12050) and the additional monitor dipoles
(Ref.No. 83131 72412). For the monitor dipoles, the kit comprises one dipole, mast support and RF
cable. This means seven kits are necessary for a 8 PGC installation. The standard diole is further in
use. To install the monitor dipoles for the 8 point ground check option proceed as follows:

− The CVOR antenna system is completely installed.

− The monitor dipoles for 8 point ground check are mounted to the counterpoise edge or, for existing
CVOR counterpoise installations with no mounting facilities, on masts next to the counterpoise
edge. The installation position of the monitor dipoles above the counterpoise is recommended to
be about 800 mm (standard height). The dipoles are normally installed at the counterpoise edge.
For example, the dipoles can be fixed each on a GFK mast tube, which is mounted with clamps
at the edge of the counterpoise or on to wooden masts next to the counterpoise edge like the
mounting of the standard monitor dipole (Fig. 2−17).

NOTE: For correct measurement it is essential that the dipole are arranged correctly one to
another in a angle distance of 45° related to the centre of the counterpoise. This should
be regarded when aligning the CVOR antenna to North or the position of the first stan-
dard dipole.

− The additional monitor cables are fed in a appropriate manner to the shelter.

The installation at the CVOR cabinet side is described in section 2.4.

CVOR antenna
8 PGC Dipole
approx.
Counterpoise 800 mm

Fig. 2−17 Height position of 8 PGC monitor dipoles

Ed. 01.04 2−15

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2−16 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.3 INSTALLATION AT THE RACK IN THE SHELTER
2.3.1 General
This chapter describes the connections at the transmitter rack: power supply, RF connections, inter-
face connections and connection of a Remote Control (RMMC).
NOTE: For the Thales shelter delivered with the navaids system all fuses are preinstalled. If the
shelter is provided by the customer, he will be responsible for the installation including
a mains fuse box with arrester and a battery fuse box. Following fuse protection is recom-
mended: external mains fuse for transmitter cabinet F= C20A, for battery fuse
F20= K50A (power) and F21= G0.2A (sensor lines), regard also Fig. 2−6.
For a mains voltage of 115 VAC the standard mains wiring concept allows up to 3 ACC
modules. For a 115 VAC supply with 4 modules provided, standard mains wiring has to
be adapted concerning diameter of supply cables, size of mains terminals and mains filter.
2.3.2 Power Supply
2.3.2.1 Power Connections
See Figs. 2−18, 2−19 and 2−26.
The terminal blocks for electrical and signal connections as listed below are installed on the BCPS
connection plate and the C−bar, which are located at the lower back side of the transmitter cabinet,
or on the transmitter cabinet bottom plate. They are accessible after opening the rear door of the rack:
BCPS connection plate:
− 6 mains terminals L1, L2, L3, N, PE (Protective Earth) and FPE (Functional Protective Earth)
− 1 Speedy connector 26pin for control signals to/from the BCPS from TX
− 2 single terminal blocks for battery (+ and −), factory wired
− 2 single terminal blocks for NAV equipment, factory wired
− 5 terminals for measuring lines to the battery, factory wired
C−bar:
− 2 single terminal blocks for connecting the battery (+B,−B)
− 5 terminals (2,1, F, F, 0) for measuring lines to the battery BAT2, BAT1, 2 BFUSE and BAT0
− 4 terminals (+D,−D; +R,−R) for connecting collocated DME and Radio Link (RL) equipment
− 1 single terminal block (+N,−N) for connecting the NAV equipment, factory wired
Bottom plate:
− 5 mains terminals L1, L2, L3, N, PE
− mains filter with mains terminals 4 In/4 Out/1 PE (european version only)
NOTE: The BCPS is a unit designed for "stationary operation", and its main connection and
protection measures should conform to VDE 0875*, Table 2, Paras. 6 and 7. The unit fulfils
the protection class I of EN 60950. The following should be noted in particular:
(* German industrial guide line for electrical installations)

 A permanently wired mains connection is recommended. The 230 VAC supply system
must be able to supply approx. 110 V in minimum, with an internal resistance of the
supply system < 0.5 ohms.
 If the wiring is not permanent, the plug−in connection must be protected against incor-
rect connection (e.g. Perilex or CEE connectors).
 The ground cable must be laid separately, and connected permanently to the FPE ter-
minal and to the connecting bolt (BSE) of the rack.
 A ground fault interrupter must be provided for a rated fault current of 30 mA.

Ed. 05.06 2−17

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance
The connection must be done in the following sequence:

WARNING

Before connecting the cables check that the mains lead is dead and that the battery is
not connected.

− Set the ON/OFF switches of the ACC 54 units to OFF. Remove the units.
− Remove the rear panel.
− Connect a cable between the terminal FPE and the potential equalization bus.
− Connect the mains leads (nom. 115 to 230 VAC/50 Hz, single phase) to the terminals designated
L1, N and PE located on the bottom plate and from there to the corresponding terminals on the
BCPS connection plate. If a mains filter is installed on the bottom plate (European version only)
connect the mains leads to the corresponding terminals on the mains filter and from there to the
terminals on the BCPS connection plate. The protective earth should be connected to PE.
− Connect the cables to the battery terminals BAT+ and BAT− located on the C−bar taking care
not to connect them the wrong way round.
− Connect the measurement lines to the battery terminals BAT0, BAT1, BAT2 and BFUSE (2x) lo-
cated on the C−bar if an auxiliary contact is available on the battery main switch.
− Connect the ground bolt (BSE) of the rack (Fig. 2−23) to the ground points and/or the potential
equalization bus of the shelter.

2.3.2.2 Connection of Battery Set

See Figs. 2−18, 2−19 and 2−26.

CAUTION

When connecting the DC supply observe the correct polarity (+ and −).
The battery set is connected via two pvc−insulated copper cables as per DIN 57281 with a cross−
sectional area of 16 mm2. The length of this connection is restricted to a maximum of 10 m for electrical
reasons.
(* German industrial standard for electrical installations)

Connect the leads to the terminals BAT (+) and BAT (−) on the C−bar. In order to protect the battery,
the positive line must have a 50 A fuse, if the battery monitoring program is used, and an automatic
overcurrent device (F20/50 ADC, in fuse box) with signalling contact.
Connect the signalling contacts to the terminals BFUSE of the measuring line connector. Install the
following cables for measuring purposes:
− from battery plus−pole via terminals of fuse switch F21 (in fuse box) to terminal BAT2 of measuring
line connector
− from the middle of the battery set via terminals of fuse switch F21 (in fuse box) to terminal BAT1
of the measuring line connector
− from battery minus−pole via terminals of fuse switch F21 (in fuse box) to terminal BAT0 of the mea-
suring line connector

2−18 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation

measuring line DME RL transmitter rack

battery terminal connector terminal terminal terminal C−bar mains terminal

to PMM Signboard

BAT BAT
Speedy

+B−B 2 1 F F0
+D −D +R −R +N −N
N L1 L2 L3 PE FPE
+
BAT BAT

NAV NAV
+
−

−
rear side of
transmitter rack ground bolt

PE L2 L2
L1 L1
transmitter rack
N

PE
bottom plate with L3
L2 L1

L3

cable glands N N
L3

protection
cover
bridge mains filter
mains input (european version only)
5 measuring line
terminal connectors position:
L2 L3 L3 L2
PE
fuse box L1 N N L1
F20 2 4 23
BFUSE
50 A DC IN OUT

ÂÂÂ
BFUSE
1 3 24

ÂÂÂ
BAT2 0.2 A F21
mains connection box
BAT1 shelter
BAT0
230 VAC

48 V

+ −

emergency battery battery box

NOTE:
As special option a 2 phase mains connection (e.g.
Signboard L1, L2) can be established to supply individually the
AC/DC converters 1 and 2.
−Battery
+Battery

BFUSE
BFUSE
UBAT2
UBAT1

UBAT0

−DME
+DME

−NAV
+NAV
−RL
+RL

In this case the default bridge between L1 and L2

must be removed at the mains input terminal !
−D
+D

−N
+N
−R
+R
+B

2
1
F
F
0
−B

factory wired

Fig. 2−18 Connections at the BCPS connection plate, C−bar and bottom plate

Ed. 05.06 2−19

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance
shelter ground
BP−BCPS FPE
BP−C
bottom plate
PE

Mains In
PE PE
N N
L1 L1
ACC 1 in mains
L2 filter L2
ACC 2 in
L3 L3
ACC 3/4 in

Speedy 26pin, male X74

12 12 BCPS−OFF BCPS ON/OFF

BCPS−OFF
GND 1 1 "L" = ON
GND (HC−level
3 3 BBCPS1
Modules

BCPS1
7 7 BBCPS2
BCPS2 Status−report
11 11 Modul defective
BBCPS3 = "L"−(HC−level)
BCPS3
15 15 BBCPS4
BCPS4
GND 5,19 5,19
5,19 GND
Flat ribbon cable
14 14
W109 NAV−
16 16 NAV+
18 18 IBAT−
20 Current measurement
20 IBAT+
9 9 UBAT−
22 22 UBAT1+
13 13 Voltage measurement
UBAT−
24 24 UBAT2+
19 19 OPTO_GND
Opto in
17 17 BFUSE (in_opto+24) BFUSE

RL + NAV S3 PMM
RL −
DME + TX1 S1
DME −
TX2 S2
+54 V +NAV
2mOhm F2 F1

Iload 0V −NAV
K1
ASU+
X1
ASU−
+BAT F20
+BAT X83
(to CSL)
50 A DC
BFUSE

BFUSE BP−DC
GND TX1 MON
LRCI
TX2 BP−T
0.2 A F21 CSL BP−C
BAT2
+

BAT1 48 V

BAT0
−
C bar

Ibat −BAT

2mOhm Fuse box

Shelter
Battery room Cabinet

Fig. 2−19 Power supply cabling: BCPS connection plate, C−bar and bottom plate, PMM

2−20 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.3.3 RF−Connections at Transmitter Rack
See Fig. 2−20, 2−26.
Make the following cable connections:
Transmitter Rack Cable No. Antenna Base Matching Device
SB1 W1 (SBA) A
SB2 W2 (SBB) B
CSB W3 IN CSB

Make the following cable connections, if one field monitor dipole is used:

Transmitter Rack Cable No. CP1 (T−piece) Cable No. Monitor Dipole
MON1 CP1 out
MON2 W7 CP1 out
CP1 IN W4 Monitor Dipole

Make the following cable connections, if two field monitor dipoles are used:

Transmitter Rack Cable No. CP1 (T−piece) Cable No. Monitor Dipole
MON1 W4 − − Monitor Dipole 1
MON2 W5 − − Monitor Dipole 2

The cable to the monitor(s) is fed from the monitor mast through a cable entry (bottom of the shelter).

NOTE: Connections for 8 point ground check refer to section 2.4.

Transmitter rack

(D)VOR (D)VOR
ETX−CPU COM4
SB1
LGM1 Local PC ASU−CONTROL DIAGNOSIS DME−IDENT

CSB LGM2/DME LGM3/NDB VAM ANALOG OIO LCP IN OIO LCP OUT
ETX−CPU COM2 ETX−CPU COM3

SPARE 1 SPARE 2 VARP LOCAL VOICE ETHERNET PTT LINE/LGM1

SB2
DVOR DVOR
CVOR MON4 MON3 MON2 MON1 CVOR

BCPS MON1 MON2 MON3 MON4 MON5 MON6 MON7 MON8

rear side

Fig. 2−20 CVOR Transmitter rack, top view, connectors

Ed. 05.06 2−21

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.3.4 Connection of optional ETX−CPU board in the cabinet

See Figs. 2−20, 2−21.
The interconnection of the optional ETX−CPU board within the cabinet is shown below.
NOTE:
The parts to install the ETX−CPU option are contained in the
MCS TCP/IP Local Kit Ref. No. 58351 00090. The kit comprises:

Cable W10...13 (speedy 10pin) Ref. No. 24009 28239

Cable W20...22 (speedy10/SubD9) Ref. No. 24009 28171 ETX−CPU COM4
Cabinet top panel
Cable W1 (RJ45) Ref. No. 24009 28003
LGM1 Local PC
Modular coupling connector RJ45 Ref. No. 24314 28197 W22
coupling connector
ETX−CPU board Ref. No. 84045 84300
LGM2/DME LGM3/NDB
Extender board for ETX−CPU Ref. No. 84045 84150 ETX−CPU COM2 ETX−CPU COM3

SPARE 1 SPARE 2 VARP LOCAL VOICE ETHERNET PTT LINE/LGM1

W21
W20
W1
BP−C, right, front view
Card Extension
Adapter
X12
ETX−CPU
COM1 X9
COM4
X103 X100 X106
W13

W12
COM2
COM3
X13

W11
X8
X20 X102 X101 X105 X104
W10

Fig. 2−21 ETX−CPU board, connection to motherboard BP−C and cabinet top

2−22 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.3.5 External Interface Connections and Pin Assignments
See Fig. 2−20, 2−23.
The following connectors are additionally available on the top and front of the transmitter cabinet:
− DME−IDENT analog DME interface
− DIAGNOSIS communication interface diagnostics
− LGM1/ dedicated line connection (to RMMC) with use of LGM 1200MD or
PTT connection (optional) or serial communication interface;
ETX−CPU COM4 serial communication interface (used with MCS*); GPRS connection
− LGM2/DME/ PTT connection (LGM 28.8) or serial communication interface DME;
ETX−CPU COM2 serial communication interface (used with MCS*)
− LGM3/NDB/ PTT connection (LGM 28.8) or serial communication interface NDB;
ETX−CPU COM3 serial communication interface (used with MCS*)
− ANALOG measurement purposes
− Local PC local operation (used as standard with ADRACS or MCS)
− VAM/ optional, voice or ATIS connection, e.g. from tower
VARP LOCAL VOICE optional, Voice Amplier and voice Record/Playback
− ETHERNET optional, LAN RJ45 connection (used with MCS*)
− PTT LINE/LGM1 optional, RJ11 connector PTT line, selectable to internal LGM1.. 3
− OIO LCP IN spare in, optocoupler
− OIO LCP OUT spare out, optocoupler
* optional, with use of MCS software and ETX−CPU board option

2.3.5.1 DME−IDENT
SubD, 37pin, male, from connector X85 BP−C. Refer to section 2.6.
2.3.5.2 DIAGNOSIS
SubD, 9pin, male, from connector X86 BP−C
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RXD 7 RTS
3 TXD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND
2.3.5.3 LGM1 or ETX−CPU COM4
SubD, 9pin, male, from connector X92 or X97 or X106 BP−C; X92 = LGM modem output
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 La 6 E
2 Lb 7 not used
3 A2 8 not used
4 B2 9 not used
5 GND
X97 = TTL (direct) or X106 = RS232
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RXD 7 RTS
3 TXD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND

Ed. 05.06 2−23

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.3.5.4 LGM2/DME or ETX−CPU COM2

SubD, 9pin, male, from connector X93 or X98 or X104 BP−C; X93 = LGM modem output
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 La 6 DSR
2 Lb 7 RTS
3 A2 8 CTS
4 B2 9 RI
5 GND
X98 = TTL/RS232 (direct) or X104 = RS232
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RXD 7 RTS
3 TXD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND
X98 = RS422 (direct)
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 TXD+ 6 RXD+
2 TXD− 7 RXD−
3 not used 8 not used
4 not used 9 not used
5 not used
2.3.5.5 LGM3/NDB or ETX−CPU COM3
SubD, 9pin, female, from connector X94 or X99 or X105 BP−C; X94 = LGM modem output
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 La 6 DSR
2 Lb 7 RTS
3 A2 8 CTS
4 B2 9 RI
5 GND
X99 = TTL/RS232 (direct) or X105 = RS232
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RXD 7 RTS
3 TXD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND
X99 = RS422 (direct)
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 TXD+ 6 RXD+
2 TXD− 7 RXD−
3 not used 8 not used
4 not used 9 not used
5 not used

2−24 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.3.5.6 ANALOG
SubD, 9pin, female, from connector X84 BP−C
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 ANALOG−IN1 6 ANALOG−IN2
2 ANALOG−IN3 7 ANALOG−IN4
3 ANALOG−IN5 8 ANALOG−IN6
4 15 VN−A (−15 V) 9 15 VP−A (+15 V)
5 AGND
2.3.5.7 Local PC
SubD, 9pin, male, from connector X4 of LCP
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RXD 7 RTS
3 TXD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND
2.3.5.8 VAM
SubD, 9pin, female, from connector X95 BP−C
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 LV1 6 LVG
2 LV2 7
3 SYNCH 8
4 SYNCR 9
5 GND
2.3.5.9 VARP LOCAL VOICE
RJ11, 6pin, from connector X107 (VARP modem) BP−C, optional, not assembled
RJ11, 6pin, connector X110 at BP−C
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1,2 n.c. 4 Lb
3 La 5,6 n.c.
2.3.5.10 ETHERNET
RJ45, 10pin from connector X20 ETX−CPU, optional
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 TXTP+ 6 RXTP−
2 TXTP− 7,8 n.c.
3 RXTP+ 9,10 SHLD
4,5 n.c.
2.3.5.11 PTT−LINE/LGM1
RJ11, 6pin, from connector X115 at BP−C, optional, not assembled (allocatable to LGM1 to 3)
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1,2 n.c. 4 Lb
3 La 5,6 n.c.

Ed. 05.06 2−25

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.3.5.12 OIO LCP IN

SubD, 25pin, male, to connector X2 of LCP via X82 BP−C
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 GND 14 VCC (+5 V)
2 TTLOUT3 (internal use) 15 IAUX0
3 IAUX1 16 IAUX2
4 IAUX3 17 IAUX4
5 IAUX5 18 IAUX6
6 IAUX7 19 IAUX8
7 IAUX9 20 IAUX10
8 IAUX11 21 IAUX12
9 IAUX13 22 IAUX14
10 IAUX15 23 TTLIN0 (internal use)
11 TTLIN1 (internal use) 24 TTLIN2 (internal use)
12 TTLOUT4 (internal use) 25 TTLIN3 (internal use)
13 GND

2.3.5.13 OIO LCP OUT

SubD, 25pin, female, from connector X2 of LCP via X82 BP−C

PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT

1 COM3 (common connect 3) 14 COM4 (common connect 4)
2 TTLOUT2 (internal use) 15 OAUX0
3 OAUX1 16 OAUX2
4 OAUX3 17 OAUX4
5 OAUX5 18 OAUX6
6 OAUX7 19 COM1 (common connect 1)
7 OAUX8 20 OAUX9
8 OAUX10 21 OAUX11
9 OAUX12 22 OAUX13
10 OAUX14 23 OAUX15
11 COM2 (common connect 2) 24 TTLOUT0 (internal use)
12 TTLOUT1 (internal use) 25 VCC (+5 V)
13 GND

2−26 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.3.6 External Interfaces, Cable Connections
2.3.6.1 Connection of Remote Control RMMC
− Dedicated line modem LGM1200MD: Connect a two wire line from RMMC to pins 1 and 2 of a
SubD, 9pin connector and connect to connector LGM1 on top of the cabinet.
NOTE: For LGM1200MD the ends of the dedicated line (station and remote side) have to be
terminated (600 ohms/47 nF parallel). The RC combination may be soldered to the
9pin SubD connector together with the two wire line.
− Switched line modem: Connect a two wire line from PTT/RMMC to pins 1 and 2 of a SubD, 9pin
connector and connect to connector LGM1 (or LGM2, LGM3, if modem assembled) on top of the
cabinet.
Alternatively the RJ11 connector X115 at the BP−C can be used for the PTT line connection. The
RJ11 connector has to be allocated to LGM1 connection with jumper X120/121 at the BP−C. Op-
tionally an adapter is available, which comprises a snap−in RJ11 connector to be assembled to
the top panel (location PTT LINE/LGM1) and a connection cable to the RJ11 connector at BP−C.
− GPRS* modem: Optional ETX−CPU is assembled. LGM1/ETX−CPU COM4 is internally con-
nected to connector X106 at BP−C. Connect a serial cable with SubD, 9pin from GPRS modem
to LGM1/ETX−CPU COM4 connector on top of the cabinet.
* GPRS = General Packet Radio system, used for wireless communication

2.3.6.2 Connection of a local PC or Laptop

Standard configuration: Connect V.24 cable (0-modem cable) with SubD, 9pin from PC to connector
Local PC on top of cabinet.
NOTE: With use of MCS in the standard configuration the GUI software and the proxy agents are
running on the laptop used.
Optional configuration with ETX−CPU: Connect crossover Ethernet cable from Ethernet connector
at the Laptop to connector ETHERNET on top of cabinet which is internally connected to X20 of the
ETX−CPU. In addition, a DHCP client has to be installed at the laptop.
NOTE: With use of MCS in the optional configuration the proxy agents are loaded to the ETX−
CPU board and the GUI software is running on the laptop used.
2.3.6.3 Connection of Voice Signal for VAM
Connect a two wire line from incoming voice service (e.g. from Tower) to pins 1 and 2 of a SubD, 9pin
connector and connect to connector VAM on top of the cabinet.
The VARP option is normally not implemented and the correspondent connector on top of cabinet
not assembled.
2.3.6.4 Connection of auxiliary Inputs/Outputs (LCP)
The Navaids installation contains an auxiliary interface (on LCP board) with 16 optocoupler inputs and
16 optocoupler outputs for additional signals which is at the user’s disposal. The external wiring of
the OIO connectors is shown in Fig. 2−22.
2.3.6.5 Connection of auxiliary Analog and Temp inputs (CSL)
Connect optional voltage measurement lines (user defined) to plug SubD, 9pin and connect to con-
nector ANALOG on top of the cabinet. Connect sensor PT1000 for temperature measurement via
cable and tabs to X81/1,2 or 3,4, rear BP−C. The wiring is shown in Fig. 2−23. The results are indi-
cated in ’LRCI Measurements’ − ’Analogue in 1...6’ and ’Temperature 1...2’ in the PC User Pogram.

Ed. 09.09
05.06 2−27
CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

OIO−IN conn.
outside IAUX n VCC (+5 V)

2k2
log. 0= max. 0.3 mA
IAUX 0...7 and IAUX 8...15 when active low load max.
<2V or <2k7 log. 1= min. 0.7 mA/max. 10 mA

GND
outside
VCC (+5 V) / max. 24 V

IAUX 8...15 when active high

(selectable with jumpers J1...4, refer to 6.2.5.1) IAUX n
GND
2k2
log. 0= max. 0.3 mA
log. 1= min. 0.7 mA/max. 10 mA
OIO−OUT conn.
outside OAUX n
OAUX 0...3/4...7/8...11/12...15 +
60 VDC max.
120 mA max.

NOTE: − GND
dc COM1 used for OAUX0...3
Only voltages in the SELV range (up to 60 VDC) must be COM3 used for OAUX4...7
COM4 used for OAUX8...11
connected to connectors OAUX . COM2 used for OAUX12...15
(SELV=Safety Extra Low Voltage)

Fig. 2−22 External wiring of auxiliary OIO connectors of LCP

2−28 Ed. 01.12

05.06
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
Local PC operation, via connector Local PC
on top of the cabinet or Ethernet connector

ÊÊ Ê
(reqires optional ETX−CPU)

ÊÊ Ê
ÊÊ Ê
RJ11 PTT line connector X120...125 ASU
X87 X86 X79 X78
X115 X110

ÊÊ Ê
X94 X93 X92 X107 X144
X131 X130 X143 X141

ÊÊ Ê
X142 X140
X99 X98 X97 X96 X89 X76 X85
X82
Voice input via connector VAM X88 X80 X77 Analog signals to CSL (ext.) via

ÊÊ Ê
on top of the cabinet X73 X84
BP−C** connector ANALOG, top of
X135 X134
the cabinet

ÊÊ Ê
X106 T1 X83 X74
3 − −1

ÊÊ Ê
X95 X72 X71 4 −X81− 2 control line BCPS
X104 X105

ÊÊ Ê
Assignment of aux. measurement
inputs: X81 for temp. sensor PT1000

ÊÊ Ê
ANALOG, SubD, 9pin

ÊÊ Ê
PIN ASSIGNMENT TX2
50W
1 Analog IN 1 X70

ÊÊ Ê
TX1
2 Analog IN 2 BP−T X71** X84
X81
100W
X84 X81
3 Analog IN 3 X83

ÊÊ Ê
(TX1) X72
TX2
4 Analog IN 4 X85 X82 50W

ÊÊ Ê
5 Analog IN 5 X73 100W TX1
6 Analog IN 6 X83 X82

ÊÊ Ê
9 AGND
CA−100/1* TX2

ÊÊ Ê
X84 X80
TX1

ÊÊ Ê
X85

39k2 X80 Setting example: 100 W, TX1

A−IN X70

ÊÊ Ê
BP−T X71** X84 1
±20 V 10k
X81 TX2
X83 2

ÊÊ Ê
X72 TX1 3
AGND (TX2) X85 X82

ÊÊ Ê
X73

ÊÊ
ÊÊ
X80
Ê
Ê
X81 BP−C, flat plug
PIN ASSIGNATION ÊÊ
ÊÊ
PMM Ê
Ê TX2
X80

1
2

ÊÊ Ê
TX1
/1 TEMP1 3

/2 TEMP1

ÊÊ Ê
BP−DC
/3 TEMP2

ÊÊ Ê
/4 TEMP2 CA−100/2*

ÊÊ Ê
X81
5V

PT1000
1,3
3k9

TEMP ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê
Ê
ÊÊ Ê
47k4

ÊÊ Ê
2,4 AGND

ÊÊ Ê
Battery and power supply connection C−BAR

control line BCPS**

ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê
Ê
ÊÊ Ê
BP−BCPS

ground bolt (BSE)

** BP−T 58351 00210: Speedy 16
BP−T 58351 00211: Speedy 10
Ê * 100 W only
** BP−C: 58351 00113

Fig. 2−23 Transmitter cabinet, rear side, interface connections

Ed. 01.12
05.06 2−29
CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.3.7 ETX CPU option, Pin Assignment of Connectors

The signals assigned to the pins of the sockets of X7 to X13 (component side view) and the corre-
sponding connected plugs is as folllows. Refer to section 6.2.5 for location of connectors.
X7 − INC panel connector (parallel printer port):
Pin X7 DB25 Signal Pin X7 DB25 Signal X7 DB25
1 1 /STB 14 20 /AFD 1 2 1
14
2 14 D0 15 8 /ERR
3 2 D1 16 21 /INIT
4 15 D2 17 9 /SLIN
5 3 D3 18 22 GND
6 16 D4 19 10 GND 13 26
13
25

7 4 D5 20 23 GND
8 17 D6 21 11 GND
9 5 D7 22 24 GND
10 18 /ACK 23 12 GND
11 6 BUSY 24 25 GND
12 19 PE 25 13 GND
13 7 SLCT 26 − GND
X10 − keyboard/mouse connector:
Pin X10 DIN Signal Pin X10 DIN Signal DIN
1 − − 6 1 KeybClk X10 1
4
2 − GND − 7 4 GND 1 2
2
3 − MouseClk 8 5 +5V
9 10 5
4 − MouseDat 9 − UBAT 3
5 2 KeybDat 10 − PowerGood
(Reset CPU)
X11 − VGA connector:
Pin X11 DB15 Signal Pin X11 DB15 Signal
DB15
1 1 Red 6 6 GND X11 1 11
2 4 GND 7 13 HSYNC 1 2

3 2 Green 8 7 GND
4 5 GND 9 14 VSYNC 9 10
5 15
5 3 Blue 10 8 GND
X12,13,8,9 − COM1 to COM4:
Pin X DB9 Signal Pin X DB9 Signal X8,9,12,13 DB9
2 1
1 1 DCD 6 8 CTS 1 6

2 6 DSR 7 4 DTR 9 9
10 5
3 2 RxD 8 9 RI
4 7 RTS 9 5 GND
5 3 TxD 10 −
X14 − USB interface(s), V1.0 standard PC host controller
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 Vcc+ 3 Data +
2 Data − 4 Vcc−
X20 − Ethernet connector: RJ45
Pin assignment see section 2.3.5.10

2−30 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.4 INSTALLATION OF 8 PGC OPTION AT THE CVOR RACK
2.4.1 General
The CVOR antenna system is completely installed. The 8 PGC monitor dipoles are installed according
section 2.2.5.
To install the 8 point ground check (8 PGC) option to one equipment the following parts are required:
− 2 MSP−CD 83135 22302 (incl. adapted SW−EPROM)
NOTE: The MSP−CD p/n 83135 22302 replaces the MSP−CD p/n 83135 22301 that has replaced the previously used MSP−V8
(83134 22600 or 83135 22600). If the MSP−CD, 83135 22302 is already installed it is not replaced.

− 1 MDS−V8 83135 20700 (incl. adapted SW−EPROM)

− Semi−rigid cables, pre−formed:
W12 24026 29071 (used for connection MDS to MSP/2)
W16 24026 29075 (used for connection MDS to MSP/1)
W70 to W77 24026 29276 to ..... 29283 (used for connection MON1...8 to MDS)
− Disassembling tool 24339 28050 (used for RF cable connectors)
− Site files and LKE files (used for station definition)
− PC User Program SW adapted to CVOR 8 PGC option (used for operation and monitoring)
2.4.2 Installation Procedure
See Fig. 2−24, 2−25.
To change over the standard CVOR 431 to the CVOR 431 with optional 8 point ground check monitor
perform the following steps:

CAUTION

Before performing any change or replacement to the CVOR equipment, switch power off.
− Switch main power off for the CVOR installation.
− If the MSP−CD p/n 83135 22302 (or MSP−CD p/n 83135 22301) is already installed, it is not re-
placed. Old systems only: Remove both modules MSP−VD, p/n 83135 22300.
− Remove semi−rigid monitor cables W56 and W57 (TNC connector female). Use disassembling
tool 24339 28050 to remove coaxial connectors from the backpanel (Fig. 2−25).
− Loosen all RF and AF connections from the connector plate on top of the cabinet.
− Push out the pre−punched holes for the additional TNC−connectors used for 8 PGC.
− Connect all loosened RF and AF cables to the prepared connector plate as before.
− Assemble cables W70 to W77 to the backpanel BP−C and to the connectors MON1 to MON8 on
top of the cabinet (see Fig. 2−25).
− Assemble cables W12 and W16 into the backpanel BP−C (see Fig. 2−25, connection MDS to
MSP’s).
− Adjust coaxial connectors central to the hole in the insulating part of the connector.
− Put new modules MSP−CD, part−No. 83135 22302 in the MSP position. This is not necessary if
the current MSP−CD is already installed.
− Put module MDS−V8, part−No. 83135 20700 in the MDS position.

Ed. 01.12
05.06 2−31
CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance
− Connect monitor dipole antennas to the inputs MON1 to MON8. Maximum input level is –8 dBm,
minimum input level is –35 dBm.
NOTE: The Monitor takes the signals of 8 monitor dipoles at the edge of the counterpoise. The
dipole MON1 may be replaced by the conventional monitor field dipole.
All dipoles have to be within a 45° raster. Deviations up to ±5° may be adjusted by the
calibrate function of the software.
− Finally check correct cabling and tight fitting of RF cables.

2.4.2.1 Connections at Transmitter Rack

See Fig. 2−24.
The cable to the monitor dipoles is fed from the monitor masts or fastenings through a cable entry
of the shelter (bottom of the shelter).
Make the following new cable connections within the transmitter rack, rear side (Fig. 2−25):
Connector cover plate, Backpanel BP−C
Connector Cable No. Module (Monitor Dipole)
MON1 W70 MDS 8 PGC Monitor Dipole 1 or standard monitor
MON2 W71 MDS 8 PGC Monitor Dipole 2
MON3 W72 MDS 8 PGC Monitor Dipole 3
MON4 W73 MDS 8 PGC Monitor Dipole 4
MON5 W74 MDS 8 PGC Monitor Dipole 5
MON6 W75 MDS 8 PGC Monitor Dipole 6
MON7 W76 MDS 8 PGC Monitor Dipole 7
MON8 W77 MDS 8 PGC Monitor Dipole 8
Backpanel BP−C
Connector Cable No. Module (Signal)
MDS−V W12 MSP−CD/1 RFMON1
MDS−V W16 MSP−CD/2 RFMON2
Transmitter rack

(D)VOR (D)VOR
ETX−CPU COM4
SB1
LGM1 Local PC ASU−CONTROL DIAGNOSIS DME−IDENT

CSB LGM2/DME LGM3/NDB VAM ANALOG OIO LCP IN OIO LCP OUT
ETX−CPU COM2 ETX−CPU COM3

SPARE 1 SPARE 2 VARP LOCAL VOICE ETHERNET PTT LINE/LGM1

SB2
DVOR DVOR
CVOR MON4 MON3 MON2 MON1 CVOR

BCPS MON1 MON2 MON3 MON4 MON5 MON6 MON7 MON8

rear side

8 point ground check monitor dipoles (MON1 ...8)

Fig. 2−24 CVOR transmitter rack, top view, replaced cover with additional connectors

2−32 Ed. 01.12

05.06
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation

CVOR standard connections

RFMON2 RFMON1
Remove:
W56 : 24026 29125
W57 : 24026 29116 Ê
Ê
W57 W56
Ê
Ê
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
X120...125 ASU

X87 X86 X79 X78

Ê Ê
X115 X110

X144

Ê Ê
X94 X93 X92 X107
X131 X130 X143 X141

Ê Ê
X142 X140

Ê Ê
X76 X85
X99 X98 X97 X96 X89
X82
X88 X80 X77

Ê Ê
X73 X84
BP−C**

Ê Ê
MDS MSP2 MSP1
X135 X134

Ê Ê
X106 T1
X83 X74

Ê Ê
3 − − 1
X81
X95 X72 X71 4 − − 2

Ê Ê
X104 X105

Ê Ê
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
rear view

CVOR 8 PGC connections

Replace: MON1 MON2 MON3 MON4 MON5 MON6 MON7 MON8
cover plate by new cover plate

Ê Ê
remount connectors
mount additional monitor input connectors 0° 45° 90° 135° 180° 225° 270° 315°

Ê Ê
W70 W71 W72 W73 W74 W75 W76 W77
Connect:

Ê Ê
W12 : 24026 29071 X120...125 ASU

W16 : 24026 29075 X87 X86 X79 X78

Ê Ê
X115 X110
W70 : 2402629276

Ê Ê
W71 : 24026 29277 X144
W72 : 24026 29278 X94 X93 X92 X107 MDS
W73 : 24026 29279

Ê Ê
X131 X130 X143 X141
W74 : 24026 29280
W75 : 24026 29281
W76 : 24026 29282 X142 X140

Ê Ê
W77 : 24026 29283 X76 X85
X99 X98 X97 X96 X89
X82

Ê Ê
X88 X80 X77
X73 X84

Ê Ê
BP−C**
MDS MSP2 MSP1

Ê Ê
X135 X134
X106 T1 W12 W16
X83 X74

Ê Ê
3 − − 1
X81

Ê Ê
X95 X72 X71 4 − − 2

X104 X105

Ê
Ê Ê
Ê
Ê Ê
rear view

** BP−C: 58351 00113

Fig. 2−25 Transmitter cabinet, new cabling for 8 point ground check option

Ed. 01.12
05.06 2−33
CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2−34 Ed. 01.12

05.06
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation

Location at counterpoise edge

MONITOR DIPOLE 2 to 8 (8 PGC option) MONITOR DIPOLE 1 MONITOR DIPOLE 2 CVOR ANTENNA

counterpoise
NOTE:
If two monitor dipoles are used,
cable W5 is fed to input MON 2.
Antenna connector panel Z1 MATCHING DEVICE Z2
W4 24029 28521 W5 to MON 2
Dipole Dipole Omnidirectional
A B LR UR
URS LRS IN CSB

W7
xxx041
MON 8

MON 7

MON 6

MON 5

MON 4

MON 3

MON 2

MON 1

SB1

SB2

CSB

W1 24029 28537 SBA 24029 28378 (part of matching device)

TRANSMITTER RACK OUT
W2 24029 28537 SBB 24029 28378 (part of matching device)
Cabling with 8 point ground check option
W3 24029 28537 CSB
IN CP1*
Optional Cabling Monitor Dipoles
OUT
MON 1

MON 2

SB1

SB2

CSB
NOTE:
PVC shielded power lines (W60 to W71, W10) are TRANSMITTER RACK
included in the battery cable set 58341 00030. TX1/TX2, NAV
W61 24039 28226 GND
FUSE BOX W63 24039 28228

F20 2 4 23
BFUSE W69 24039 28234
50 A DC
BFUSE W71 24039 28235
W60 24039 28225 1 3 24

W64 24039 28229 BAT2 0.2 A F21 24039 28234

W70
1 2
W65 24039 28230 BAT1 W67 24039 28232
24039 28231 BAT0 3 4
W68 24039 28233 MAINS DISTRIBUTION Legend
W66 5 6 BOX
N
BFUSE
BFUSE

W62
NAV−
NAV+

W10 24039 28052

BAT−
BAT+

+
BAT0
BAT1
BAT2

− 24039 28227
PE

TNC
L3
N

48 V BSE SHELTER
BATTERY BOX BCPS CONNECTION PLATE
* used with one monitor dipole

Fig. 2−26 System cabling CVOR

Ed. 01.12 2−35

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.5 GROUNDING
2.5.1 General
The type of grounding implemented is dependent on the local terrain. Consequently it is only possible
to provide general guidelines here. Grounding conductors or rods are metallic elements of a particular
form which are either driven into the ground or laid in the ground so as to cover a relatively large area.
All connections in the ground must be welded and protected against corrosion. The ground resis-
tance required for a CVOR (or other navigation installations) can be given as  5 ohm. This resistance
can only be measured precisely with the aid of special ground resistance measuring equipment. The
exact measuring procedure is described in the operating instructions for these devices. Universally
valid instructions are given in Section 2.5.6. Sufficient grounding can generally be obtained if the
installation suggestions described below and the terrain conditions are paid attention to. When esti-
mating the ground resistance the length and extent of the network laid are the crucial points, not the
cross−sectional area of the conductors. Favorable resistance conditions are provided by arable land
and loamy ground (ground resistivity 100 ohm per meter). The data specified below applies to these
conditions. With other types of terrain the factors below must be taken into consideration (increase
in the resistance with respect to the basic values stated).
Moist sandy soil 2x
Dry sandy soil 5 to 10x
Gravel or stones up to 30x
If the ground is not chemically neutral, e.g. if it is salty, it may be necessary to coat all metal parts laid
in the ground with lead or to use a sufficiently non−corrosive steel (e.g. V2A). The different types are
as follows:

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 0.5...1 m

Radial ground Ground rod or plate Interlinked ground

Fig. 2−27 Different types of ground conductor configuration

2.5.2 Strip or mesh Ground Conductors
Strip ground conductors take the form of a strip, round material or cable laid in the ground at a depth
of 0.5 to 1 m so as to cover a relatively large area.
Materials:
− Steel strip (hot galvanized) 100 mm, min. thickness 3 mm
− Copper strip 50 mm, min. thickness 2 mm
− Copper cable (not finely stranded) 135 mm
The network should be laid as symmetrical to the CVOR station as possible. The necessary length
and extension when laid in a straight line, should be estimated from the basic data below.
Strip length Ground resistance
25 m 10 ohm
50 m 5 ohm
100 m 3 ohm

Ed. 01.12 2−37

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.5.3 Ground Rods

Ground rods are either pipes or U, L or T−shaped profiles driven vertically into the ground and 1 to
2 m in length. It is necessary to connect several ground rods together in order to reduce the grounding
resistance. The minimum spacing is twice the length of each ground rod. The material, cross sectional
areas and grounding resistance of the connecting leads to the shelter should be as for strip ground
conductors, (see Section 2.5.2). When pipe−type grounding rods are fastened with clamps, screws
at least M10 in size should be used.

− Material: Steel (hot galvanized) Pipe 30 x 3 mm

Bracket L 65 x 65 x 7 mm
U−profile U 65 DIN 1026
T−profile T 60 DIN 1024

− Probable grounding resistance of a rod: Length 1 m, approx. 70 ohm

Length 2 m, approx. 40 ohm

2.5.4 Ground Plates

Ground plates are solid perforated sheet metal plates with dimensions of approx. 0.5x1 m or 1x1 m,
which are embedded vertically in the ground. The top edge of the plates should always be at least
1 m below the surface. Several ground plates must be connected in parallel in order to reduce the
grounding resistance. The minimum spacing should be 3 m. Material:
− Sheet steel (hot galvanized) min. thickness 3 mm
− Sheet copper min. thickness 2 mm

The ground resistance of a plate 1 m is approx. 30 ohm. The data for the connecting conductors
is specified in the tables in Section 2.5.2.

2.5.5 Estimating the Ground Resistance

The resistance of each rod, each plate and each supply line used should be determined on the basis
of Section 2.5.2 to 2.5.4. They should be considered as parallel resistances. The resulting grounding
resistance should then be calculated as follows: 1/Rres =1/R +1/R
+1/R+...+ Rn. Taking into ac-
count the nature of the terrain (for factors see Section 2.5.1) satisfactory grounding conditions can
be assumed if the ground resistance calculated from the base data is < 5 ohm. If the value calculated
is 5 ohm or more, we recommend measuring the ground resistance.

2.5.6 Measuring the Ground Resistance

See Fig. 2−28.
Three measurements must be performed over a large area in order to determine the ground resis-
tance precisely. The distance between 2 auxiliary grounds required must be large in relation to the
complete ground network of the navigation installation.

Two steel rods approx. 1 m long should be used as auxiliary grounds (reinforcing bars); these should
be driven into the ground with only a few centimeters remaining at the designated points. It is essential
that the rods are of equal length and are driven in to the same depth.

2−38 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
Measurements are performed as shown in the diagram below:
E
E = Installation ground
H = Auxiliary ground 1 M1 M3
H
= Auxiliary ground 2
M = Measured value 1 H1 H2
M
= Measured value 2
M = Measured value 3 M2

Measured value 1: Resistance between installation ground and auxiliary ground 1

Measured value 2: Resistance between auxiliary ground 1 and auxiliary ground 2
Measured value 3: Resistance between installation ground and auxiliary ground 2
When the three measurements have been performed the ground resistance is calculated as follows:

Corr. meas. value 1 + corr. meas. 3 − corr. meas. value 2

Ground resistance =
2
The measurement is falsified by the resistance of the 2 test leads. The cross−sectional area of the
test leads should not be less than 1.5 mm in order to ensure an adequate breaking strength. With
this cross−sectional area and an assumed length of 2 x 25 m = 50 m, the falsifying resistance would
be 0.58 ohm This resistance should therefore be measured and deducted from measured values 1,
2 and 3. The measured values corrected in this manner are entered into the above formula.
Example of a CVOR plate ground with 5 x 2 plates, each 1 m2. The drawing is not to scale. A theoretical
ground resistance of approx. 2 ohm (good) would be obtained on the basis of the 10 plates, connect-
ing conductors and assumed terrain conditions (e.g. arable land) in accordance with the formula in
Section 2.5.5.

CVOR shelter

Grounding plate
approx. 10 m

CVOR counterpoise

>50 m >50 m

>50 m
Auxiliary ground H2 Auxiliary ground H1

Fig. 2−28 Determining of the ground resistance

Ed. 01.12 2−39

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.5.7 Earthing System

The site dependent modifications of the arrangement have been taken from the project engineering
documentation. Regard also the following remarks to lightning protection of the installation.

NOTE: Lightning protection of a Navaids installation (shelter and antenna) comprises all measu-
res which are used to avoid damage of the antenna, the connected equipment as well
as injury to persons caused by overvoltage or overcurrent through atmospherical dischar-
ges and static. Common practise is the use of galvanic earthing of all antenna and equip-
ment components, if required via chokes or resonant circuits, overvoltage arrester, spe-
cial lightning protection air−termination rods as well as structural measures such as
suitable design or sufficient diameter of endangered parts.
Because of its primary HF−functionality, the installed earthing network or counterpoise
may represent not really a sufficient lightning protection.
Implementation of a functional lightning protection system requires the application of nor-
matively tested components and devices. The components are to be selected and duely
applied by the installer of lightning protection systems in accordance with the require-
ments at the installation site. In addition to the mechanical necessities, the electrical crite-
ria of the present state of lightning protection engineering are to be considered and com-
plied with lightning protection air−termination rods.

2−40 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.6 COLLOCATION WITH DME/TACAN
2.6.1 Overview
See Figs. 2−30, 2−43, 2−44, 2−48.
This description concerns to the collocation of DME FSD 40/45, DME 415/435 or TACAN FTA 43 with
a CVOR 431. The DME or TACAN equipment is normally located in the CVOR shelter. To synchronize
the identification, the collocated DME (TACAN) uses an interface with the CVOR system. To transfer
"Maintenance" and "Status" of the DME (TACAN) a RS 232−cable connection is established between
CVOR and DME (TACAN) if these are not connected with an individual modem (internal or external)
to the Tower resp. RCSE 443 via a 2 wire lines connection. These examples are shown in Fig. 2−43,
2−44 and 2−48. The terminal points in the AF−distribution box, which may be used for 2 wire connec-
tion, are shown in Fig. 2−30.
Further information to the DME FSD 40/45 will be found in the Technical Manual Ref.No. 8BR 02016
1000 DEGFA, to the DME 415/435 in the manual Ref.No. 955 900 031C, Volume 1, Sept. 2005 or pre-
vious edition 8BR 0212 1000 DEGFA, Volume 1, Dec. 1998.

2.6.2 Connection FSD 40/45 to CVOR 431

See Figs. 2−29, 2−31, 2−34.
The FSD 40/45 is installed in two versions: a CSB−version and an IOM−version. The CSB−version
itself is built in a version with the connector panel (I/O−panel) mounted at the rear side of the cabinet,
and another version with the connector panel mounted on top of the cabinet (Fig. 2−31, 2−34).
The CSB−versions are described in Section 2.6.2.1 and 2.6.2.2, the IOM−version in Section 2.6.2.3.
Fig. 2−29 shows the pin assignment of the DME−IDENT and LGM2 interface (VOR) used to connect
the DME. Regard the configuration of the subassembly CSL of the CVOR in Section 2.6.2.4. Corres-
ponding information to the DME (TACAN) will be found in the corresponding manual.

2.6.2.1 CSB−Version, I/O−panel at the rear of cabinet

See Figs. 2−31, 2−32, 2−33.
− Lay the ID−cable (Ref.No. 24009 28148) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the connector
VOR(SK26) on the rear side of the DME cabinet and to connector DME−IDENT on top of the CVOR
cabinet (Fig. 2−31 and 2−32).
− To establish the RS 232 connection plug adapter Ref.No. 97243 28211 (Fig. 2−31 and 2−33) to
connector PL1 at the DME I/O panel, rear side.
− Place the RS 232−cable (Ref.No. 97240 28166) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the adapter
(DME cabinet) and to connector LGM2 on top of the CVOR cabinet.

2.6.2.2 CSB−Version, I/O−panel on top of the cabinet

See Figs. 2−34, 2−35, 2−36.
− Lay the ID−cable (Ref.No. 24009 28148) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the connector
IFV/SK10 on top of the DME cabinet and to connector DME−IDENT on top of the CVOR cabinet
(Fig. 2−34 and 2−35).
− To establish the RS 232 connection plug adapter Ref.No. 97243 28211 (Fig. 2−34 and 2−36) to
connector PL1 at the DME I/O panel, on top of the cabinet.
− Place the RS 232−cable (Ref.No. 97240 28166) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the adapter
(DME cabinet) and to connector LGM2 on top of the CVOR cabinet.

Ed. 05.06 2−41

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.6.2.3 IOM−Version
See Figs. 2−37, 2−38, 2−39.
− Lay the ID−cable (Ref.No. 24009 28148) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the connector
VOR(SK26) on the rear side of the DME cabinet and to connector DME−IDENT on top of the CVOR
cabinet (Fig. 2−37 and 2−38).
− To establish the RS 232 connection plug adapter Ref.No. 97243 28214 (Fig. 2−37 and 2−39) to
connector "AUX1" on the DME IOM, at the rear side of the cabinet, lower section.
− Place the RS 232−cable (Ref.No. 97240 28168) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the adapter
(DME cabinet) and to connector LGM2 on top of the CVOR cabinet.

2.6.2.4 Configuration of CVOR 431 and DME FSD 40/45 or TACAN FTA 43
− CVOR 431:
Set switch S5 (see Section 6.2.5) on front of the CSL (Ref.No. 83135 23100), which is set for stan-
dard use of the CVOR, to position "ASSOC." for the application with a collocated DME FSD 40/45.
− DME FSD 40/45:
Refer to Technical Manual, Ref.No. 8BR 020 161000 DEGFA.
− TACAN FTA 43:
Refer to Technical Manual, Ref.No. SNR DE 0360071−18/1E.

2.6.3 Connection TACAN FTA 43 to CVOR 431

See Figs. 2−40, 2−41, 2−42.
− Lay the ID−cable (Ref.No. 24009 28148) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the connector
VOR(SK3) on the rear side of the TACAN cabinet and to connector DME−IDENT on top of the
CVOR cabinet (Fig. 2−40 and 2−41).
− To establish the RS 232 connection plug adapter Ref.No. 97243 28214 (Fig. 2−40 and 2−42) to
connector "AUX1" on the TACAN IOM, at the rear side of the cabinet, upper section.
− Place the RS 232−cable (Ref.No. 97240 28168) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the adapter
(TACAN cabinet) and to connector LGM2 on top of the CVOR cabinet.

2−42 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
CVOR 431 cabinet

rear top

(RS 232−connection)
1
6

LGM2
2 RX
7
3 TX
8
W1xx 9
4
5 GND

X98 20
1
2
21
3
22
4
Subrack BP−C 23
5
24
6
25
7
26
8

DME IDENT
27
9
28
10
29
11
30
IDENT from CSL X2

12
31
13
32
14
33
15
24V ID 34
W100 DMSL 35
16 DME−ID
17 DMSR
VOR OP 36
18 DMOVS
GND DME 37
19 GND DME
X85

Fig. 2−29 Interface Assignment of LGM2 and DME−Ident in CVOR 431

AF distribution box

Terminal bar
Plug−in holder for overvoltage arrester removed

3a 3a
3b 3b

2a 2a
2b 2b

1a 1a
1b 1b

Fig. 2−30 AF−distribution box, assignment of terminals (example)

Ed. 05.06 2−43

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

Shelter
97240 28166
RS 232

24009 28148
ID
LGM2 DME−IDENT

I/O−Panel
Adapter
PL1

VOR (SK26)

CVOR DME
(FSD 40/45)

(CSB−Version)

Fig. 2−31 CSB−Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, connection CVOR to DME

CVOR 431 DME FSD 40/45

connector DME−IDENT connector VOR(SK26)
37pin, male 25pin, female
SIGNAL NAME PIN PIN SIGNAL NAME
DME−ID 16 16 4 4 MORCO
DMOVS 18 18 6 6 BCNFTY
GNDDME 19 19 24 24 SIGNAL GND
37 37 3 3 SIGNAL GND
U15+ 33 5 5 SIGNAL GND
VOR OP 36 36 25 25 AFFTY
24V ID 34 34 12 12 +24V
DMSL 35 35
DMSR 17 17
1 kOhm
24009 28148 (ID cable)

Fig. 2−32 CSB−Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, ident connection CVOR to DME

CVOR 431 DME FSD 40/45,

connector LGM2 connector PL1
9pin, male 25pin, male
97243 28211
(Adapter, male/female) PIN SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL NAME PIN
RX 2 2 2 2 TD (BA)
TX 3 3 3 3 RD (BB)
GND 5 5 5 7 SC, CR, (AB) GND
RS232
RS232
97240 28166 (9pin, female/female, 3 m)

Fig. 2−33 CSB−Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, RS 232 connection CVOR/DME

2−44 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation

Shelter
97240 28166
RS 232
24009 28148
ID
IFV/SK10
DME−IDENT Adapter
LGM2
PL1

DME
CVOR (FSD 40/45)

(CSB−Version)

Fig. 2−34 CSB−Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, connection CVOR to DME

CVOR 431 DME FSD 40/45

connector DME−IDENT connector IFV/SK10
37pin, male 25pin, female
SIGNAL NAME PIN PIN SIGNAL NAME
DME−ID 16 16 4 4 MORCO
DMOVS 18 18 6 6 BCNFTY
GNDDME 19 19 24 24 SIGNAL GND
37 37 3 3 SIGNAL GND
U15+ 33 5 5 SIGNAL GND
VOR OP 36 36 25 25 AFFTY
24V ID 34 34 12 12 +24V
DMSL 35 35
DMSR 17 17
1 kOhm
24009 28148 (ID cable)

Fig. 2−35 CSB−Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, ident connection VOR/DME

CVOR 431 DME FSD 40/45

connector LGM2 connector PL1
9pin, male 25pin, male
97243 28211
(Adapter, male/female) PIN SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL NAME PIN
RX 2 2 2 2 TD (BA)
TX 3 3 3 3 RD (BB)
GND 5 5 5 7 SC, CR, (AB) GND
RS232
RS232
97240 28166 (9pin, female/female, 3 m)

Fig. 2−36 CSB−Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, RS 232 connection CVOR/DME

Ed. 05.06 2−45

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

Shelter 97240 28168

RS 232

24009 28148
ID

LGM2 DME−IDENT

DME
(FSD 40/45)

VOR (SK26)

Adapter

CVOR IOM
AUX 1

(IOM−Version)

Fig. 2−37 IOM−Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, connection CVOR to DME

CVOR 431 DME FSD 40/45

connector DME−IDENT connector VOR(SK26)
37pin, male 25pin, female
SIGNAL NAME PIN PIN SIGNAL NAME
DME−ID 16 16 4 4 MORCO
DMOVS 18 18 6 6 BCNFTY
GNDDME 19 19 24 24 SIGNAL GND
37 37 3 3 SIGNAL GND
U15+ 33 5 5 SIGNAL GND
VOR OP 36 36 25 25 AFFTY
24V ID 34 34 12 12 +24V
DMSL 35 35
DMSR 17 17
1 kOhm
24009 28148 (AF cable)

Fig. 2−38 IOM−Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, ident connection CVOR/DME

CVOR 431 DME FSD 40/45

connector LGM2 connector AUX1
9pin, male 25pin, male
97243 28214
(Adapter, female/female) PIN SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL NAME PIN
RX 2 2 2 2 TD (BA)
TX 3 3 3 3 RD (BB)
GND 5 5 5 7 SC, CR, (AB) GND
RS232
RS232
97240 28168 (9pin, female/male, 5 m)

Fig. 2−39 IOM−Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, RS 232 connection CVOR/DME

2−46 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation

Shelter
97240 28168
RS 232

24009 28148
ID

LGM2 DME−IDENT

Adapter

IOM
AUX 1

TACAN
(FTA 43)

VOR (SK3)

SK6
(ELTA connection)
CVOR

Fig. 2−40 Cable connection CVOR to TACAN

CVOR 431 TACAN FTA 43

connector DME−IDENT connector VOR(SK3)
37pin, male 25pin, female
SIGNAL NAME PIN PIN SIGNAL NAME
DME−ID 16 16 4 4 MORCO
DMOVS 18 18 6 6 BCNFTY
GNDDME 19 19 24 24 SIGNAL GND
37 37 3 3 SIGNAL GND
U15+ 33 5 5 SIGNAL GND
VOR OP 36 36 25 25 AFFTY
24V ID 34 34 12 12 +24V
DMSL 35 35
DMSR 17 17
1 kOhm
24009 28148 (AF cable)

Fig. 2−41 Ident connection CVOR/TACAN

CVOR 431 TACAN FTA 43,

connector LGM2 connector AUX1
9pin, male 25pin, male
97243 28214
(Adapter, female/female)
PIN SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL NAME PIN
RX 2 2 2 2 TD (BA)
TX 3 3 3 3 RD (BB)
GND 5 5 5 7 SC, CR, (AB) GND
RS232
RS232
97240 28168 (9pin, female/male, 5 m)

Fig. 2−42 RS 232−connection CVOR/TACAN

Ed. 05.06 2−47

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

Shelter
alternativ

ext. Modem

LGM 1200
DME DME

Modem
FSD 40/45 FSD 40/45 CVOR 431
(CSB−Version) (CSB−Version)

RS 232
IFV IFV PL7 LGM1
PL2 3) (SK10) 2)
DME−IDENT
(SK10)
1)
24009 28148
ID

AF distribution box

placing at disposal by the

1) airport
LGM1
1 1 La
1a
2 2 Lb
1b
3 3 PL7
. . La AF distribution box
. . 1 1 2a
Lb
9 6 6 2b
9
Tower
4)
AF distribution box
9 9
terminal bar
(connection example) RCSE 443
Note: 2)
1) Line connection (2−wire to SubD 9pin connector) for connection to LGM1, assembled on site
2) Line connection (2−wire to SubD 9pin connector) for connection to PL7, assembled on site
3) Connection of 2−wire line according to modem documentation, assembled on site
4) Connection refer to Technical Manual of RCSE 443

Fig. 2−43 Cable connections to CVOR and DME 40/45 (DME with individual internal or
external modem for RC connection)
Shelter
alternativ
ext. Modem

LGM 1200

TACAN TACAN
Modem

FTA 43 FTA 43 CVOR 431

RS 232

VOR VOR LGM1

(SK3) AUX 1 3) (SK3)
SK2
2)
DME−IDENT

1)
24009 28148
ID

AF distribution box

placing at disposal by the

1) airport
LGM1
1 1 La
1a
2 2 Lb
1b
3 3 SK2
. . La AF distribution box
. . 1 1 2a
Lb
9 6 6 2b
9 Tower
4)
AF distribution box
9 9 terminal bar
(connection example) RCSE 443
Note: 2)
1) Line connection (2−wire to SubD 9pin connector) for connection to LGM1, assembled on site
2) Line connection (2−wire to SubD 9pin connector) for connection to SK2, assembled on site
3) Connection of 2−wire line according to modem documentation, assembled on site
4) Connection refer to Technical Manual of RCSE 443

Fig. 2−44 Cable connections to CVOR and TACAN (TACAN with individual internal or
external modem for RC connection)

2−48 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation
2.6.4 Connection of DME 415/435 to CVOR 431
2.6.4.1 Ident and RS232 connection
See Fig. 2−45 to 2−47
− Lay the ID−cable (Ref. No. 24009 28149) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the connector
SK4/AF1 on top of the DME cabinet and to connector DME−IDENT on top of the CVOR/DVOR
cabinet (Fig. 2−45 and 2−46).
− To establish the RS 232 connection plug adapter Ref.No. 97243 28211 (Fig. 2−45 and 2−47) to
connector PL1/Port 3 on top of the DME cabinet.
− Place the RS 232−cable (Ref.No. 97240 28166) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the adapter
(on top of DME cabinet) and to connector LGM2/DME on top of the CVOR/DVOR cabinet.

NOTE: Ground (DME IDENT, Pin 19) is not connected to DME. Shielding of ID cable is connected
one−sided to DME connector ground.

The adapter 97243 28211 can be ommitted if a RS 232 cable is used with 1:1 through con-
nection (not crossed).

2.6.4.2 Configuration of CVOR 431 and DME 415/435

VOR 431, setting switches or jumper of CSL (Ref. No. 83135 23100, see Section 6.2.5):
− Set switch S5 to position ASSOC. (NAV 400 is Master) for the collocation with DME 415/435.
− Set X25 to position 2−3, DME−OP via signalling line.
− Set X11/X12 to position 2−3 (optocoupler only) as default for CVOR/DVOR.
− All other are set according default or normal position as shown in Section 6.2.5.

DME 415/435: Refer to Technical Manual, Ref.No. 955 900 031C, Volume 1, Sept. 2005 or previous
edition 8BR 02012 1000 DEGFA, Volume 1, Dec. 1998:

− Configuration of AFI: Regard that path M5, M2, M3 is set to "Internal Source" (delivery position)
− Enter in user SW program:
AF Status Low
ID Code/trigger from AF Low
DME Status Low
Morse Code Slave Trigger / Slave Code
Ident Recovery On Sensing

Ed. 05.06 2−49

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

Shelter 97240 28166

RS 232

24009 28149
ID
LGM2/DME
DME−IDENT SK4/AF1 Adapter
PL1/Port3

CVOR DME
415/435

Fig. 2−45 Collocation CVOR/DVOR with DME 415/435

CVOR 431 DME 415/435

connector DME−IDENT connector SK4/AF1
37pin, male 25pin, female
SIGNAL PIN PIN SIGNAL
DME−ID 16 16 1 1 DIDFAFL
DMOVS 18 18 4 4 DBCOKL
DMSR 17 17 17 17 DBCOKH
GND DME 19 19 1)
U15+ 33
VOR/LOC OP 36 36 2 2 DAFSTL
24V ID 34 34 14 14 DIDFAFH
DMSL 35 35 15 15 DAFSTH

NOTE: 24009 28149 (ID cable)

1) Ground not connected between CVOR (pin 19) and DME

Fig. 2−46 Ident connection CVOR/DVOR to DME 415/435

CVOR 431 DME 415/435

connector LGM2/DME connector PL1/Port 3
9pin, male 97243 28211
25pin, male
(Adapter, male/fimale) PIN SIGNAL
SIGNAL PIN
RX 2 2 2 2 TXD
TX 3 3 3 3 RXD
GND 5 5 5 7 PGND
RS232
RS232
NOTE: 97240 28166 (9pin, female/female, 3 m)
The adapter can be ommitted, if other RS 232 cable is used, which has no crossed lines between pin 2 and 3

Fig. 2−47 RS232 connection CVOR/DVOR to DME 415/435

2−50 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Installation

Shelter
alternativ

ext. Modem

LGM 1200
DME DME

Modem
415/435 415/435 CVOR 431

RS 232
LGM1
SK4/AF1 PL1/Port 3 3) SK4/AF1 PL7
2)
DME−IDENT

24009 28149
1)
ID

AF distribution box

placing at disposal by the

1) airport
LGM1
1 1 La
1a
2 2 Lb
1b
3 3 PL7
. . La AF distribution box
. . 1 1 2a
Lb
9 6 6 2b
9
Tower
4)
AF distribution box
9 9
terminal bar
(connection example) RCSE 443
2)
Note:
1) Line connection (2−wire to SubD 9pin connector) for connection to LGM1, assembled on site
2) Line connection (2−wire to SubD 9pin connector) for connection to PL7, assembled on site
3) Connection of 2−wire line according to modem documentation, assembled on site
4) Connection refer to Technical Manual of RCSE 443

Fig. 2−48 Cable connections to CVOR/DVOR and DME 415/435

(DME with individual internal or external modem for RC connection)

Ed. 05.06 2−51

CVOR 431
Installation Operation and Maintenance

2.7 INSTALLATION OF THE DME ANTENNA

See Fig. 2−15, 2−49.
The DME antenna is mounted on top of the CVOR antenna radome onto a special adapter (Fig.
2−15). Twin obstruction lights are part of the antenna. Refer also to the correspondent Technical
Manuals for DME FSD 40/45 or DME 415/435.

WARNING

Before connecting the obstruction light supply cable check that mains is switched off and
mains lead is dead.

obstruction lights

DME antenna

ANTENNA
connector

M1 M2

connectors

OL

Fixing device bottom view

connectors
cable through
DME antenna adapter
VOR antenna radome

Fig. 2−49 Arrangement and installation of the DME antenna (example AAN 96/86), principle view

2−52 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Operation

CHAPTER 3
OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
Standard operation is normally carried out via a remote control interface with the user program
ADRACS installed on a PC. For local operation only a few functions are operable with the local control
panel (LCP). It consists of a Local Control CPU board (LC CPU) and the Local Control Interface (LCI)
for main status indication, equipment status and measurement data and manual controls (switch
commands) for basic control functions. The alignment procedure and the maintenance are per-
formed with a locally connected PC.

3.2 LOCAL CONTROL INTERFACE (LCI)

See Fig. 3−1.
The Local Control Interface (LCI) provides different indication and control components:
− three indication lamps for the main status of the system (ALARM, WARNING, NORMAL)
− a menu driven liquid crystal display screen (16 lines x 40 characters) for indication of station name
and type, status of monitor(s) and transmitter(s) and measurement data
− four control buttons to perform simple activities like change−over or disconnect the transmitter(s)
− a key−lock switch to select different operational modes of the station, i.e. disable/enable local and
remote control of the station (REMOTE, LOCAL, MAINTENANCE). Using the key, it is not remov-
able in position LOCAL.

A serial connector RS 232 (Local PC) is located on the top of the transmitter rack to interconnect a
local PC/laptop. A test of the three indication lamps of the LCI is provided by pressing the two middle
control buttons simultaneously.

NOTE: A buzzer sounds for a short time whenever one of the control buttons is pressed.
liquid crystal display screen

N2K−CVOR 50W FULL DUAL

ALARM −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
TX 1: ON TX 2: OFF
AERIAL LOAD
main status WARNING
indication
906 hrs. 458 hrs.
NORMAL MON1: NORMAL MON2: NORMAL
BYPASSED BYPASSED

Maintenance Alert
−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
MENU MONITOR ALERTS CONTROL

REMOTE

LOCAL

key−lock MAINTENANCE
switch

S1 S2 S3 S4 control buttons

Fig. 3−1 Local Control Interface (LCI), example

Ed. 5.06
07.09 3−1
CVOR 431
Operation Operation and Maintenance

3.2.1 Indicators and Controls on LCP Front Panel

Indicator Color Function if indicator lights Remarks

ALARM red Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 are in ALARM state (i.e. rele-
vant signals are out of tolerance).

or
Monitor 1 and 2 are in Bypass/Maintenance Mode
WARNING yellow The station is supplied by battery or has a BITE war-
ning.
NORMAL green All transmitter and monitor equipment is switched on,
initialized and serviceable for the intended category of
operations (no WARNING and no ALARM).

NOTE: If the status of the indicators (red, yellow, green) is changing the buzzer on the LCP is
beeping for 5 s if the audible alarm feature is enabled in the ’Control’ window of the LCP
menu. This feature is only available and visible in key switch position ’LOCAL’ or ’MAINTE-
NANCE’. It can be disabled in the ’Control’ window.

Control Position Function Remarks

Key−Lock REMOTE System enabled for remote control local disabled, i.e.
Switch no local control on
LCP menu Control.

LOCAL System enabled for local operation remote disabled

MAINTENANCE System set to maintenance mode Mon. Bypass set;

Alarm indication
lights.

Push button S1,S2,S3,S4 Function keys meaning defined per SW menu

S2+S3 simult. Lamp test and audible device test if simulta-

neously pressed

S1+S4 simult. Call up of LCP control menu, if simultaneously Service activity

pressed during LCP reset or system restart

3−2 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Operation
3.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS ON THE SUBASSEMBLIES
The controls and indications of individual subassemblies are shown in Fig. 3−2 and 3−3.

Board Indicator Color Control Function of control or indicator (lit or flashing)

MSP−CD LED green TXDA, indicates communication activity
LED green RXDA, indicates communication activity
LED green CPU is alive
LED green morse code indication

Reset key Performs a reset of the MSP processor

Jack 3.5 mm used for acoustic test of voice or ATIS signal

SYN a): LED / b): none green a): indicates P3V3 ok / b): not available
a): 83135 28101 /
a): LED / b): none green a): indicates Center locked / b): not available
b): 83135 28100 a): LED / b): none red a): Alert, indicates SYN failure / b): not availab.
MSG−C LED green TXDA, indicates communication activity
LED green RXDA, indicates communication activity
LED green CPU is alive

Reset key Performs a reset of the MSG processor

CSL yellow TX1 ON
yellow TX2 ON
red MON1, Monitor fault
red MON2, Monitor fault

Pushbutton manual TX1 on

Pushbutton manual TX1 off
Pushbutton manual TX2 on
Pushbutton manual TX2 off

BCD−Switch 0 to F; test signal select on TSG, see 3.3.1

Assoc./Indep. Used with DME collocation

LCP LED green Indicates LC−CPU is alive

HD LED red HD−r/w operation (RAM), flashes if access
(n.a. with LCP 83135 21004)
Reset key Restarts the LCP processor and software
R1 Controls brightness of the LCD screen
DCC−28* LED, Input state green Normaly on; DC input voltage available
DCC−MV LED, Input state green Normaly on; DC input voltage available
ACC−54 LED, Input state green Normaly on; DC input voltage available

Mains Switch Switches ACC−54 to mains (ON/OFF)

R32 Allows fine adjust of battery charging voltage
PMM NAV main switch for power on
TX1 main switch for power on of transmitter 1
TX2 main switch for power on of transmitter 2
Fuses:
F1 T1.0H, 250 V, protects 48 V to CSL
F2 T6.3H, protects DC supply to MON, LRCI, CSL

* 100 W version only

NOTE: Indicators and controls of optional subassemblies, i.e. modem and ETX−CPU are shown only in Fig. 3−2, 3−3.

Ed. 5.06
01.12 3−3
CVOR 431
Operation Operation and Maintenance
ETX−CPU, option
CPU reset
S1 LED:

ÊÊ
V2 network activity
V2 V6 V4 link available
V3 V3 access on flash disk

ÊÊ Ê
V4
V5 battery faulty or empty (X17)
V5 V6 watchdog enabled (X18)

ÊÊ Ê MSP−CD

ÊÊ Ê
Modem*

Modem*

Modem*
1)
TXDA

ÊÊ VAM* Ê
RXDA
MDS−V8*

LCP
CPU live
MSP−1

MSP−2

ÊÊ Ê
−−

DCC−3−05

ETX−CPU*
CSL

ÊÊ Ê pushbutton manual reset

ÊÊ Ê
ÊÊ Ê morse code indication

ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê
Ê
earphone jack (voice, ATIS)

ÊÊ Ê
MOD−110P***

MSG−C
MOD−110 or

ÊÊ Ê
MOD−110

MOD−110

DCC−MV

TXDA
MSG−C
MSG−S

ÊÊ Ê
RXDA
SYN

CCP

ÊÊ Ê
ÊÊ Ê
ÊÊ Ê
MOD−110** or
MOD−110P***

ÊÊ Ê
MOD−110**

MOD−110**

pushbutton manual reset

DCC−MV**
MSG−C**
MSG−S**

CPU live

ÊÊ Ê
SYN**

CCP**

ÊÊ Ê
ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê SYN 83135 28101 SYN 83135 28100

Ê
PMM
P3V3 available
Center Locked

ÊÊ Ê
Alert

ÊÊ Ê
no LED

ÊÊ Ê
DCC−28**

ÊÊ Ê
DCC−28

ÊÊ Ê
ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê
Ê
83135 28101 will replace 83135 28100

ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê
Ê
ACC**
ACC

ACC
−−

ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê
Ê
ÊÊ Ê
front side

* optional ** not used in single version *** 50 W version only 1) 8PGC option Version 100 W

Fig. 3−2 Indications and controls on the subassemblies inside the rack (1)

3−4 Ed. 08.10

05.06
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Operation

HD LED LC−CPU
R1 LCD brightness
CPU live lamp, green
Reset switch

Ê ÊÊ
Key and test jack
LGM option

Ê ÊÊ
PM1 test condition
M1 modem operable

Ê ÊÊ
M5* comm. line subsystem

Modem*

Modem*

Modem*
1)
PM1 Answ.

VAM*
and RCSE operable

Ê ÊÊ
MDS−V8*

LCP M1 (M5*) S1
Answ. modem occupies line
MSP−1

MSP−2

Ê ÊÊ
S1 DEE operable
−−

DCC−3−05

ETX−CPU*
CSL

FKS8 connector

Ê ÊÊ
* LGM28.8D1 opt.5
CSL

Ê ÊÊ TX1 ON, yellow

Ê ÊÊ
pushbutton manual TX1on
pushbutton manual TX1off

Ê ÊÊ
TX2 ON, yellow
pushbutton manual TX2on

Ê ÊÊ pushbutton manual TX2off

Ê ÊÊ
MOD−110P***

BCD−Switch TSG
MOD−110 or

MON1, Monitor Fault, red

Ê ÊÊ
MOD−110

MOD−110

DCC−MV

MON2, Monitor Fault, red

MSG−C
MSG−S

Ê ÊÊ
Switch Assoc./Indep.
SYN

CCP

Ê ÊÊ DCC−MV

Ê ÊÊ DC/DC ok (LED)

Ê ÊÊ
MOD−110** or
MOD−110P***

Ê ÊÊ
MOD−110**

MOD−110**

DCC−MV**
MSG−C**
MSG−S**

Ê ÊÊ
SYN**

CCP**

Ê ÊÊ
Ê ÊÊ
Ê ÊÊ
Main Switch NAV, TX1, TX2 on/off
PMM

Ê ÊÊ Fuse F1 T1,0H 250V; F2 T6,3H 250V

Ê ÊÊ
DCC−28

Ê ÊÊ
DC/DC ok (LED)
DCC−28**

Ê ÊÊ
DCC−28

Ê ÊÊ
Ê
Ê ÊÊ
ÊÊ
Ê ÊÊ
ACC

Ê ÊÊ
+54 V available (LED)
ACC**
ACC

ACC

Ê ÊÊ
−−

test jack Uout

Ê ÊÊ
R32, fine adjustment battery
charging voltage

Ê ÊÊ Converter on/off

front side

* optional ** not used in single version *** 50 W version only 1) 8PGC option Version 100 W

Fig. 3−3 Indications and controls on the subassemblies inside the rack (2)

Ed. 5.06 3−5

CVOR 431
Operation Operation and Maintenance

3.3.1 Subassembly CSL, Setting BCD−Switch for TSG−operation

The following signals are assigned to the BCD switch positions 0 to F in the CVOR/DVOR range:

Position AM AM FM FM AZ
0 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=16 Azimuth= 0 degrees
1 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=16 Azimuth= 45 degrees
2 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=16 Azimuth= 90 degrees
3 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=16 Azimuth=135 degrees
4 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=16 Azimuth=180 degrees
5 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=16 Azimuth=225 degrees
6 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=16 Azimuth=270 degrees
7 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=16 Azimuth=315 degrees
8 30 Hz AM, 0 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=16 Azimuth= − degrees
9 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 0 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=− Azimuth= 0 degrees
A 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=15 Azimuth= 0 degrees
B 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=17 Azimuth= 0 degrees
C 30 Hz AM, 30 % 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.−Index=25 Azimuth= 0 degrees
D,E,F Spare

3−6 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Operation
3.4 NORMAL OPERATION
3.4.1 Switching On

CAUTION

Never switch on the installation unless the antenna or an adequate dummy load is cor-
rectly connected! Make sure that the switches on the AC/DC converter are in ON position.
After the alignment procedure is completed use the DC main switch NAV and then TX1 and/or TX2
on PMM to switch on the transmitter. The LCP initializes, the status window is shown in the screen,
the main status indication is set. NORMAL should light for operation.

3.4.2 Set to Remote Mode (on LCP)

The remote mode is used in the normal operational configuration. To change over from local control
to remote control use the key−lock switch on the LCP. Set key−lock switch (Fig. 3−1) to "REMOTE".
Remote mode means that the system is under control of the remote facility, e.g. RCSE 443 or other.
− The monitor system is enabled. It can change over or shutdown the transmitter on alarm condition.
− Control from the remote site (e.g. RCSE, MCS) is enabled. Data from the installation received by
the Remote Unit (e.g. RCSE) are indicated on the front panel (INC) and/or displayed on a PC with
the PC User Program running (ADRACS or MCS) connected to the Remote Unit (eg. RCSE).
− In remote mode local controls are disabled on the LCP and in the PC User Program running on
the locally connected PC. Display of data is enabled both on LCP screen and the connected PC.

3.4.3 Change over from Remote to Local (on LCP)

To change over from Remote Control to Local Control use the key−lock switch on the LCP. Set key−
lock switch (Fig. 3−1) to "LOCAL". Local mode is a maintenance configuration controlled with the LCD
screen:
− The monitor system is enabled but can be locally disabled in the control menu.
− Control from the remote site (e.g. RCSE or MCS) is disabled. Remote Unit (e.g. RCSE) status data
are disabled except for Maintenance data. The PC User Program (ADRACS or MCS) connection
with the Remote Unit facility (e.g. RCSE) is disabled.
− Local control on the LCP and via locally connected PC and the PC User Program (ADRACS or
MCS) is enabled. Also the local PC User Program display (ADRACS or MCS) is enabled.

3.4.4 Change Over to Maintenance Operation

Maintenance operation is only necessary when operational values have to be adjusted on the trans-
mitter or when a maintenance check has to be performed. It is carried out using the maintenance con-
trol unit (PC). Set key−lock switch (Fig. 3−1) to "MAINTENANCE". Alarm indication is set caused by
monitor bypass setting in maintenance mode.
− The monitor system is enabled but can be locally disabled in the control menu.
− Control from the remote site (e.g. RCSE or MCS) is disabled. Remote Unit (e.g. RCSE) status data
are disabled except for Maintenance data. The PC User Program (ADRACS or MCS) connection
with the Remote Unit facility (e.g. RCSE) is disabled.
− Local control on the LCP and via locally connected PC and the PC User Program (ADRACS or
MCS) is enabled. Also the local PC User Program display (ADRACS or MCS) is enabled.

Ed. 5.06 3−7

CVOR 431
Operation Operation and Maintenance

3.4.5 Change over to Monitor Bypass

Bypass operation is only necessary when operational values have to be adjusted on the monitor. It
is carried out using the maintenance control unit (PC).
Bypass operation is only necessary when operational values have to be adjusted on the monitor. It
is carried out using the maintenance control unit (PC) remotely or the LCP control menu locally: Set
key−lock switch (Fig. 3−1) to "LOCAL".

3.4.6 Monitoring ATIS or Voice

An earphone (600 Ohm) can be connected to a 3.5 mm jack on the MSP to listen to ATIS information.
(ATIS = Automatic Terminal Information System)

3.4.7 Functional Check of Indications

When the two middle buttons of the control buttons of the LCP (S2 and S3) are pressed simulta-
neously all indications light up simultaneously and the buzzer sounds for optical and acoustical test
purposes. Since the monitor carries out normal checks of function and accuracy, the operation of the
installation is faultless when the liquid crystal display screen of the LCP indicates NORMAL. If however
the display screen shows WARNING or ALARM, a check of the installation via PC is possible if opera-
tion mode LOCAL" has been set by the key−lock switch on the LCP.

3.4.8 Switching Off

Use the DC main switch NAV on PMM to switch off the installation. Switches TX1 and TX2 are used
to switch off transmitter 1 and/or 2. The indications on the LCP extinguish.
NOTE: The LRCI (LCP and modem) is neither switched off via the remote nor the local control
interface, so that it can receive switch−on commands as long as any of the switches TX1
and TX2 are on. Main switch NAV must not be off in this case.

3−8 Ed. 05.06

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Operation
3.5 LCP AND LCD SCREEN FOR SYSTEM DISPLAY AND CONTROL
3.5.1 General Structure

The liquid crystal display (LCD) screen is used to indicate the system status with details to the monitor
status, the transmitter status and the status of maintenance data (e.g. power supply). Additionally the
display screen provides simple control activities to change the system state. These control activities
are only accessible in "Local" mode.

After switching on the equipment the application is started and the Status window appears on the
display screen (see Fig. 3−6), which contains information about the actual system status and opera-
tional mode. Starting from this Status window the user is able to change to the other windows via the
control buttons S1 to S4 below the LCD screen. The meaning of the buttons changes for the selected
window. The general window structure is shown in Fig. 3−4. The hierarchy of all LCP windows is given
in Fig. 3−5.

data, commands or list items

depending on window type

MENU MONITOR ALERTS CONTROL Menu line with meaning

of control buttons
1 2 3 4 control buttons S1...S4

Fig. 3−4 Structure of an LCP window (example)

Status Window
not for ’REMOTE’

MENU MONITOR ALERTS CONTROL

Menu List Monitor Data Show Alerts MON/TX Control

TRANSM Menu Status

Status Status Alert Indication Menu Status
MONITOR List Window
Window Window List Window

Select+Enter Transmitter Data

aerial

Menu Status
List Window

not for ’REMOTE’ not for ’REMOTE’

Status Show MON/TX Monitor Transmitter Supply Battery * Configuration Flight Check
Alerts Control Data Data Voltages Data Data Adjustment

Menu Menu Status Status Menu Transm Status Menu Monitor Status Menu Status Menu Status Menu Status Status
List List Window List List Window List Window List Window List Window List Window Window

visible in position LOCAL and MAINTENANCE of key−lock switch Station

Information
* available only if battery capacity is set resp. battery is present. If not this item is blanked.

Fig. 3−5 Hierarchy of all LCP windows

Ed. 07.09 3−9

CVOR 431
Operation Operation and Maintenance

3.5.2 Principle Operation of the Menu

Figures 3−6 to 3−20 show the examples of the selectable windows. The examples show windows
of a CVOR 431 50 W standard system.
In the Status window the following button definitions are used:
S1 MENU used to go to the Menu List window (see Fig. 3−12)
S2 MONITOR used to go to the system data quick access windows (see Figs. 3−7, 3−8)
S3 ALERTS used to get information about pre−alarms or alarms (see Fig. 3−9)
S4 CONTROL used to go to the MON/TX Control window (see Fig. 3−11)
N2K−CVOR 50W FULL DUAL
−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− alternative indication to ON/OFF:
TX 1: ON TX 2: OFF TX 1: OP OFF TX 2: OP OFF
AERIAL LOAD enabled, if switch−over to
BIT ALERT BIT ALERT other TX and also shutdown
of a TX has been performed
system status 906 hrs 458 hrs
enabled, if a transmitter recognizes
MON1: NORMAL MON2: NORMAL an alert in its BITE evaluation
BYPASSED BYPASSED enabled, if mon. bypass set

Maintenance Alert
flashing text if enabled MENU MONITOR ALERTS CONTROL * * CONTROL function only available
indicates if key switch position ’LOCAL’ or ’MAINTENANCE’
a maintenance alert
(e.g. battery, mains, intrusion) 1 2 3 4 control buttons (S)

Fig. 3−6 Status window after start of application (example, main state NORMAL)
The following quick access windows provide system data on 4 different windows:
− In the Monitor Data window the following button definitions are used:
S1 MENU used to go to Menu List window (see Fig. 3−12)
S2 TRANSM used to change to Transmitter data window (see Fig. 3−8)
S3 ALERTS used to get information about pre−alarms or alarms (see Fig. 3−9)
S4 STATUS used to return to the Status window (see Fig. 3−6)

N2K−CVOR 50W FULL DUAL TX 1 ON / AERIAL MONITOR DATA

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− 1 MONITOR 2
TX 1: ON TX 2 OFF BYPASSED BYPASSED **
AERIAL LOAD RF−LEVEL % 109 108
BIT ALERT BIT ALERT AZIMUTH dg 0.3 0.4
AM 30 HZ % 30.3 30.0
906 hrs 458 hrs AM 9960 HZ % 31.6 31.4
FM Index 15.8 16.3
MON1: NORMAL MON2: NORMAL
BYPASSED BYPASSED AM 1020 HZ % 11.5 13.2

Maintenance Alert

MENU MONITOR ALERTS CONTROL * MENU TRANSM ALERTS STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4
* local only
** if Bypass set or "Maintenance" mode

Remark: If a measurement value exceeds a limit it is indicated by PA (Pre−alarm) or AL (Alarm).

Fig. 3−7 MONITOR select and Monitor Data window (example)

3−10 Ed. 07.09

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Operation
− In the Transmitter Data window the following button definitions are used:
S1 MENU used to go to Menu List window (see Fig. 3−12)
S2 MONITOR used to change to Monitor Data window (see Fig. 3−7)
S3 ALERTS used to get information about pre−alarms or alarms (see Fig. 3−9)
S4 STATUS used to return to the Status window

TX 1 ON / AERIAL MONITOR DATA AERIAL TRANSMITTER DATA

1 MONITOR 2 TX−1 ON

RF−LEVEL % 109 108 Carrier Power 50.0 W

AZIMUTH dg 0.3 0.4 AM 9960 HZ 30.0 %
AM 30 HZ % 30.3 30.0 AM 1020 HZ 10.0 %
AM 9960 HZ % 31.6 31.4 SBA Level 31.0 %
FM Index 15.8 16.3 SBA RF Phase 100 dg
SBB Level 36.2 %
AM 1020 HZ % 11.5 13.2 SBB RF Phase 0 dg

MENU TRANSM ALERTS STATUS MENU MONITOR ALERTS STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4

Fig. 3−8 TRANSM select and Transmitter Data window (example)

− In the Alerts window the following button definitions are used:

S1 MENU used to go to Menu List window (see Fig. 3−12)
S2 ↑ used to select item, upwards
S3 ↓ used to select item, downwards
S4 STATUS used to return to the Status window (see Fig. 3−6)

TX 1 ON / AERIAL MONITOR DATA SHOW ALERTS

1 MONITOR 2 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
** Alarms: Mode: local *
RF−LEVEL % 109 108
AZIMUTH dg 0.3 0.4 − Monitor Fault
AM 30 HZ % 30.3 30.0 − Monitor Bit warning
AM 9960 HZ % 31.6 31.4 − Transmitter Bit Warning
FM Index 15.8 16.3 − Transmitter Operational Off flag

AM 1020 HZ % 11.5 13.2

MENU TRANSM ALERTS STATUS MENU ↑ SCROLL ↓ STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4
* or ’remote’ * * contents of window depends on alarm status

Fig. 3−9 ALERTS select and Show Alerts window (example)

Possible alert indications to the user (if existing) are shown as follows. If no alerts exist the message
’All parameters OK !’ is displayed.

Ed. 07.09 3−11

CVOR 431
Operation Operation and Maintenance
The Show Alerts window presents the following alarms/pre−alarms to the user (if existing):
− Monitor Bypass On
− Monitor Fault
− Monitor Bit Warning
− Monitor Pre−Alarm
− Monitor Alarm
− Monitor Non−Exec Alarm
− Aerial Transmitter Off
− Transmitter Operational Off flag
− Transmitter Bit Warning
− Transmitter Fault
− Remote Control Communication Lost
− BCPS 1 Failure
− BCPS 2 Failure
− BCPS 3 Failure
− BCPS 4 Failure
− Mains OFF
− Battery Capacity warning
− System Current warning
− Battery Disconnected
− Battery Voltage Warning
− Battery Current Warning
− GND MV failure
− CSL Ref. +2.5V failure
− CSL Ref. +15V failure
− CSL Ref. −15V failure
− User Def. BITE Alert
− Temperature 1 Alarm (user def. 11)
− Temperature 2 Alarm (user def. 12)
− MON−1 Data Communication Error
− MON−2 Data Communication Error
− TX−1 Data Communication Error
− TX−2 Data Communication Error
− Configuration Mismatch
− Monitors Disagree
− Battery Capacity Forced OFF
− LRCI Battery Warning
− Intrusion Alarm
− Smoke Alarm
− Ext. Temp Alarm

The Show Alerts window also indicates the actual operational mode (following ’Mode:’):
− "remote" Remote mode enabled
− "remote maint." Remote mode with maintenance activity enabled
− "local" Local operation enabled

3−12 Ed. 07.09

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Operation
To return to the Status window each selected window provides also the STATUS button on S4:

SHOW ALERTS N2K−CVOR 50W FULL DUAL

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− *
−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Alarms: Mode: local TX 1: ON TX 2 OFF
AERIAL LOAD
− Monitor Fault
− Monitor Bit warning
− Transmitter Bit Warning 906 hrs 458 hrs
− Transmitter Operational Off flag
MON1: NORMAL MON2: NORMAL

Maintenance Alert

MENU ↑ SCROLL ↓ STATUS MENU MONITOR ALERTS CONTROL

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4
* or ’remote’

Fig. 3−10 STATUS select and return to Status window (example)

In the MON/TX Control window following button definitions are used (available and visible in key
switch position ’LOCAL’ or ’MAINTENANCE’ only):
S1 SWITCH used to switch selected item to on/off or 1/2;
if once used the STATUS field indication in the display shows the new state.
S2 ↑ used to select item, upwards
S3 ↓ used to select item, downwards
S4 STATUS used to return to the Status window (see Fig. 3−6)

N2K−CVOR 50W FULL DUAL CONTROLS STATUS

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− −−−−−−−−−−−−−−− −−−−−−−−
TX 1: ON TX 2 OFF > TX 1 ON
AERIAL LOAD TX 2 OFF
TX AERIAL 1
CLEAR OP−OFF−FLAGS
906 hrs 458 hrs
MON−1 MODE EXECUTIVE
MON1: NORMAL MON2: NORMAL MAINTENANCE MON−2 MODE EXECUTIVE
LOCAL

Maintenance Alert Key switch AUDIBLE ALARM DISABLED

MENU MONITOR ALERTS CONTROL SWITCH ↑ SELECT ↓ STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4

Fig. 3−11 CONTROL select and MON/TX Control window (example)

Ed. 07.09 3−13

CVOR 431
Operation Operation and Maintenance
In the Menu List window the following button definitions are used:
− S1 ENTER used to enter/confirm selected item in the Menu List
− S2 ↑ used to select menu item, upwards, selected item is pointed with >
− S3 ↓ used to select menu item, downwards, selected item is pointed with >
− S4 STATUS used to return to the Status window (see Fig. 3−6).
The menu item BATTERY DATA is blanked if the battery is absent and no ’battery capacity’ is set.

N2K−CVOR 50W FULL DUAL MENU LIST

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− −−−−−−−−−−−
TX 1: ON TX 2 OFF > STATUS
AERIAL LOAD SHOW ALERTS
** MON/TX CONTROL
906 hrs 458 hrs MONITOR DATA
TRANSMITTER DATA
SUPPLY VOLTAGES
MON1: NORMAL MON2: NORMAL BATTERY DATA
BYPASSED BYPASSED CONFIGURATION DATA
FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT

Maintenance Alert

MENU MONITOR ALERTS CONTROL * ENTER ↑ SELECT ↓ STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4

* local only * * depends on operation mode (not for REMOTE)

Fig. 3−12 MENU select and Menu List window (example)

The windows shown after selection of the Menu List items STATUS, SHOW ALERTS, MON/TX CON-
TROL, MONITOR DATA and TRANSMITTER DATA are described and shown in Figs. 3−6 to 3−11.
Following Figs. 3−13 to 3−20 show/describe the windows of the other Menu List items.
In the Supply Voltages window the following button definitions are used:
− S1 MENU used to return to the Menu List window
− S2 blank not used in this menu item
− S3 blank not used in this menu item
− S4 STATUS used to go back to the Status window (see Fig. 3−6).

MENU LIST DC−VOLTAGES OF AERIAL TX

−−−−−−−−−−− TX−1 ON
STATUS
SHOW ALERTS MEASUREMENTS MON 1 MON 2
MON/TX CONTROL + 5 VOLTS MV 5.08 V 5.07 V
MONITOR DATA + 15 VOLTS MV 14.79 V 14.77 V
TRANSMITTER DATA − 15 VOLTS MV −14.84 V −14.81 V
> SUPPLY VOLTAGES + 28 VOLTS MV 27.24 V 27.14 V
BATTERY DATA + 5 VOLTS MON 5.01 V 5.03 V
CONFIGURATION DATA
FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT

ENTER ↑ SELECT ↓ STATUS MENU STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4
2. 1.

Fig. 3−13 SUPPLY VOLTAGES select and Supply Voltages window (example)

3−14 Ed. 07.09

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Operation
In the Battery Data window the following button definitions are used:
− S1 MENU used to return to the Menu List window
− S2 blank not used in this menu item
− S3 blank not used in this menu item
− S4 STATUS used to go back to the Status window (see Fig. 3−6)
NOTE: The menu item Battery Data is visible if a battery is present and a ’battery capacity’ is set;
if not, the item is blanked.

MENU LIST BATTERY DATA

−−−−−−−−−−− −−−−−−−−−−−−−−
STATUS MEASUREMENTS LRCI
SHOW ALERTS
MON/TX CONTROL Battery Voltage 54.02 V
MONITOR DATA Batt. half voltage diff. 0.01 V
TRANSMITTER DATA Battery current 0.00 A
SUPPLY VOLTAGES Equipment current 6.68 A
> BATTERY DATA Actual battery capacity 46.00 Ah
CONFIGURATION DATA
FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT

ENTER ↑ SELECT ↓ STATUS MENU STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4
2. 1.

Fig. 3−14 BATTERY DATA select and Battery Data window (example)

In the Configuration Data window the following button definitions are used:
− S1 MENU used to return to the Menu List window
− S2 blank not used in this menu item
− S3 INFO used to go to the Station Information window (see Fig. 3−20)
− S4 STATUS used to go back to the Status window (see Fig. 3−6)

MENU LIST VOR CONFIGURATION DATA

−−−−−−−−−−− −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
STATUS LCP SW−Ver. : 5.0 (K−Tab: 5.0)
ALERT INDICATION Site name : CVOR−STG
MON/TX CONTROL Station name : CVOR−STG
MONITOR DATA Station type : N2K−CVOR 50W
TRANSMITTER DATA FULL DUAL
SUPPLY VOLTAGES Battery : present
BATTERY DATA Monitor Mode : AND
> CONFIGURATION DATA Field Monitoring : Standard
FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT

ENTER ↑ SELECT ↓ STATUS MENU INFO STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4

2. 1.

Fig. 3−15 CONFIGURATION DATA select and Configuration Data window (example)

Ed. 07.09 3−15

CVOR 431
Operation Operation and Maintenance
For adjustments during flight check, the LCP menu comprises an additional menu item, which is avail-
able and visible in key switch position ’LOCAL’ or ’MAINTENANCE’. This feature is used for quick ac-
cess to some settings. The feature needs three steps (3 windows) to perform the settings.
In the Flight Check Adjustment window (1st step) the following button definitions are used:
− S1 ENTER used to confirm selected item in the Flight Check Adjustment window
− S2 ↑ used to scroll parameters upwards, selected item is pointed with >
− S3 ↓ used to scroll parameters downwards, selected item is pointed with >
− S4 STATUS used to go back to the Status window (see Fig. 3−6)

MENU LIST FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT

MAINTENANCE
−−−−−−−−−−− TX ON AIR: 1 TX STATUS: ON
STATUS LOCAL

ALERT INDICATION AM 9960Hz M1: 30.3% M2: 30.5%

MON/TX CONTROL Key switch
MONITOR DATA Carrier Power 50.0 W
TRANSMITTER DATA Azimuth 0.8 deg
SUPPLY VOLTAGES > AM 9960 Hz 30.0 %
BATTERY DATA AM 1020 Hz 10.0 %
CONFIGURATION DATA SB Level Multiplier 100.0 %
> FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT Modulation Index 16.0
Morse Code THAL char

ENTER ↑ SELECT ↓ STATUS ENTER ↑ SELECT ↓ STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4
2. 1. 2. 1.

Fig. 3−16 FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT select and 1st step window (example)

Use ENTER to select the parameter to be adjusted. The next window (2nd step) with changed buttons
appears. This 2nd step window uses the following button definitions:
− S1 READY used to enter set value and to indicate close of enter procedure
− S2 ↑ used to scroll selected digit (value) upwards
− S3 ↓ used to scroll selected digit (value) downwards
− S4 SEL−DIGIT used to select digit to be changed (scrolling through parameter digits)

FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT

TX ON AIR: 1 TX STATUS: ON TX ON AIR: 1 TX STATUS: ON

AM 9960Hz M1: 30.3% M2: 30.5% AM 9960Hz M1: 30.3% M2: 30.5%

Carrier Power 50.0 W Carrier Power 50.0 W

Azimuth 0.8 deg Azimuth 0.8 deg
> AM 9960 Hz 30.0 % > AM 9960 Hz 30.0 %
AM 1020 Hz 10.0 % AM 1020 Hz 10.0 %
SB Level Multiplier 100.0 % SB Level Multiplier 100.0 %
Modulation Index 16.0 Modulation Index 16.0
Morse Code THAL char Morse Code THAL char
digit to be changed
is marked and flashes

ENTER ↑ SELECT ↓ STATUS READY ↑ SELECT ↓ SEL−DIGIT

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4
2. 1.

Fig. 3−17 Select parameter to change in Flight Check Adjustment 2nd step window (example)

3−16 Ed. 07.09

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Operation
Select the digit of parameter to be changed with SEL−DIGIT. Change value of digit with SCROLL but-
tons (up/down). Use READY to finish the setting procedure. The next window (3rd step) with changed
buttons appears.

This window (3rd step) uses the following button definitions:

− S1 PROGRAM used to confirm/program the changed value of the selected parameter
− S2 ↑ not used in this window
− S3 ↓ not used in this window
− S4 ABORT used to abort the adjustment procedure without change of values

FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT

TX ON AIR: 1 TX STATUS: ON TX ON AIR: 1 TX STATUS: ON

AM 9960Hz M1: 30.3% M2: 30.5% AM 9960Hz M1: 30.3% M2: 30.5%

Carrier Power 50.0 W Carrier Power 50.0 W

Azimuth 0.8 deg Azimuth 0.8 deg
> AM 9960 Hz 30.0 % > AM 9960 Hz 30.0 %
AM 1020 Hz 10.0 % AM 1020 Hz 10.0 %
SB Level Multiplier 100.0 % SB Level Multiplier 100.0 %
Modulation Index 16.0 Modulation Index 16.0
Morse Code THAL char Morse Code THAL char
digit to be changed
is marked and flashes

READY ↑ SELECT ↓ SEL−DIGIT PROGRAM ↑ SELECT ↓ ABORT

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4
2. 1.

Fig. 3−18 Select digit and change value in Flight Check Adjustment 2nd step window (example)

Select PROGRAM in window (3rd step) to perform the change or ABORT to reject the change. Both
selections return automatically to the 1st step window.

FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT FLIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT

TX ON AIR: 1 TX STATUS: ON TX ON AIR: 1 TX STATUS: ON

AM 9960Hz M1: 30.3% M2: 0.5% AM 9960Hz M1: 30.3% M2: 30.5%

Carrier Power 50.0 W Carrier Power 50.0 W

Azimuth 0.8 deg Azimuth 0.8 deg
> AM 9960 Hz 30.0 % > AM 9960 Hz 30.0 %
AM 1020 Hz 10.0 % AM 1020 Hz 10.0 %
SB Level Multiplier 100.0 % SB Level Multiplier 100.0 %
Modulation Index 16.0 Modulation Index 16.0
Morse Code THAL char Morse Code THAL char

PROGRAM ↑ SELECT ↓ ABORT ENTER ↑ SELECT ↓ STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4

Fig. 3−19 Confirm/abort changes in Flight Check Adjustment 3rd step window (example)

Ed. 07.09 3−17

 CVOR 431
Operation Operation and Maintenance
In the Station Information window the following button definitions are used:
S1 MENU used to go to Menu List window (see Fig. 3−12)
S2 CONFIG used to return to Configuration Data window (see Fig. 3−15)
S3 ALERTS used to go to Show Alerts window (see Fig. 3−10)
S4 STATUS used to return Status window (see Fig. 3−6)

VOR CONFIGURATION DATA STATION INFORMATION

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
LCP SW−Ver. : 5.0 (K−Tab: 5.0)
Site name : CVOR−STG 14.07.2009 08:11:34
Station name : CVOR−STG
Station type : N2K−CVOR 50W Software Version of Subsystems:
FULL DUAL MON1: 5.00 TX1: 3.00
Battery : present MON2: 5.00 TX2: 3.00
Monitor Mode : AND
* Field Monitoring : Standard

MENU INFO STATUS MENU CONFIG ALERTS STATUS

1 2 3 4 control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4

Fig. 3−20 INFO select and Station Information window (example)

3−18 Ed. 07.09

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure

CHAPTER 4
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
The alignment procedure of a CVOR including the general prerequisites is described in a step by step
manner starting with 4.1. The following list is a summary and also a detailed table of contents.

NOTE: The procedures if the eight point ground check option is used are described in an Annex
to this chapter.

4.1 GENERAL PREREQUISITES

4.1.1 Local Operation via Personal Computer
4.1.1.1 PC with MCS User Program
4.1.1.2 PC with ADRACS User Program
4.1.2 Recommended Measuring Equipment
4.1.3 Status of Installation
4.1.4 Special Setups for Alignment without Antenna System
4.1.5 Labelling of Parameters, Access to Adjustment Windows
4.2 FIRST SWITCHING ON
4.2.1 Status of the System
4.2.1.1 Special Jumper Settings before Start Up
4.2.2 Switching On
4.2.3 General Remarks to the PC User Program Handling
4.2.4 Preparing the Installation SITE with PC User Program
4.2.4.1 Use of MCS
4.2.4.2 Use of ADRACS
4.2.5 Check and Enter Station Configuration Data
4.3 ANTENNA ALIGNMENT
4.3.1 Mechanical Presettings
4.3.2 Matching
4.3.3 Decoupling and Circular Pattern of LR
4.3.4 Decoupling and Circular Pattern of UR
4.3.5 Fine Matching of Omnidirectional Radiator
4.3.6 Decoupling Dipole A − B
4.4 RF−PHASING OF OMNIDIRECTIONAL RADIATOR LR − UR
4.4.1 Test Setup
4.4.2 RF−Phasing of UR − Dipole A
4.4.3 RF−Phasing of LR − Dipole A
4.5 CHECK OF MONITORS
4.5.1 Preparations
4.5.2 Monitor 1
4.5.3 Monitor 2
4.6 SETTING OF TRANSMITTERS AND MONITORS
4.6.1 Adjustment of Carrier Power TX1/TX2
4.6.2 RF Phasing (SB − C), 30 Hz AM and Sense of Rotation of TX1
4.6.3 RF Phasing (SB − C), 30 Hz AM and Sense of Rotation of TX2
4.6.4 Setting of TX1 and Monitor 1
4.6.5 Setting of TX2 with Monitor 1
4.6.6 Setting and Check of Monitor 2

Ed. 01.12 4−1

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance
4.7 GROUND CHECK
4.7.1 Preparation of Monitor 2
4.7.2 Error Curve TX1
4.7.3 Error Curve TX2
4.7.4 Resetting of Monitor 2
4.8 SETTING OF MONITOR ALARM LIMITS
4.8.1 Monitor 1
4.8.2 Monitor 2

4.9 BATTERY MONITORING

4.10 NORMAL OPERATION

4.10.1 Prerequisites
4.10.2 TX1 Main
4.10.3 TX2 Main
4.11 FLIGHT CHECK
4.11.1 Prerequisites
4.11.2 Correction of TX1 and Monitor 1
4.11.3 Correction of TX2 and Monitor 2
4.11.4 Adjustment of Monitor 2 with TX1/2
4.11.5 Check of Monitor Alarm Limits
4.11.6 Normal Operation

4.12 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MONITOR DISPLAY OF THE RF LEVEL AND THE POWER

4−2 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.1 GENERAL PREREQUISITES
This chapter is a step by step field alignment procedure. It assumes that the transmitter cabinet has
been factory aligned and tested.
4.1.1 Local Operation via Personal Computer
A standard or Laptop PC is used to perform locally the first alignment of the installation. Usually suit-
able PC equipment is already available at site. Otherwise it can be delivered on request as an option.
A user program for controlling the Navaids station has to be installed on the PC. The adjustment of
the transmitter and monitor parameters is performed via this PC/laptop using the corresponding func-
tions/windows of the user program.
Two different PC user programs for controlling the Navaids station are available at the moment, the
MCS user program or the ADRACS user program.

4.1.1.1 PC with MCS User Program

The locally connected PC/Laptop with the MCS User Program can occupy the roles CWP (Controller
Working Position) or MCWP (Mediator Controller Working Position), see Technical Manual MCS (Ref.
No. 83140 55325).
In the standard application the local PC/Laptop is used as MCWP, i.e. the MCS application GUI, the
SNMP proxy agents and the Direct Connect option are installed to the PC/Laptop. The PC/Laptop
is connected to the connector ’Local PC’ on top of the cabinet.
In an optional application (currently only available for DVOR/CVOR systems) the local PC/Laptop is
used as CWP, i.e. the MCS application GUI is installed to the PC/Laptop and the SNMP proxy agents
are installed to a built−in intelligent board, the optional ETX−CPU board. The PC/Laptop is con-
nected to the connector ’ETHERNET’ on top of the cabinet which is fed to the ETX−CPU board.
The corresponding MCS application software should be installed on the available PC/Laptop. For
installation procedure refer to the Technical Manual MCS.

CAUTION
Do not use both connections simultaneously to avoid confusion in the data management!
The PC/Laptop used for the CWP role or MCWP role should be built by a quality PC manufacturer
and must meet the following requirements:
CWP MCWP
− Processor; clock Intel P4, AMD K7; 2 GHz (or better) Intel P4, AMD K7; 2 GHz (or better)
− Power supply units 1 2
− Main memory 512 MB (or better) 512 MB (or better)
− VGA memory 32 MB (or better) 32 MB (or better)
− HDD 20 GB (or better) 2x 20 GB (or better)
− CDROM x x
− Input via mouse x x
− Serial connector − 1 per connected Navaids device
− USB connector recommended recommended
− Network adapter x x
− Operating system WinNT, W2K, WindowsXP, Fedora Fedora Core 4 (FC4),
Core 4 (FC4), Red Hat 9 (RH9) Red Hat 9 (RH9)
− Free disk space for MCS 100 MB (without Data Base option), 100 MB (without Data Base option),
min. 10 GB (with DB option) min. 10 GB (with DB option)
− SUN Java VM 1.5.0 (or higher) 1.5.0 (or higher)

Ed. 01.12 4−3

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

4.1.1.2 PC with ADRACS User Program

The PC with the ADRACS user program should meet the following requirements:
− Processor; clock min. Pentium I, 90 MHz or better (IBM PC/AT compatible)
− Main memory min. 32 MB RAM
− Graphics and memory VGA, min. 2 MB; color monitor, resolution min. 800x600
− Hard disk min. 1 GB HDD
− CDROM available, min. speed 4x
− Floppy drive 3.5" FDD (1.44 MB), recommended
− Control input via mouse or comparable pointing device
− Serial interface two serial interface connectors available
− Network adapter −
− USB interface recommended, useful for memory sticks
− Operating system any 32 bit version of Microsoft WINDOWS operating system
− Free disk space min. 10 MB on HDD
The ADRACS software should be installed on the available PC. For installation procedure refer to the
Technical Manual ADRACS (Ref. No. 83140 55324).

4.1.2 Recommended Measuring Equipment

− 1 Multimeter
− 1 Thruline power meter with 1 W, 10 W and 100 W probes, range of frequency 108...118 MHz
− 1 Attenuator 10 dB/10 W
− 3 Attenuators 20 dB/1 W
− 3 Terminating resistors 50 ohm/1 W
− 1 RF phasing cable (55°/113 MHz), TNC (M−f); approx. 5 phasing pieces TNC (M−f)
− 1 measuring dipole with tripod and 2x 30 m RF cable
− Various adaptors N−TNC and measuring cables
− 1 Monitor Signal Simulator (option, Ref. No. 83134 31600) with VHF−attenuator 30 dB/100 W
− 1 Monitor Signal Simulator 8PGC (option, Ref. No. 58351 00500 with cable kit) and optional
1 VHF−attenuator 26 dB 50/100 W, 2 VHF−attenuators 20 dB/10 W

4.1.3 Status of Installation

Before operation, the system must complete as follows:
− Transmitter cabinet, installed,
− Power supply, installed,
− Batteries, installed,
− Antenna system and Monitor dipole, installed and cabling complete.
− Mains voltage must be in accordance with assigned input voltage range of BCPS
(nominal 115 to 230 VAC).
− Cabinet has to be fully equipped with all plug−in units.
− Jumpers and DIP switches of the pertinent pc boards (refer also to chapter 6, section 6.2.5) have
to be in accordance with the system version. To enable battery backup on specific pc boards refer
to 4.2.1.1.
− The MCS resp. ADRACS application software has been loaded to the Laptop/PC (refer to 4.1.1).

4−4 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.1.4 Special Setups for Alignment without Antenna System
If the alignment is carried out on dummy loads proceed as follows: Arrange simulator setup according
to Fig. 4−9. For 8PGC Monitor Simulator, refer to Fig. A4−7 in the Annex to Chapter 4.
If a Monitor Signal Simulator is available (for supply by Thales, see Section 4.1.2) proceed as follows,
see also Fig. 4−10:
− Connect CSB−signal to CSB IN of Monitor Signal Simulator and terminate CSB OUT by UHF pow-
er attenuator 30 dB/100 W.
− Connect SB1− or SB2−signal to SB1(2) IN of Monitor Signal Simulator and terminate SB1(2) OUT
to 50 ohm/10 W dummy load.
− Terminate SB1−OUT or SB2−OUT via attenuator 10 dB/10 W with a 50 ohm/1 W dummy load.
− Terminate unused SB signal of CVOR cabinet directly by 10 W dummy load.
− Connect MON1− and MON2−connectors of CVOR−cabinet with corresponding MON−connec-
tors of simulator. Depending on the RF level, connect an attenuator between the cables.
Then the alignment of transmitter and simulator can be carried out as described below with the follow-
ing exceptions: Omit sections 4.3, 4.4, 4.6.1e) to j), 4.6.2.1, 4.6.2.4, 4.6.4.1a) to b), 4.7 and 4.11.
NOTE: If the 8PGC Monitor Simulator is used, perform RF phasing according 4.1.4.1 to 4.1.4.3.
4.1.4.1 RF Phasing (SBA to CSB) with 8 PGC Monitor Simulator
8 PGC Monitor simulator is installed and connected according Fig. A4−7.
a) Check or set parameters in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’:
− ’Carrier power’ (CSB) : 50/100 W
− ’SBA level’ : 50 %
− ’SBB level’ : 0%
− ’FM Index’ (30 Hz FM) : 16
− ’9960 Hz AM’ : 30 %
b) ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement 8PGC’. Open dialog ’Monitor1 − Calibration
8PGC’. Set parameter ’AGC Adjust’ of Dipole 1 (’0.0’) to ’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor1−Measmt 8 PGC−RF Level’. Open dialog ’Monitor1−Cal 8 PGC−
Calibration Agc Adjustment’. Set parameter ’Calibration AGC Adjustment’ of Dipole 1 (’0.0’) to
’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %.
c) Set SBA phase in order to get a 30 Hz mod. depth minimum: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measure-
ment Main (Measurements/Limits)’, read parameter ’30 Hz AM Depth’. Open window ’TX1 − Ad-
justments’, set parameter ’SBA Phase’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.
d) Add or subtract 90 to the value found in c) and enter new value.
NOTE: Note value.
e) Set parameter ’SBA Level’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ so, that 30 Hz modulation depth be-
comes 30.0 %. Record setting phase and amplitude.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...99.9. Note value .
4.1.4.2 RF Phasing (SBB to CSB) with 8 PGC Monitor Simulator
a) Check or set parameters in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’:
− ’Carrier power’ (CSB) : 50/100 W
− ’SBA level’ : 0%
− ’SBB level’ : 50 %
− ’FM Index’ (30 Hz FM) : 16
− ’9960 Hz AM’ : 30 %

Ed. 01.12 4−5

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance
b) ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement 8PGC’. Open dialog ’Monitor1 − Calibration
8PGC’. Set parameter ’AGC Adjust’ of Dipole 3 (’90.0’) to ’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor1−Measmt 8 PGC−RF Level’. Open dialog ’Monitor1−Cal 8 PGC−
Calibration Agc Adjustment’. Set parameter ’Calibration AGC Adjustment’ of Dipole 3 (’90.0’) to
’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %.
c) Set SBB phase in order to get a 30 Hz modulation depth minimum: Open window ’Monitor1 − Mea-
surement Main (Measurementss/Limits)’, read parameter ’30 Hz AM Depth’. Set parameter ’SBB
Phase’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.
d) Add or subtract 90 to the value found in c) and enter new value.
NOTE: Note value.
e) Set parameter ’SBB Level’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ so, that ’30 Hz AM Depth’ in window
’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’ becomes 30.0 %. Record setting phase
and amplitude.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...99.9. Note value.

4.1.4.3 Check of Sense of Rotation

a) Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, open window ’TX1 − Ad-
justments’. Set parameter ’9960Hz AM Depth’ to an indication of 30 % for ’9960Hz AM Depth’.
b) Set parameter ’Modulation Index (FM Index)’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ to a ’FM Index’ indica-
tion of 16.
c) Check readout of 45°, 135°, 225°, 315° for correct indication.
If the readout shows 180° Azimuth error ’Azimuth’, add or subtract 180° to/from the parameter
’SBA Phase’ in ’TX1 − Adjustments’.

4−6 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.1.5 Labelling of Parameters, Access to Adjustment Windows
(from ADRACS software V3.8 and MCS software V1.8)
From ADRACS software version 3.8 and MCS software V1.8, the user interface implements changes
which clearify some labels to improve handling. The first alignment procedure and the parameters
to be adjusted are mostly identically to those used up to software version 3.6. The improvement con-
cerns the labels of some parameters and the access to adjustment windows. In detail, the design of
previously used ’data window’ has been replaced by a more distinct ’dialog window’.
The (LRCI) ’Station Configuration’ window has a special characteristic: the parameter values entered
within this data window are first checked by ADRACS regarding consistency and integrity, and then
sent as a whole data set to the station after clicking on ’Program’. The text string "Programming ac-
cepted" appears in the left part of the 3rd information line in the ’Controlling’ window for confirmation.
An example is the new dialog window ’Station Configuration’ used to enter station configuration pa-
rameter (Fig. 4−1). Refer also to description in the Technical Manual ADRACS.

Settings for field monitor

configuration

Definition main dipole

Definition Monitor logic

THL*

Fig. 4−1 Example of dialog window ’Station Configuration’ (ADRACS)

Ed. 01.12 4−7

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

4−8 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.2 FIRST SWITCHING ON
4.2.1 Status of the System
− Mains OFF (mains distribution box, shelter)
− Battery fuse switches open (used for emergency battery, battery fuse box, shelter)
− Power switches on BCPS (ACC modules, transmitter cabinet) in position OFF (0)
− PMM: switches NAV, TX1, TX2 (transmitter cabinet) in position OFF
4.2.1.1 Special Jumper Settings before Start Up
Individual jumpers have to be set before the first switching on. These are concerned with the enabling
of backup batteries for non volatile memory (LCP, MSP−CD/1,2, MSG−C/1,2) and the emergency
battery management (CSL). The location of jumpers is shown in chapter 6, section 6.2.5:
− LCP: Set jumper X36 (enabling backup battery for RTC).
− MSP−CD: Set jumper X7 on both boards (enabling backup battery, if need be).
− MSG−C: Set jumper X7 on both boards (enabling backup battery).
− CSL: Set jumper X18 (enabling cutoff for over discharge protection of emergency battery).
− CSL: Set jumper X22 (enabling automatic restore).
− CSL: Select minimal battery voltage with jumper X19,20,21 for standard over discharge protection.
− ETX−CPU option (if available): Check if jumper X17 is set (default).

4.2.2 Switching On
a) Connect PC serial interface connector (e.g. COM1) to connector ’Local PC’ on top of the cabinet
with a ’zero modem cable’ (RX/TX crossed) or use Ethernet connection if opt. ETX−CPU is used.
NOTE: If the PC has no serial interface, use adapter USB to Serial. Refer to TM ADRACS, chapter 1.
b) Switch on mains and set power switches of BCPS (ACC modules, cabinet) to position ON (I).
c) Close battery fuse switches (battery fuse box, inside shelter).
NOTE: Matching the charging voltage of BCPS modules to environmental conditions: Refer to 5.3.3.
d) Set switches TX1/TX2 on PMM (cabinet, front side) to position ON.
e) Set main switch NAV on PMM (cabinet, front side) to position ON. During initialization of the LCP
a buzzer signal is set.
f) Switch to local control with the key−lock switch on the Local Control Interface (LCI).

4.2.3 General Remarks to the PC User Program Handling

The use of the PC user program (ADRACS or MCS) is described in the Technical Manuals ADRACS
respectively MCS (chapter 2 each). It is recommended to become familiar with the menues of the user
program before performing the first alignment procedure. The user program specific actions/proce-
dures are described in detail in the ANNEX ’PC User Program−specific Procedures’ in this manual.
This concerns:
− start user program/perform login/select station,
− commands to switch a transmitter on/off or aerial, or to set monitor bypass on/off, and
− commands to open a dialog for parameter reading and setting.
NOTE: Names of dialogs/parameters in MCS different to ADRACS are given in brackets ( ).

Ed. 01.12 4−9

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

4.2.4 Preparing the Installation SITE with PC User Program

NOTE: It is assumed, that the transmitter cabinet has been factory−aligned and tested. There-
fore the site−specific configuration files are already stored in the equipment. The follo-
wing procedure is only necessary, if the configuration has to be modified.
4.2.4.1 Use of MCS
NOTE: For users of the MCS user program, currently the ’MCS File Transfer’ tool is used.
a) Switch on the PC and run the Linux operating system.
b) Start the File Transfer tool: click on desktop start button, select ’System Tools’, select ’MCS File
Transfer (ILS, VOR, FFM, Marker)’. The dialog window ’ADR_MAIN−DOS in a BOX’ appears.
c) Select menu item ’LOGIN’ of the MASTER MENU. Enter REU as ’UserName’ and confirm blank
characters in ’Password’.
d) Select ’FILE TRANSFER’ of the MASTER MENU, select menu command ’COPY PC FILE TO SITE’.
e) Select configuration files (*.sit, *.lke (see NOTE), *.ptt, *.oio) and enter.
NOTE: The *.lke−file is used in systems before current NAV2K−SW. It is replaced by a conver-
sion table file (konv_dat.dat) which is loaded together with the LCP−SW (from V3.x).
From SW V5.x this file is implemented in the LCP.ZIP file. It has not to be copied.
f) Select menu item ’RESET SITE’ of the MASTER MENU to activate entered files and data.
NOTE: The File Transfer tool is closed due to the reset. It has to be restarted manually.
g) Run ’MCS File Transfer’ tool again. Perform Login.
h) Select ’DATE & TIME’ in the MASTER MENU. Select menu item ’SET SITE DATE & TIME’. Enter
date and time.
i) Select function ’EXIT’ in the MASTER MENU to shut down the File Transfer tool.
4.2.4.2 Use of ADRACS
a) Switch on the PC and run WINDOWS.
b) Start the ADRACS user program: click ’Start’ button, select ’Programs’, select program group
’Adracs Remote Controlling’, select program ’Adracs Remote Controlling Software’.
c) Perform login procedure at the PC. Acknowledge ’User1, Level 5’ with ’OK’ button.
d) Click button ’Control’ in the ’Main Status’ window.
e) Select ’File Transfer’ in window ’RC Management’. Select ’Copy PC file to RAM’.
f) Copy configuration files (*.sit, *.lke (see NOTE), *.ptt, *.oio) from PC to site.
NOTE: The *.lke−file is used in systems before current NAV2K−SW. It is replaced by a conver-
sion table file (konv_dat.dat) which is loaded together with the LCP−SW (from V3.x).
From SW V5.x this file is implemented in the LCP.ZIP file. It has not to be copied.
g) Click ’Reset SITE’ of menu ’File Transfer’ to activate entered files and data.
NOTE: The ’Adracs Remote Controlling Software’ is closed due to the reset. It has to be restarted
manually.
h) Run ’Adracs Remote Controlling Software’ again. Perform Login.
i) Click screen button ’Control’ in the ’Main Status’ window.
j) Select ’DateTimeREU’ in window ’RC Management’. Enter date and time and acknowledge with
button ’Set New’. Shut down window ’DateTimeREU’.
k) Click ’Exit’ in the ’Main Status’ window to shut down ADRACS.

4−10 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.2.5 Check and Enter Station Configuration Data
NOTE: Normally these data may be already set in the equipment.
a) Start user program, perform login and select station. The detailed view on the CVOR station ap-
pears.
b) Switch both TX on and set all Monitor Bypass on.
Using ADRACS:
a) Open dialog ’LRCI−Station Configuration’.
NOTE: This dialog window (refer to example in section 4.1.5) represents a summary of the station con-
figuration data. It summarizes the station parameter of the data windows ’TX1 Configuration’,
’TX2 Configuration’ and ’Monitor-1 Configuration, ’Monitor-2 Configuration’’. With the ’Pro-
gram’ button in the dialog window, the correspondent settings become effective also in the
data windows. The parameter settings change the entries in the data windows.
b) Check parameters within the area ’Hardware Configuration’:
’Installed Monitors’, ’Power’. If need be, select the correct parameter value.
c) Check parameters within the area ’Operational Settings’:
Check or set parameter ’Field Monitoring’ according to the existent configuration. Use the pull−
down menu.
d) Open dialog ’Monitor-1−Configuration’. Check parameters ’Station type’, ’Frequency’ and ’Identi-
fication Morse Code’. Verify that the ’Single Channel Mode’ is set to ’off’. If need be, enter correct
parameter value(s). Repeat this for monitor 2.
e) Open dialog ’TX1−Configuration’. Check parameters ’Station type’, ’Frequency’ and ’Morse
Code’. If need be, enter correct parameter value(s). Repeat this for TX2.
NOTE: The station parameter set in b) or c) of the dialog window ’LRCI−Station Configuration’ can
also be changed in the fashion of d) and e), but this entry has no effect on the entries in the
dialog window. The station parameter entered in the dialog window ’LRCI−Station Configu-
ration’ must match to the settings in d) and e). If not, a mismatch alert may be issued. Verify
this with the indication to MON or TX configuration in the data window ’LRCI−Detailed Status’.
Using MCS:
a) Open dialog in the 1st Equipment Level window by selecting menu item ’Station Configuration’
in menu ’Operation’.
b) Check parameters of station: ’Installed Monitors’, ’Power’, ’Frequency’, ’Station Type’ and ’Morse
Code’.
c) Check or set parameter ’Field Monitoring’ according to the existent configuration.
Finally: Switch both TX off.
REMARK:
In an installation with 8PGC option, the standard alignment procedure may be performed also with
connected 8 PGC monitor dipoles and the dialog or data windows which are used with 8PGC in the
Annex to chapter 4. Depending on the monitor configuration (with or without 8PGC) the dialog or data
windows differ in their contents. It concerns mainly to:
− Data window ’MON1(2)−Configuration’ with 8PGC; it comprises 3 additional items concerning
8PGC: Definition of Main Dipole for MON1 and MON2, 8PGC monitoring executive yes/no
− Dialog ’Alarm Limits’ without 8PGC: Azimuth Alarm Limits for standard field dipole (= dipole1)
− Dialog ’Alarm Limits’ with 8PGC: Azimuth Alarm Limits for dipole1 to 8

Ed. 01.12 4−11

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance
− Dialog ’Calibration’ without 8PGC: AGC Adjust, Digital Attenuation, Cal 30 Hz AM Depth for stan-
dard field dipole (= dipole1, 0.0° in 8PGC)
− Dialog ’Calibration’ with 8PGC: AGC Adjust, Digital Attenuation, Cal 30 Hz AM Depth for 8PGC
dipoles1 to 8 (0.0°,45.0°,..., 315.0°)
Examples of the dialog windows are presented in Fig. 4−2.

Example dialog window ’Alarm Limits’: without 8PGC with 8PGC

Example dialog window ’Calibration’ without 8PGC with 8PGC

(shown values are examples only)

Fig. 4−2 Examples of dialog window ’Alarm Limits’ and dialog window ’Calibration’

4−12 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.3 ANTENNA ALIGNMENT
NOTE: Both SB1, SB2 (or USB, LSB) and SBA, SBB are used as term for sideband signals in
CVOR/DVOR systems. SBA, SBB are used normally for CVOR (signals to dipole A or B),
the terms SB1, SB2 (also USB, LSB) are generally used in other Navaids 400 systems.
The PC user program MCS uses the terms USB, LSB, the user program ADRACS uses
the terms SBA, SBB.

4.3.1 Mechanical Presettings

a) Remove the two antenna radome shells from counterpoise.
b) Loosen the 8 screws at the antenna foot (accessible from inside the shelter) to enable the antenna
to be rotated.
NOTE: Do not remove screws.
c) Set length of dipole slots for correct station frequency according to Fig. 4−3.
d) Set all capacitors (feeding capacitors CF and corner capacitors CC, Fig. 4−5a) of both omnidirec-
tional radiators for station frequency according to Fig. 4−4.

4.3.2 Matching
NOTE: Because two different PC user programs (ADRACS or MCS) can be used, the user pro-
gram−specific actions/procedures are described in detail in the ANNEX ’PC User Pro-
gram−specific Procedures’.

4.3.2.1 Dipole A
a) Arrange following test setup:
Disconnect SBA and SBB feeder cables from antenna and terminate SBB with 50 ohm. Connect
CSB feeder cable via Thruline power meter with dipole−A input. Insert a 10 W probe, set for re-
flected wave measurement, into Thruline power meter.
b) Rotate antenna, so that longitudinal axis of dipole A points into middle of radome openings.
c) Switch TX1 on.
d) Set CSB power to 10 W reading at the power meter: Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, set pa-
rameter ’Carrier Power’.
e) Replace 10 W probe by a 1 W probe and set to reflected position.
f) Set ’SBA Level’ to 0.
g) Set ’SBB Level’ to 0.
h) Adjust all slots of dipole A equally for a minimum reading at the Thruline power meter.
NOTE: Minimum < 0.15 W (> 18 dB matching).
i) Switch TX1 off.

4.3.2.2 Dipole B
Connect CSB feeder cable via Thruline power meter with dipole B and perform matching of dipole
B as described for dipole A in 4.3.2.1.
NOTE: Rotate longitudinal axis of dipole B into radome openings.

Ed. 01.12 4−13

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

4.3.2.3 Lower Radiator (LR)

a) Connect CSB feeder cable via Thruline power meter with LR input of antenna. Terminate UR input
with 50 ohm.
NOTE: SBA and SBB feeder cables remain disconnected and should be terminated with 50 ohm.
b) Switch TX1 on.
c) Tune feeding capacitors CF (both same direction) for a minimum reading at the Thruline power me-
ter.
NOTE: Minimum < 0.15 W (> 18 dB matching).
d) Switch TX1 off.

4.3.2.4 Upper Radiator (UR)

Connect CSB feeder cable via Thruline power meter with UR and perform matching of UR as de-
scribed for LR in 4.3.2.3.

4.3.2.5 Decoupling Dipole A − B

Perform here measurement of section 4.3.6 b) to f). Omit 4.3.6 a), g).

4.3.3 Decoupling and Circular Pattern of LR

4.3.3.1 Decoupling LR − Dipole A
a) Arrange test setup for level calibration according to Fig. 4−6. Connect CSB OUT of cabinet via the
Thruline power meter with 10 W probe and 1 attenuator 10 dB/10 W in series with 3 attenuators
20 dB/1 W using RF measuring cable.
NOTE: Verify that CSB power is 10 W and SBA and SBB feeder cables are still disconnected.
b) Switch TX1 on.
c) Open window* ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, open dialog ’Monitor1
− Calibration’. Set parameter ’AGC Adjust (Calibration AGC Adjustment)’ to ’RF−Level’ indication
of 100 %.
* Without 8PGC option, this window is assigned as ’Monitor1 − Measurement (s/Limits)’.
d) Switch TX1 off.
e) Change test setup according to Fig. 4−7. Connect CSB OUT of cabinet via Thruline power meter
with 1 W probe for reflected wave measurement directly to LR. Connect dipole A via 30 dB attenua-
tor (10 dB + 20 dB) to input of monitor 1. Terminate UR with 50 ohm.
f) Switch TX1 on.
g) Tune for minimum RF−level reading (decoupling) by means of the trimmers located in radiation
direction of dipole A. Minimum reading must be less than 30 %, i.e. decoupling >50 dB.
At the same time watch reflected signal on power meter. If reflected signal increases tune both trim-
mers CF in same direction to keep it below 0.15 W.
NOTE: For decoupling tune trimmers in opposite sense, i.e. one in cw−, the other in ccw−direction. For
measurement of decoupling, the person taking measurements on the counterpoise has to move
into null of dipole.
h) Switch TX1 off.

4−14 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.3.3.2 Decoupling LR − Dipole B
a) Repeat 4.3.3.1a) to d)
b) Connect dipole B via 30 dB attenuator (10 dB + 20 dB) to monitor 1 instead of dipole A.
c) Switch TX1 on.
d) Tune as described in 4.3.3.1g) using trimmers located in radiation direction of dipole B.
e) Switch TX1 off.

4.3.3.3 Circular Pattern of LR

a) Complete the field measuring test setup as follows, see Fig. 4−8:
Set measuring dipole on tripod (height: 2 m) about 50...60 m from VOR shelter and connect it via
RF cable with input of monitor 1.
NOTE: Terminate dipole A and B with 50 ohm
b) Rotate CVOR antenna so that CF points in direction of measuring dipole.
c) Switch TX1 on.
d) Set CSB power to nominal value (50 W or 100 W): Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, set parame-
ter ’Carrier Power’.
e) Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, read ’RF−Level’ (of mea-
suring dipole).
f) Open dialog ’Monitor1 − Calibration’, set parameter ’AGC Adjust (Calibration AGC Adjustment)’
to ’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %. If necessary, activate additional attenuation at the monitor input:
set parameter ’Digital Attenuation’ from 0 to 16 dB.
g) Rotate antenna slowly one turn (±90° min.). Reading must not change more than ±4 %, otherwise
correct settings of both CC according to Fig. 4−5. If settings of CC had to be changed, then correct
CF the same amount in opposite direction (from CC) for min. reflection (< 0.8 W).
NOTE: Tune both CC equally (same direction) and then both CF equally (in opposite direction).
If corrections were necessary in 4.3.3.3g), repeat 4.3.3 until the required values for decoupling,
circular pattern and matching are achieved.
h) Reset parameter ’Carrier Power’ in dialog ’TX1−Adjustments’ to 10 W.
i) Switch TX1 off.

4.3.4 Decoupling and Circular Pattern of UR

Perform for UR as described for LR in 4.3.3.
4.3.5 Fine Matching of Omnidirectional Radiator
4.3.5.1 LR
a) Arrange following test setup:
Close radome provisionally. Connect CSB OUT of cabinet via Thruline power meter with 1 W probe
(for reflected wave measurement) to input of LR matcher. Output of LR matcher must be connected
to LR. Terminate UR with 50 ohm.
NOTE: CSB should be 10 W at first.
b) Switch TX1 on.
c) Alternately adjust C1 and C2 of LR matcher for minimum reflection on Thruline power meter.

Ed. 01.12 4−15

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance
d) Set CSB Power to nominal value: Open dialog ’TX1 − Adjustments’, set parameter ’Carrier Power’.
e) Repeat matching (see c)) until reflected power is less than 0.05 W.
NOTE: Matching
30 dB.
f) Reset CSB power to 10 W: Set parameter ’Carrier Power’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’.
g) Switch TX1 off.

4.3.5.2 UR
Change CSB feeder cable via Thruline power meter to UR matcher and perform matching of UR
matcher as described for LR matcher in 4.3.5.1.
NOTE: Output of UR matcher must be connected normally with UR.

4.3.5.3 Matching Device Input

a) Complete cabling between CSB OUT of cabinet, Matching Device, LR and UR normally, but insert
Thruline power meter with 1 W probe for reflected wave measurement at input of Matching Device.
b) Switch TX1 on.
c) Set CSB power to nominal value: Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, set parameter ’Carrier
Power’.
d) Reflected power must be < 0.8 W resp. 1.6 W, otherwise check matching of individual matchers
again (4.3.5.1 and 4.3.5.2) and check cabling.
NOTE: Matching >16 dB. In 100 W system use 10 W probe if necessary.
e) Reset CSB power to 10 W: Set parameter ’Carrier Power’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’.
f) Switch TX1 off.
g) Remove Thruline power meter from CSB supply cable.

4.3.6 Decoupling Dipole A − B

a) Repeat 4.3.3.1a) to d).
b) Connect CSB OUT of cabinet via cable directly with dipole B.
NOTE: Verify that CSB power is 10 W.
c) Connect dipole A via 30 dB attenuator to input of monitor 1.
d) Switch TX1 on.
e) Reading must be less than 50 %. Otherwise dipole plates of antenna have to be adjusted
(nominal 90°).
NOTE: Measure with provisionally closed radome. Nominal decoupling >45 dB.
f) Switch TX1 off.
g) Close antenna radome properly again.

4−16 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.4 RF−PHASING OF OMNIDIRECTIONAL RADIATOR LR − UR
4.4.1 Test Setup
a) Connect all RF cables between cabinet outputs, matching device and antenna normally.
b) Rotate the antenna so that field−strength maximum of dipole A points to the measuring dipole in
the field.
NOTE: Verify that the measuring dipole is still connected to monitor 1.

4.4.2 RF Phasing of UR − Dipole A

4.4.2.1 TX1
a) Terminate LR output of coupler in matching device with 50 ohm/10 W and input of LR matcher with
50 ohm/1 W.
NOTE: UR is radiating.
b) Switch TX1 on.
c) Set CSB power to 10 W: Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, set parameter ’Carrier Power’.
d) Set ’SBA Level’ to 10 %.
e) Set ’SBB Level’ to 0.
f) Open dialog ’Monitor1−Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, open dialog ’Monitor1 −
Calibration’. Set parameter ’AGC Adjust (Calibration AGC Adjustment)’ to ’RF−Level’ indication
of 100 %.
g) If the RF phasing of UR − Dipole A has to be done a second time, continue with i) to j) and then
with 4.4.3.
h) Set SBA phase so that 30 Hz modulation depth becomes a minimum: Open window ’Monitor1 −
Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, read parameter ’30 Hz AM Depth’; open window ’TX1
− Adjustments’, set parameter ’SBA Phase’. Change SBA Phase by 90° and note down ’Azimuth’
reading in window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’.
Set SBA phase back to quadrature as before. The next point is j).
i) Set 30 Hz modulation depth again to minimum by means of phasing pieces at the input of UR.
j) Switch TX1 off.
4.4.3 RF Phasing of LR − Dipole A
a) Connect LR path inside matching device normally, but with additional inserted 55°−cable.
NOTE: The phasing is performed in a finite distance (e.g. 50 to 60 m) and a fixed height of 2 m using the
standard shelter dimensions of 5 m CP diameter and 2.5 m height. In a distance of 50 m a differen-
tial phase of −40° has been measured bettween UR and LR. To get an equiphase condition at this
nearfield point the temporary cable of 55° (40°+15°) has to be inserted into the LR feed line of
the complete network.
b) Terminate UR output of coupler in matching device with 50 ohm/10 W and input of UR matcher with
50 ohm/1 W.
NOTE: LR is radiating.
c) Switch TX1 on.
d) Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main(s/Limits)’, open dialog ’Monitor1 − Calibration’. Set
parameter ’AGC Adjust (Calibration AGC Adjustment)’ to ’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %.

Ed. 01.12 4−17

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance
e) Set 30 Hz modulation depth again to minimum by means of phasing pieces at the input of LR
matcher. If this is possible, continue with point g).
If phasing pieces have to be inserted into the SBA dipole, continue with point f).
f) Set SBA phase so that 30 Hz modulation depth becomes a minimum: Open window ’Monitor1 −
Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, read parameter ’30 Hz AM Depth’; open window ’TX1
− Adjustments’, set parameter ’SBA Phase’.
g) Change SBA phase by 90° and check that ’Azimuth’ reading in window ’Monitor1 − Measurement
Main (Measurements/Limits)’ is the same (±1°) as in 4.4.2.1h).
If approx. 180° different continue with j).
h) Switch TX1 off. Remove 55°−cable, but leave added phasing pieces at the input of LR matcher.
If SBA phase had to be changed in point f), start again with 4.4.2.
i) Reconnect UR path inside matching device normally again, but including possibly added phasing
pieces. Continue with 4.5.

NOTE: The following steps should normally not be necessary. They are performed, if there is a 180°
difference in step g). This ensures a correct rotation sense of the antenna.
j) Swap feeder cable from power divider J3 to matcher of LR with cable (+105°) from power divider
J2 to matcher of UR, but leave 55°−cable in LR path.
k) Shorten cable (105°) in order to achieve minimum 30 Hz modulation (approx. 200 mm).
l) Remove 55°−cable.

4−18 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.5 CHECK OF MONITORS (OPTIONAL)
REMARK: Normally it is not necessary to perform this check for the first alignment procedure. The built−in
test generator on the CSL can be used for validation of monitors if there is a problem or an as-
sumption of a fault. Before performing the check verify position of jumper X17: open = D/CVOR.

4.5.1 Preparations
a) Switch TX1 on.
b) Set test generator with BCD switch S6 (front of CSL) to position 0.
c) Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement TSG’. Reading ’TSG Level (Signal Level)’: 100 % ±1%.

4.5.2 Monitor 1
4.5.2.1 30 Hz AM Modulation Depth
a) Reading ’TSG 30 Hz AM Depth (30 Hz AM Depth)’: 30 % ±1 %.
b) Set test generator to position 8: ’TSG 30 Hz AM Depth (30 Hz AM Depth)’ has to be 0 %.
c) Set test generator to position 0.
4.5.2.2 9960 Hz Modulation Depth
a) Reading ’TSG 9960Hz AM Depth (9960 Hz AM Depth)’: 30 % ±1%.
b) Set test generator to pos. 9: ’TSG 9960 Hz AM Depth (9960 Hz AM Depth)’ has to be 0 %.

c) Set test generator to position 0.

4.5.2.3 30 Hz FM Modulation Index
a) Reading ’TSG FM Index (FM Index)’: 16 ±0.5.
b) Set test generator to position A: ’TSG FM Index (FM Index)’ has to be 15.
Set test generator to position B: ’TSG FM Index (FM Index)’ has to be 17.
Set test generator to position C: ’TSG FM Index (FM Index)’ has to be 25.
c) Set test generator to position 0.
4.5.2.4 Azimuth
a) Reading ’TSG Azimuth (Azimuth)’: indication of 0° ±0.5°.
b) Set test generator to position 0: ’TSG Azimuth (Azimuth)’ has to be 0°.
Set test generator to position 1: ’TSG Azimuth (Azimuth)’ has to be 45°.
Set test generator to position 2: ’TSG Azimuth (Azimuth)’ has to be 90°.
Set test generator to position 3: ’TSG Azimuth (Azimuth)’ has to be 135°.
Set test generator to position 4: ’TSG Azimuth (Azimuth)’ has to be 180°.
Set test generator to position 5: ’TSG Azimuth (Azimuth)’ has to be 225°.
Set test generator to position 6: ’TSG Azimuth (Azimuth)’ has to be 270°.
Set test generator to position 7: ’TSG Azimuth (Azimuth)’ has to be 315°.
c) Set test generator to position 0.
4.5.3 Monitor 2
Repeat 4.5.2 for Monitor 2; after that, switch both TX off.

Ed. 01.12 4−19

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

4−20 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.6 SETTING OF TRANSMITTERS AND MONITORS
REMARK: For the following 4.6.1 and 4.6.2, the measuring dipole must still be connected to Moni-
tor1. The CVOR antenna must be rotatable. See Section 4.4.1.
4.6.1 Adjustment of Carrier Power TX1/TX2
a) Connect the Thruline power meter to the CSB output.
b) Switch TX1 on.
c) Set the CSB power to nominal value: Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, set parameter ’Carrier
Power’.
d) Measure the power.
NOTE: If there is a difference between the nominal power and the measured power (more than 10 % below
nominal value), adjust the power with R1 of the corresponding Control Coupler (CCP−V), see Fig.
4−12 (BP−T, X16). Priority of the setting should be to achieve identical values of both transmitters.
e) Switch TX2 on.
f) Set TX2 on aerial.
g) Set the CSB power to nominal value: Open window ’TX2 − Adjustments’, set parameter ’Carrier
Power’.
h) Repeat adjustment d) for TX2. Adjustment at the corresponding Control Coupler with R1.
i) Set TX1 on aerial.
j) Switch both TX off.

4.6.2 RF−Phasing (SBA/SBB to CSB), 30 Hz AM and Sense of Rotation of TX1

4.6.2.1 Preparations
a) Switch TX1 on.
b) Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, open dialog ’Monitor1 −
Calibration’. Set parameter ’AGC Adjust (Calibration AGC Adjustment)’ to ’RF−Level’ indication
of 100 %.
c) Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, set parameter ’SBA Level’ to 0 and disconnect the feeder
cable from dipole A.
d) Set ’SBB Level’ to 50 %.
e) Rotate the antenna for maximum ’30 Hz AM Depth’ reading. The reading must be > 20 %. If not,
change RF phase: Change parameter ’SBB Phase’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359
f) Rotate the antenna for minimum reading.
NOTE: Range of value: < 1 %
g) Set ’SBB Level’ to 0 and disconnect the feeder cable from dipole B.

4.6.2.2 RF Phasing (SBA to CSB) and 30 Hz Modulation Depth Setting

a) Connect the feeder cable to dipole A and set SBA to 50 %.
b) Set SBA phase in order to get a 30 Hz mod. depth minimum: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measure-
ment Main (Measurements/Limits)’, read parameter ’30 Hz AM Depth’. Open window ’TX1 − Ad-
justments’, set parameter ’SBA Phase’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.

Ed. 01.12 4−21

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance
c) Add or subtract 90 to the value found in b) and enter new value.
NOTE: Note value.
d) Set parameter ’SBA Level’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ so, that 30 Hz modulation depth be-
comes 30.0 %.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...99.9. Note value .
e) Rotate antenna for 30 Hz modulation depth minimum.
NOTE: Range of values:  1 %
f) Set parameter ’SBA Level’ to 00.0 % and disconnect feeder cable at dipole A.
4.6.2.3 RF Phasing (SBB to CSB) and 30 Hz Modulation Depth Setting
a) Reconnect feeder cable to dipole B and set SBB power to 50 %: Open window ’TX1 − Adjust-
ments’, set parameter ’SBB Level’.
b) Set SBB phase in order to get a 30 Hz modulation depth minimum: Open window ’Monitor1 − Mea-
surement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, read parameter ’30 Hz AM Depth’. Set parameter ’SBB
Phase’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.
c) Add or subtract 90 to the value found in b) and enter new value.
NOTE: Note value.
d) Set parameter ’SBB Level’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ so, that ’30 Hz AM Depth’ in window
’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’ becomes 30.0 %.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...99.9. Note value.
e) Reconnect feeder cable to dipole A and set ’SBA Level’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ to the
noted value again.
4.6.2.4 Check of Sense of Rotation
a) Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, open window ’TX1 − Ad-
justments’. Set parameter ’9960Hz AM Depth’ to an indication of 30 % for ’9960Hz AM Depth’.
b) Set parameter ’Modulation Index (FM Index)’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ to a ’FM Index’ indica-
tion of 16.
c) Rotate the antenna a few degrees counterclockwise (as seen from above) and check that parame-
ter ’Azimuth’ in window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’ increases. If ’Azi-
muth’ decreases, add or subtract 180° to/from the parameter ’SBA Phase’ in ’TX1 − Adjustments’.
NOTE: Note down new value.

4.6.3 RF Phasing (SBA/SBB to CSB), 30 Hz AM and Sense of Rotation of TX2

Perform for TX2 as described for TX1 in section 4.6.2. Then remove measuring dipole.
NOTE: Switch TX1 off and switch TX2 on.

4.6.4 Setting of TX1 and Monitor 1

4.6.4.1 Preparation
a) Rotate antenna so, that each dipole (A and B) has an angle of 45° to the monitor dipole, then se-
cure antenna by screws again, see Fig. 4−11.
b) Connect monitor field dipole(s) normally to the cabinet inputs MONITOR 1 and MONITOR 2.
c) Switch TX1 on.

4−22 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.6.4.2 RF Level Monitor 1
a) Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. Open dialog ’Monitor1 −
Calibration’. Set parameter ’AGC Adjust (Calibration AGC Adjustment)’ to ’RF−Level’ indication
of 100 %.

4.6.4.3 30 Hz Modulation Depth Monitor 1

a) Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. Open window ’TX1 − Ad-
justments’. Set ’SB Level Multiplier’ so, that ’30 Hz AM Depth’ indication becomes 30.0 %.
NOTE: 80...120 Factor= 30 % x 100 %/reading above.

4.6.4.4 Subcarrier TX1 (9960Hz AM Depth, FM Index)

a) Set ’9960Hz AM Depth’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ so, that ’9960Hz AM Depth’ indication in
window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’ becomes 30 %.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.8.
b) Set ’Modulation Index (FM Index)’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ so, that ’FM Index’ indication
in dialog ’Monitor1−Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’ becomes 16.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...25.0.

4.6.4.5 Azimuth TX1

a) Set ’Azimuth Alignment’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, to obtain an ’Azimuth’ reading in window
’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’ equal to monitor dipole location (e.g. 0.00
for North).
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9.

4.6.4.6 Identity and Voice

a) Set ’1020Hz AM Depth’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ to e.g. 10 %.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...20.0.
b) If applicable, set ’Voice AM Depth (Voice Modulation Depth)’ to e.g. 20 %.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...40.0.
c) Switch TX1 off.
4.6.5 Setting of TX2 with Monitor 1
4.6.5.1 Control of TX2 with Monitor 1
a) Switch TX2 on.
b) Set TX2 on aerial.
c) Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’.
d) Check ’RF−Level’.
NOTE: Nominal value: 100.0 % (± 5.0%).
e) Check ’30 Hz AM Depth’.
NOTE: Nominal value: 30.0 % (± 1.0 %).

4.6.5.2 Subcarrier, Azimuth, Identity and Voice

Set subcarrier, azimuth, identity and voice of TX2 in the same way as described for TX1 in 4.6.4.4 to
4.6.4.6. Continue use of monitor 1.

Ed. 01.12 4−23

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

4.6.6 Setting and Check of Monitor 2

4.6.6.1 Monitor 2 with TX1 on Aerial
NOTE: TX2 is radiating.
Switch TX1 on. Set TX1 on aerial.
a) RF level
Open window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. Open dialog ’Monitor2 −
Calibration’. Set parameter ’AGC Adjust (Calibration AGC Adjustment)’ to ’RF−Level’ indication
of 100 %.
b) 30 Hz AM Depth
Set parameter ’Cal 30Hz AM Depth (Calibration 30 Hz AM Depth)’ in ’Monitor2 − Calibration’ so,
that ’30 Hz AM Depth’ indication in ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’ be-
comes 30 %.
NOTE: Range of values: 50...200.0.
c) Subcarrier, 9960Hz AM Depth
Check ’9960Hz AM Depth’ in ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. If indication
is out of tolerance, use calibration factor ’Cal 9960Hz AM Depth (Calibration 9960Hz AM Depth)’
in dialog ’Monitor2 − Calibration’.
NOTE: Nominal value 30.0 % (±1.0 %).
d) Subcarrier, FM Index
Check ’FM Index’ in ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. If indication is out
of tolerance, use calibration factor ’Cal FM Index (Calibration FM Index)’ in ’Monitor2 − Calibra-
tion’.
NOTE: Nominal value 16.0 (±0.5)
e) Azimuth
Check ’Azimuth’ in ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. If indication is out of
tolerance, use ’Cal Azimuth Monitor (Calibration Azimuth)’ in dialog ’Monitor2 − Calibration’.
NOTE: Nominal value: same as in 4.6.4.5 (±0.2)
f) Identity
Check ’1020 AM Depth’ in ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. If indication
is out of tolerance, use ’Cal 1020 Hz AM Depth’ in dialog ’Monitor2 − Calibration’.
NOTE: Nominal value: same as in 4.6.4.6 a).
g) Switch TX1 off.
4.6.6.2 Monitor 2 with TX2 on Aerial
a) Switch TX2 on.
b) Set TX2 on aerial.
c) Open window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. Check following Monitor2
indications:
ca) ’RF−Level (RF Level)’
cb) ’30 Hz AM Depth’
cc), ’9960Hz AM Depth’
cd) ’FM Index’
ce) ’Azimuth’
NOTE: Nominal values: ca) 100.0 % (±5.0 %) cd) 16.0 (±0.5)
cb) 30.0 % (±1.0 %) ce) same as in 4.6.4.5 (±0.2)
cc) 30.0 % (±1.0 %)
d) Switch TX2 off.

4−24 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.7 GROUND CHECK
4.7.1 Preparation of Monitor 2
a) Switch TX1 on.
b) Open dialog ’Monitor2−Calibration’. Read and note down AGC value of parameter ’AGC Adjust
(Calibration AGC Adjustment)’ and setting of ’Digital Attenuation’.
NOTE: Important for 4.7.4b)
c) Read and note down Azimuth Offset value, parameter ’Cal Azimuth Monitor (Calibration Azimuth)’.
NOTE: Important for 4.7.4c)
4.7.2 Error Curve TX1
NOTE: TX1 is radiating. Use the same Monitor (e.g. 2) for Ground Check procedure with TX1 and TX2.
a) Hang portable monitor dipole in 0°−position at the counterpoise edge. The position is marked on
the lower side of the counterpoise. Connect the cable of portable dipole to input of monitor 2.
NOTE: Terminate disconnected cable at monitor 2 input with 50 ohm.
b) Calibrate parameters ’RF−Level’ and ’Azimuth’ for the portable monitor dipole: Open window
’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. Open dialog ’Monitor2 − Calibration’.
Set parameter ’AGC Adjust (Calibration AGC Adjustment)’ to ’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %.
Set value of ’Cal Azimuth Monitor (Calibration Azimuth)’ in dialog ’Monitor2 − Calibration’ so, that
the indication of ’Azimuth’ is 0.0° in ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’.
NOTE: Calibration Range: 355.1...4.9. Azimuth 0.0° is only valid, if 0° conforms to shelters north direction.
c) Record Azimuth reading on a test sheet as 1st value (see example below).
d) Hang portable monitor dipole in 20°−position (or 22.5°−position) at the counterpoise edge. The
position is marked on the lower side of the counterpoise. Record Azimuth reading as 2nd value.
e) Continue this way until all 18 (or 16) measuring values have been recorded. The measured values
have to increment in steps of 20°. Differences to these nominal values have to be considered as
an error. The error spread should be < ±2°.
The following table is an example of a test sheet for error curve measuring results (in 20° steps):
M. Dip. Pos. [°] 360/0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340
reading TX1 [°]
reading TX2 [°]

Depending on counterpoise position marks, the error curve measurement may be also in 22.5°steps:
M. Dip. Pos. [°] 360/0 22.5 45 67.5 90 112.5 135 157.5 180 202.5 225 247.5 270 292.5 315 337.5
reading TX1 [°]
reading TX1 [°]

4.7.3 Error Curve TX2

NOTE: TX2 is radiating. Use the same Monitor (e.g. 2) for Ground Check procedure with TX1 and TX2.
Perform the error curve check for TX2 in the same way as described for TX1 in 4.7.1.
4.7.4 Reset of Monitor 2
a) Connect monitor 2 input to fixed field monitor dipole normally again.
b) Key in AGC value (parameter ’AGC Adjust’) as noted in 4.7.1b) again.
NOTE: Verify that RF level reading is 100 % again. Check setting of ’Digital attenuation’.
c) Key in Azimuth Offset (parameter ’Cal Azimuth Monitor’) as noted in 4.7.1c) again.

Ed. 01.12 4−25

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

4.8 SETTING OF MONITOR ALARM LIMITS

4.8.1 Monitor 1
Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurements Main (Measurements/Limits)’, and open additionally in
ADRACS dialog ’Monitor1 − Alarm Limits’.
4.8.1.1 Azimuth
a) Select ’Azimuth’ reading in ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, equal to azi-
muth value of main monitor dipole 1.
b) Upper limit: Add 1.0° to ’Azimuth’ reading and key in this value in ’Azimuth Alarm Limits’
as ’UL’ for ’Dipole 1’.
c) Lower limit: Subtract 1.0° from ’Azimuth’ reading and key in this value in ’Azimuth Alarm Limits’
as ’LL’ for ’Dipole 1’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9; if during flight check azimuth of transmitters has to be changed, these
azimuth alarm limits have to be readjusted.
4.8.1.2 RF−Level
a) Upper limit of ’RF Level’, e.g. 129 %
b) Lower limit of ’RF Level’, e.g. 71 %
NOTE: Range of values: Upper Limit 100...150, Lower Limit 50...100
4.8.1.3 Distortion 9960 Hz
a) Upper limit of ’9960Hz Distortion’, e.g. 5.0 %
b) Lower limit of ’9960Hz Distortion’, e.g. 0.0 %
4.8.1.4 30 Hz AM Signal
a) Upper limit of ’30Hz AM’, e.g. 34.5 %
b) Lower limit of ’30Hz AM’, e.g. 25.5 %
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.9
4.8.1.5 9960 Hz Signal
a) Upper limit of ’9960Hz AM’, e.g. 34.5 %
b) Lower limit of ’9960Hz AM’, e.g. 25.5 %
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.9
4.8.1.6 30 Hz FM Signal
a) Upper limit of ’FM Index’, e.g. 17
b) Lower limit of ’FM Index’, e.g. 15
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.9
4.8.1.7 Identity AM Signal
a) Upper limit of ’1020 Hz AM’, e.g. 12 %
b) Lower limit of ’1020 Hz AM’, e.g. 8.0 %
4.8.1.8 Distortion 30 Hz FM
a) Upper Limit of ’30 Hz FM Distortion ’, e.g. 3.0 %

4−26 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.8.1.9 Carrier Frequency Difference
a) Upper limit of ’Frequency Delta’, e.g. 2400 Hz
b) Lower limit of ’Frequency Delta’, e.g. 2400 Hz

4.8.1.10 Alarm Delay

a) Set parameter ’Alarm Delay (Time)’ to e.g. 20 s
NOTE: Range of values: 2...255

4.8.2 Monitor 2
Set alarm limits for Monitor 2 in the same way as described for Monitor 1 in Section 4.8.1.

4.9 BATTERY MONITORING

NOTE: The floating battery must be installed and connected. In dialog ’LRCI − Environmental
Setup’, the parameter ’Battery’ (under ’Monitoring’) must be enabled. Thus, inputs in
’Installed Battery Capacity (Installed Battery Rated Capacity)’ are possible.
a) Enter installed battery capacity. Open dialog ’LRCI − Environmental Setup’, set parameter
’Installed Battery Capacity (Installed Battery Rated Capacity)’.
b) When the battery is fully charged, open main menu ’Commands’, select command ’More Com-
mands...’ . Next the dialog window ’Commands’ appears. Then select command ’LRCI Com-
mands’ in menu ’LRCI’.
c) Select command ’Set actual battery capacity’ and click button ’program LRCI’. Data window ’Bat-
tery Capacity’ appears. In the entry field ’Actual battery capacity’, the value of step (a) will appear
after a few seconds.
d) Click button ’Program’ and button ’Close’ to shut down this data window. Click button ’Close’ to
shut down dialog window ’Commands’.
NOTE: Divide ’Installed Capacity’ by 500 Ah. The battery is fully charged, when ’battery current’ indi-
cates this value.
e) Check alarm limits (UL and LL) for battery half voltage, battery full voltage and battery current.

Ed. 01.12 4−27

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

4.10 NORMAL OPERATION

4.10.1 Prerequisites
a) Equipment has been aligned according to 4.2 to 4.8.
b) Mains and DC supply are switched on and PC login procedure has been executed.
c) Carry out 4.10.2 for TX1 as Main or alternatively 4.10.3 for TX2 as Main.

4.10.2 TX1 Main

a) Switch TX1 on. Set TX1 on aerial.
b) Check that no Monitor Alarm or BITE Warning is on, otherwise click on the ’Bite Warning’ (’BIT
Warning’) field of subsystem ’Transmitter 1’ (’TX−1’) to get the list of BITE warnings and alarms.
NOTE: Allow system approx. 30 s for initialization.
c) Set all Monitor Bypass off.
d) Simulate monitor 1 and 2 alarm by e.g. disconnecting monitor inputs and check that after selected
alarm delay TX1 is switched off and TX2 is switched on. Remove monitor alarm conditions immedi-
ately after change over.
e) Check that no Monitor Alarm or BITE Warning is on. Otherwise click on the ’Bite Warning’ (’BIT
Warning’) of subsystem ’Transmitter 2’ (’TX−2’) to get the list of BITE warnings and alarms. Locate
and eliminate fault.
f) Simulate monitor alarms again and check that after the selected alarm delay TX2 is switched off.
Afterwards remove alarm conditions again.
NOTE: Both TX must be off now.
g) Switch TX1 on.
h) Set all Monitor Bypass off.
NOTE: Check that NORMAL indication is on.

4.10.3 TX2 Main

Carry out 4.10.2 for TX2.

4−28 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.11 FLIGHT−CHECK
The following describes a standard flight−check−procedure. However range and sequence of this
procedure may vary depending on the individual flight check crew.
4.11.1 Prerequisites
a) System has been out of operation:
aa) Switch on all AC/DC−Converter
ab) Switch on fuse switches of batteries
ac) Switch on switches TX1, TX2 and NAV on PMM
ad) Switch both TX on.
b) System has been in NORMAL operation: Set all MONITOR BYPASS on.

4.11.2 Correction of TX1 and Monitor 1

NOTE: TX1 must be on "AERIAL", and both "MONITOR BYPASS" must be "ON". PC is connected.

4.11.2.1 30 Hz AM Modulation Depth

a) Check 30 Hz mod. depth indication: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measure-
ments/Limits)’, check parameter ’30 Hz AM Depth’.
b) Change desired 30 Hz modulation depth with SBA/SBB−multiplier: Open window ’TX1 − Adjust-
ments’, set parameter ’SB Level Multiplier’.
NOTE: 80.0...120.0 = 30 % x 100 %/announcement of Flight Check Engineer.
c) Recalibrate 30 Hz AM modulation depth for 30 %: Open dialog ’Monitor1 − Calibration’, set param-
eter ’Cal 30 Hz AM Depth (Calibration 30 Hz AM Depth)’.
NOTE: Range of values: 50.0...200.0.

4.11.2.2 9960 Hz Modulation Depth

a) Check 9960 Hz modulation depth indication: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Mea-
surements/Limits)’, check parameter ’9960Hz AM Depth’.
b) Change 9960 Hz modulation depth for desired value: Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, set pa-
rameter ’9960Hz AM Depth’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.8.
c) Recalibrate 9960 Hz modulation depth for 30 %: Open dialog ’Monitor1 − Calibration’, set parame-
ter ’Cal 9960Hz AM Depth (Calibration 9960Hz AM Depth)’.
NOTE: Range of values: 50.0...200.0.

4.11.2.3 30 Hz FM Modulation Index

a) Check 30 Hz FM modulation index indication: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Mea-
surements/Limits)’, check parameter ’FM Index’.
b) Change 30 Hz FM modulation index for desired value: Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, set pa-
rameter ’Modulation Index (FM Index)’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...25.0.
c) Recalibrate 30 Hz FM modulation index for 16.0: Open dialog ’Monitor1 − Calibration’, set parame-
ter ’Cal FM Index (Calibration FM Index)’.
NOTE: Range of values: 50...200.

Ed. 01.12 4−29

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

4.11.2.4 Azimuth
a) Check Azimuth indication: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’,
check parameter ’Azimuth’.
b) Change azimuth for desired value according to announcement of Flight Check Engineer: Open
window ’TX1−Adjustments’, change parameter ’Azimuth Alignment’. Record ’Azimuth’ indication
in window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9. Note new value.
c) Add 1.0° to ’Azimuth’ indication and key in this value as upper limit (UL); with ADRACS: open win-
dow ’Monitor1 − Alarm limits’.
d) Subtract 1.0° from ’Azimuth’ indication and key in this value as lower limit (LL).

4.11.2.5 Identity Modulation Depth

a) Check Identity modulation depth indication: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Mea-
surements/Limits)’. Check parameter ’1020 AM Depth’.
b) Change Identity modulation depth for desired value according to announcement of Flight Check
Engineer: Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, change parameter ’1020 AM Depth’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...20.0.
c) Add 2 % to indication and key in this value as upper limit (UL); with ADRACS: open dialog ’Monitor1
− Alarm limits’.
d) Subtract 2 % from indication and key in this value as lower limit (LL); with ADRACS: open dialog
’Monitor1 − Alarm limits’.

4.11.2.6 Voice Modulation Depth

Change voice modulation depth for desired value according to announcement of Flight Check Engi-
neer: Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, change parameter ’Voice AM Depth (Voice Modulation
Depth)’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.8.

4.11.3 Correction of TX2 and Monitor 2

Correct TX2 in the same way as described for TX1 in 4.11.2, however set the 30 Hz AM and 9960 Hz
mod. depth, 30 Hz FM mod. index, azimuth, identity and voice mod. depth of TX2 in order to get the
same monitor indications as for TX1. Afterwards the settings of TX2 have to be confirmed by flight
check.
NOTE: Switch TX1 off and then switch TX2 on. Verify that both MONITOR BYPASS are on.

4.11.4 Adjustment of Monitor 2 with TX1/2

Correct monitor 2 in the same way as described for monitor 1 in 4.11.2, but 4.11.2.1 to 4.11.2.4 without
b). Omit 4.11.2.6.

4.11.5 Check of Monitor Alarm Limits

a) The monitor alarm limits can be checked either by means of TX1 or TX2. The following describes
this check by means of TX1.
b) Change of alarm limits − if necessary − can be carried out as described in Section 4.8.

4−30 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
4.11.5.1 Azimuth Alarm
a) Check azimuth indication: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’
and window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. Check parameter ’Azimuth’.
b) Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, note value of parameter ’Azimuth Alignment’.
c) Upper limit:
Change noted azimuth value by approx. +1° until both monitors alarm.
d) Lower limit:
Change noted azimuth value by approx. −1° until both monitors alarm.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9.
e) After check by Flight Check Engineer, key in noted azimuth value again, see b).
4.11.5.2 30 Hz AM Modulation Depth Alarm
a) Check 30 Hz AM modulation depth indication: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main
(Measurements/Limits)’ and window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’.
Check parameter ’30 Hz AM Depth’.
b) Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, note value of parameter ’SB Level Multiplier’.
c) Reduce 30 Hz modulation depth with parameter ’SB Level Multiplier’ by approx. 15 % until both
monitors alarm.
NOTE: 80.0...120. = Alarm Limit x 100 % / Indication.
d) After check by Flight Check Engineer, key in noted down ’SB Level Multiplier’ value again, see b).

4.11.5.3 9960 Hz Modulation Depth Alarm

a) Check 9960 Hz modulation depth indication: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main (Mea-
surements/Limits)’ and window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’. Check
parameter ’9960Hz AM Depth’.
b) Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’, note value of parameter ’9960Hz AM Depth’.
c) Reduce noted value by approx. 15 % until both monitors alarm.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.8.
d) Upon completion of check, key in noted value of parameter ’9960Hz AM Depth’ again, see b).
4.11.6 Normal Operation
a) Set TX1 on aerial or Set TX2 on aerial
b) Switch (Standby) TX2 off or Switch (Standby) TX1 off.
c) Set all Monitor Bypass off.
d) Switch to REMOTE with key−lock switch on the Local Control Interface.
NOTE: The data recorded during the flight test is the only data which is binding for operation of a navigation
installation. A documentation is performed by the printer of the connected PC or in a file for the
transmitter data and monitor data on the PC (.lda). The first data so−obtained of the basic adjust-
ments of the alignment procedure at commissioning and flight check should be recorded and
stored in a reference file or on a floppy disk.

Ed. 01.12 4−31

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

Dipole slot length [cm]

30

20

10

108 110 112 114 116 118 f [MHz]

Fig. 4−3 Dipole slot length of CVOR antenna as a function of frequency

4−32 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure

a) Trimmer (34−pitch, Voltronics QM10G)

25

20
Number of rotations

15 Feeding
capacitor (UR)

Feeding
capacitor (LR)

10 Corner
capacitor (LR)
Corner
capacitor (UR)

0
107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119
[MHz]
b) Trimmer (24−pitch, Stettner SQU110)
not longer used

15
Number of rotations

Feeding
capacitor (UR)
10

5 Feeding
capacitor (LR)
Corner
capacitor (LR)

Corner
2 capacitor (UR)


NOTE:
Piston fully turned out to stop=
minimum capacitance 108 110 112 114 116 118 [MHz]

Fig. 4−4 Adjustment of the omnidirectional radiator capacitors as a function of the frequency

Ed. 01.12 4−33

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

CF
a) Position of trimmer capacitors

CC CC

Feeding points

CF

Measuring dipol

CF Ideal circular pattern

Measured pattern

CC CC

see A

see B

CF

A per +1 % deviation: Turn CC −1/2 turn (ccw) and turn CF +1/2 turn (cw)*

B per −1 % deviation: Turn CC +1/2 turn (cw) and turn CF −1/2 turn (ccw)*

* Set CF finally for min.reflection

Fig. 4−5 Alignment of circular pattern for LR and UR

4−34 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure

Power meter
A B
CSB output
(10 W) CSB−OUT

CVOR cabinet Probe: 10 W

MON−1
MSP 1
Adapter

D C

20 dB/ 1 W 20 dB/1 W 20 dB/1 W 10 dB/10 W

A, B, C, D: RF measuring cable

Fig. 4−6 Monitor calibration for measurement of isolation

UR

50 ohm

(Dipole B)

Dipole A
Power meter
Decoupling

A B
CSB output
(10 W) CSB−OUT

Probe: 1 W
CVOR cabinet
LR

MON−1
MSP 1
LR

SBA
D (SBB)
C
20 dB/1 W 10 dB/10 W

NOTE: Test assembly for measurement of LR −−− dipole A (dipole B)

Test assembly for measurement of UR −−− dipole A (dipole B) corresponding A, B, C, D: RF measuring cable

Fig. 4−7 Measurement of isolation

Ed. 01.12 4−35

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance
Measuring distance 50...60 m
NOTE:
The measurement is based on standard counterpoise di- Measuring
mensions with 5 m diameter and 2.5 m height. The di- dipole
mensions may differ (e.g. 5...6 m diameter and 2.5...3 m
height) without significant changes in results. Omnidirectional
radiator

Height measuring dipole: 2 m

LR (UR) SBA SBB

B
Power meter
A 50 ohm 50 ohm
CSB output
CSB−OUT

CVOR cabinet

MON−1 60 m cable
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
MSP 1 Attenuator

LR: 0 dB
UR: 20 dB A, B: RF measuring cables

Fig. 4−8 Measurement of circular pattern of omnidirectional radiators

CVOR cabinet
Mon. 1

Mon. 2
CSB OUT SB1 OUT SB2 OUT
*) *)
*) *)

50 ohm
Attenuator Attenuator Dummy load
100 W 10 W 10 W
−30 dB −30 dB

*) *)
*)
3 dB coupler

20 dB

20 dB

*) measuring cable

Fig. 4−9 Simulator test setup with individual components (1)

4−36 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure

(D)VOR (D)VOR
ETX−CPU COM4
SB1
LGM1 Local PC ASU−CONTROL DIAGNOSIS DME−IDENT

CSB LGM2/DME LGM3/NDB VAM ANALOG OIO LCP IN OIO LCP OUT
ETX−CPU COM2 ETX−CPU COM3

SPARE 1 SPARE 2 VARP LOCAL VOICE ETHERNET PTT LINE/LGM1

SB2
DVOR DVOR
CVOR MON4 MON3 MON2 MON1 CVOR

BCPS MON1 MON2 MON3 MON4 MON5 MON6 MON7 MON8

TNC−connector
MON2 MON1

Transmitter rack
rear side, top view

optional attenuators,
if need be

Power meter

Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator

26 dB SMA connector 20 dB 20 dB
50/100 W* 10 W 10 W
MON2 MON1
N−connector
MONITOR SIGNAL SIMULATOR N−connector
83134 31600

SBA SBB CSB

SMA connector SMA connector

* depends on RF level

Fig. 4−10 Simulator test setup with Monitor Signal Simulator (2)

Ed. 01.12 4−37

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

Monitor dipole 1

SBA SBB

Monitor dipole 2
(optional)

CSB−antenna

Fig. 4−11 Alignment of antenna

4−38 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
on top of the cabinet:
Local PC operation, via connector Local PC

ÊÊ ÊÊ
or
via connector ETHERNET with ETX−CPU option

ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X120...125 ASU
X87 X86 X79 X78

ÊÊ ÊÊ
X115 X110
X94 X93 X92 X107 X144
X131 X130

ÊÊ ÊÊ
X143 X141
X142 X140
X99 X98 X97 X96 X76 X85 control line BCPS
X89 X82

ÊÊ ÊÊ
X88 X80 X77
BP−C** X73 X84

ÊÊ ÊÊ
X135 X134
X106 T1 X83 X74

ÊÊ ÊÊ
3 − −1
X104 X105 X95 X72 X71 4 −X81− 2

ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
BP−T X71
X70 X84
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
X81

ÊÊ ÊÊ
X83
(TX1) X72
X85 X82

ÊÊ CA−100/1*
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
CCP−V
X16

ÊÊ ÊÊ
X80

ÊÊ ÊÊ
R1

ÊÊ ÊÊ
X70
BP−T X71 X84
X81

ÊÊ ÊÊ
X83
X72
(TX2) X85 X82

ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
X16

X80 ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ PMM ÊÊ
ÊÊ
TX2, TX1, NAV
rear
ÊÊ
ÊÊ CA−100/2*
BP−DC ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
Battery and power supply connection

ÊÊ
ÊÊ
control line BCPS
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
BP−BCPS ÊÊ
ÊÊ
*Version 100 W ** BP−C: 58351 00113
ÊÊ ÊÊ
Fig. 4−12 Transmitter cabinet, rear side, potentiometers on CCP−V

Ed. 01.12 4−39

CVOR 431
Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance

4.12 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MONITOR DISPLAY OF THE RF LEVEL

AND THE POWER
The CSB output power is displayed by the monitor as the RF level. This display does not correspond
to the direct power but is a voltage display. The power must be converted to a voltage in order to be
able to set an alarm limit, e.g. ±20 % power change.
dB= 10 log P /P


 e.g. alarm limit for −20 % power change

dB =10 log P /P
; P = 0.8 P

dB =10 log 0.8 P

/P

dB =10 log 0.8

dB =−0.9691

 e.g. alarm limit for +20 % power change

dB =10 log P /P
; P =1.2 P

dB =10 log 1.2 P

/P

dB =10 log 1.2

dB = 0.7918

Conversion of power change to a voltage change (U is used instead of V)

dB= 10 log P /P
; P = U 2/R ; P
= U
2/R (U is according to the RF−level)

dB = 10 log (U 2/R) / (U
2/R)

dB = 10 log U 2/U
2

dB = 20 log U /U

dB/20= log U /U

10dB/20= U /U

U = U
x 10dB/20 
If the above  and below  formulae are combined the result is as follows:

U =U
x 100.5 log P / P

The conversion yields the following relationship: U 2/U

2 = P /P


These formulae can be converted to determine the associated power change from the monitor display
of the RF level.

P = P
x 102 log U / U


4−40 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC

ANNEX TO CHAPTER 4
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE 8 POINT GROUND CHECK
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 3
The above chapters headers are used for numbering reasons only.
CHAPTER 4
FIRST SETUP WITH 8 POINT GROUND CHECK OPTION
This Annex describes the settings for the 8 point ground check (8 PGC) option during first alignment
of the CVOR installation which are different to those of the standard CVOR 431 without 8 PGC.
4.1 GENERAL
The following procedure is an excerpt from the standard Alignment Procedure. It is adapted to the
use of the optional 8 point ground check feature.
NOTE: The setup and alignment procedure which is described in chapter 4 can be performed
with connected 8 PGC monitor dipoles. The masks in the PC User Program are adapted
for 8 PGC in a way that the standard monitor dipole, if used as before, is assigned as main
dipole (this is monitor dipole 1 of the 8 PGC option).
The differences in the procedure using the 8 PGC option are described in the following. 8 PGC adjust-
ments concern mainly section 4.7 Ground Check. The 8 PGC monitor dipoles 2...8 are assigned in
the correspondent calibration and measurement masks as dipole 045...315 according to the angle
distance of the dipole location related to the main dipole (or dipole 000). The manually performed
ground check procedure is replaced by the automatic ground check procedure with the 8 PGC op-
tion. All other standard procedures of chapter 4 remain valid if no other proceeding is described.
Example dialog window ’Alarm Limits’:
with 8PGC

Example dialog window ’Calibration’

with 8PGC

(shown values are examples only)

Fig. A4−1 Example of dialog window ’Alarm Limits’ and dialog window ’Calibration’

Ed. 09.10 A4−1

CVOR 431
Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC Operation and Maintenance

4.2 FIRST SWITCHING ON

4.2.1 Status of the System
4.2.2 Switching On
4.2.3 General Remarks to the PC User Program Handling
The above chapter headers are used for numbering reasons only. There is no change due to 8PGC.
4.2.4 Preparing the Installation SITE with PC User Program
4.2.4.1 Use of MCS
NOTE: For users of the MCS user program currently the ’MCS File Transfer’ tool is used.
a) Switch on the PC and run the Linux operating system.
b) Start the file transfer tool: click on desktop start button, select ’System Tools’, select ’MCS File
Transfer (ILS, VOR, FFM, Marker)’. The dialog window ’ADR_MAIN−DOS in a BOX’ appears.
c) Select menu command ’LOGIN’ of the MASTER MENU. Enter REU as ’UserName’ and confirm
blank characters in ’Password’.
d) Select ’FILE TRANSFER’ of the MASTER MENU, select menu command ’COPY PC FILE TO SITE’.
e) Select configuration files (*.sit, *.lke (see NOTE), *.ptt, *.oio) and enter.
NOTE: The *.lke−file is used in systems before current NAV2K−SW. It is replaced by a conver-
sion table file (konv_dat.dat) which is loaded together with the LCP−SW (from V3.x).
From SW V5.x this file is implemented in the LCP.ZIP file. It has not to be copied.
f) Select menu command ’RESET SITE’ of the MASTER MENU to activate entered files and data.
NOTE: The File Transfer tool is closed due to the reset. It has to be restarted manually.
g) Run ’MCS File Transfer’ tool again. Perform Login.
h) Select ’DATE & TIME’ in the MASTER MENU. Select menu command ’SET SITE DATE & TIME’.
Enter date and time.
i) Select menu command ’EXIT’ in the MASTER MENU to shut down the File Transfer tool.
4.2.4.2 Use of ADRACS
a) Switch on the PC and run WINDOWS.
b) Start ADRACS user program: click ’Start’ button, select ’Programs’, select program group ’Adracs
Remote Controlling’, select program ’Adracs Remote Controlling Software’.
c) Perform login procedure at the PC. Acknowledge "User1, Level 5" with ’OK’ button.
d) Click screen button ’Control’ in the ’Main Status’−window.
e) Select ’File Transfer’ in window ’RC Management’. Select ’Copy PC file to RAM’.
f) Copy configuration files (*.sit, *.lke (see NOTE), *.ptt, *.oio) from PC to site.
NOTE: The *.lke−file is used in systems before current NAV2K−SW. It is replaced by a conver-
sion table file (konv_dat.dat) which is loaded together with the LCP−SW (from V3.x).
From SW V5.x this file is implemented in the LCP.ZIP file. It has not to be copied.
g) Click ’Reset SITE’ of menu ’File Transfer’ to activate entered files and data.
NOTE: The ’Adracs Remote Controlling Software’ is closed due to the reset. It has to be restarted
manually.

A4−2 Ed. 09.10

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC
h) Run ’Adracs Remote Controlling Software’ again. Perform Login.
i) Click screen button ’Control’ in the ’Main Status’−window.
j) Select ’DateTimeREU’ in window ’RC Management’. Enter date and time and acknowledge with
button ’Set New’. Shut down window ’DateTimeREU’.
k) Click ’Exit’ in the ’Main Status’−window to shut down ADRACS.
4.2.5 Check and Enter Station Configuration Data
NOTE: Normally these data may be already set in the equipment. If
a) Start user program, perform login and select station. The detailed view on the CVOR station ap-
pears.
b) Switch both TX on and set all Monitor Bypass on.
Using ADRACS:
a) Open dialog ’LRCI−Station Configuration’.
b) Check parameters within the area ’Hardware Configuration’:
’Installed Monitors’, ’Power’. If need be, select the correct parameter value.
c) Check parameters within the area ’Operational Settings’:
Check or set parameter ’Field Monitoring’ according to the existent configuration: ’with 8PGC’.
Use the pull−down menu.
Using MCS:
a) Open dialog in the 1st Equipment Level window by selecting menu item ’Station Configuration’
in menu ’Operation’.
b) Check parameters of station: ’Installed Monitors’, ’Power’, ’Frequency’, ’Station Type’ and ’Morse
Code’.
c) Check or set parameter ’Field Monitoring Mode’ according to the existent configuration: ’with
8PGC’.
Finally: Switch both TX off.

Settings for 8PGC option

Definition main dipole

Fig. A4−2 Dialog window ’Station Configuration’, used to enter station configuration parameter

Ed. 09.10 A4−3

CVOR 431
Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC Operation and Maintenance

4.3 ANTENNA ALIGNMENT

Perform the standard procedure. With 8PGC option, the following changes in the standard procedure
text are to be regarded:
Section 4.3.3.3, Circular Pattern of LR (and following):
a) Set measuring dipole on tripod (height: 2 m) about 50...60 m from VOR shelter, and connect
it via RF−cable with input MON1 on top of the cabinet.
b) Rotate CVOR antenna so that CF points in direction of measuring dipole.
c) Switch TX1 on.
ADRACS: Open dialog ’LRCI−Station Configuration’. Check parameters within the area ’Hard-
ware Configuration’, ’Power’: select the correct parameter value ’50W’ or ’100W’. Check param-
eters within the area ’Operational Settings’, select the correct parameter ’Field Monitoring’ ac-
cordingly: ’with 8PGC’. Use the pull−down menu.
MCS: Open dialog in the 1st Equipment Level window by selecting menu item ’Station Configu-
ration’ in menu ’Operation’. Check parameters of station: ’Installed Monitors’, ’Power’, ’Fre-
quency’, ’Station Type’ and ’Morse Code’. Check or set parameter ’Field Monitoring’ according
to the existent configuration.
Using the 8 PGC option, there is no individual monitor signal input for Monitor1 of TX1 and Monitor2
of TX2 on top of the cabinet as for the standard CVOR. For 8 PGC, the input MON1 is used for main
dipole or monitor dipole 1 (monitor channel 0) which is fed via the MDS−V8 to the Monitor units of
both TX1 and TX2. With this monitor dipole input signal, the installation is aligned as normal except
Ground Check.
Continue with Section 4.3.3.3 d) of the standard procedure and from Section 4.6.4 with this Annex.

4.4 RF−PHASING OF OMNIDIRECTIONAL RADIATOR LR − UR

4.5 CHECK OF MONITORS
4.6 SETTING OF TRANSMITTERS AND MONITORS
4.6.1 Adjustment of Carrier Power
4.6.2 RF−Phasing (SBA/SBB to CSB), 30 Hz AM and Sense of Rotation of TX1
4.6.3 RF−Phasing (SBA/SBB to CSB), 30 Hz AM and Sense of Rotation of TX2
The above chapter headers are used for numbering reasons only. There is no change due to 8PGC.
They are performed as described. Changes to the standard version start with the next section 4.6.4.
NOTE: If the 8PGC monitor simulator is used, perform RF phasing with 8PGC Monitor Simulator
according Section 4.1.4.1 (setup see Fig A4−7), before proceeding with Section 4.6.4.

A4−4 Ed. 01.12

09.10
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC
4.6.4 Setting of TX1 and Monitor 1
4.6.4.1 Preparation
a) Rotate antenna so that each antenna dipole (A and B) has an angle of 45° to the monitor dipole
1
(Main Dipole, see Fig. A4−6). Secure antenna by screws.
b) Connect monitor dipole 1 (or standard field dipole) with the cabinet input labeled MON1. It means
monitor channel 0, used as main.
c) Switch TX1 on.
d) ADRACS: Open dialog ’LRCI−Station Configuration’. Check parameters within the area ’Hard-
ware Configuration’, ’Power’: select the correct parameter value ’50W’ or ’100W’. Check parame-
ters within the area ’Operational Settings’, select the correct parameter ’Field Monitoring’ accord-
ingly: ’with 8PGC’. Use the pull−down menu.
MCS: Open dialog in the 1st Equipment Level window by selecting menu item ’Station Configura-
tion’ in menu ’Operation’. Check parameters of station: ’Installed Monitors’, ’Power’, ’Station
Type’. Check or set parameter ’Field Monitoring’ according to the existent configuration.
4.6.4.2 RF Level Monitor 1, Main Dipole Adjustment
a) ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main’. Open dialog ’Monitor1 − Calibration’.
Set parameter ’AGC Adjust’ of Dipole 1 (’0.0’) to ’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor1−Measmt 8 PGC−RF Level’. Open dialog ’Monitor1−Cal 8 PGC−
Calibration AGC Adjustment’. Set parameter ’Calibration AGC Adjustment’ of Dipole 1 (0.0) to
’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %.
4.6.4.3 30 Hz Modulation Depth Monitor 1, Main Dipole Adjustment
a) ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main’. Open dialog ’Monitor1 − Calibration’.
Set parameter ’Cal 30Hz AM Depth’ of Dipole 1 (’0.0’) to ’30 Hz AM Depth’ indication of 30.0 %.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor1−Measmt 8 PGC−30 Hz Modulation Amplitude’. Open dialog ’Moni-
tor1−Cal 8 PGC−Misc’. Set parameter ’Calibration 30 Hz AM Dipole (000)’ so, that indication ’30
Hz (mod.) AM main dipole 000’ becomes 30.0 %.
NOTE: 80...120, Factor= 30 % x 100 %/reading above. It has to be regarded that the main dipole ’0.0’ has
a distance of 8 m, otherwise the 30 Hz AM measurement is not correctly. Values of dipoles 045 to
315 are informatively only.

4.6.4.4 Subcarrier TX1 (9960Hz AM Depth, FM Index)

a) ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main’. Open dialog ’Monitor1 − Calibration’.
Set parameter ’Cal 9960Hz AM Depth’ of Dipole 1 (’0.0’) to ’9960Hz AM Depth’ indication of 30.0
%.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor1−Measmt 8 PGC−9960Hz Modulation Amplitude’. Open dialog
’Monitor1−Cal 8 PGC−Misc’. Set parameter ’Calibration 9960Hz AM Dipole (000)’ so, that indica-
tion ’9960Hz (mod.) AM main dipole 000’ becomes 30.0 %.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.8.
b) ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main’. Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’. Set
’Modulation Index’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ so, that ’FM Index’ indication in ’Moni-
tor1−Measurement Main’ becomes 16.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor1−Measurements/Limits’. Open window ’TX1 − Adjustments’. Set
’FM Index’ in window ’TX1 − Adjustments’ so, that ’FM Index’ indication in ’Monitor1−Measure-
ments/Limits’ becomes 16.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...25.0.

Ed. 09.10 A4−5

CVOR 431
Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC Operation and Maintenance

4.6.4.5 Azimuth
a) Open window ’Monitor1−Measurement Main (Measurements/Limits)’, open window ’TX1 − Ad-
justments’. Set parameter ’Azimuth Alignment’ to obtain an azimuth reading ’Azimuth (main di-
pole)’ equal to monitor dipole 1 location. Determine azimuth location of the main dipole 1 (MON1)
using a compass for reading of value and enter value.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9.

4.6.4.6 Identity and Voice

a) Open dialog ’TX1−Adjustments’, set ’1020Hz AM’ to e.g. 10 %.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...20.0.
b) If applicable set ’Voice AM Depth’ to e.g. 20 %.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...40.0.
c) Switch TX1 off.

4.6.5 Setting of TX2 with Monitor 1

4.6.5.1 Control of TX2 with Monitor 1
a) Switch TX2 on.
b) Set TX2 on aerial.
c) ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main’. Check ’RF−Level’ indication of Dipole
1 (0.0).
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor1−Measmt 8 PGC−RF Level’. Check ’RF−Level’ indication of of Di-
pole 1 (0.0).
NOTE: Nominal value: 100.0 % (± 5.0 %).
d) ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurement Main’. Check ’30 Hz AM Depth’ indication of
Dipole 1 (’0.0’).
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor1−Measurements 8PGC−30 Hz Modulation Amplitude’. Check ’30 Hz
mod. AM main dipole (000)’.
NOTE: Nominal value: 30.0 % (± 1.0 %).

4.6.5.2 Subcarrier, Azimuth, Identity and Voice

Set subcarrier, azimuth, identity and voice of TX2 in the same way as described for TX1 in 4.6.4.4 to
4.6.4.6. Continue to use monitor 1.

4.6.6 Setting and Check of Monitor 2

4.6.6.1 Monitor 2 with TX1 on Aerial
NOTE: TX1 is radiating.
Switch TX1 on. Set TX1 on aerial.
a) RF level
ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main’. Open dialog ’Monitor2 − Calibration’.
Set parameter ’AGC Adjust’ of Dipole 1 (’0.0’) to ’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor2−Measmt 8 PGC−RF Level’. Open dialog ’Monitor2−Cal 8 PGC−
Calibration Agc Adjustment’. Set parameter ’Calibration AGC Adjustment’ of Dipole 1 (0.0) to
’RF−Level’ indication of 100 %.

A4−6 Ed. 09.10

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC
b) 30 Hz AM Mod. Depth
ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main’. Open dialog ’Monitor2 − Calibration’.
Set parameter ’Cal 30Hz AM Depth’ of Dipole 1 (’0.0’) to ’30 Hz AM Depth’ indication of 30.0 %.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor2−Measmt 8 PGC−30 Hz Modulation Amplitude’. Open dialog ’Moni-
tor2−Cal 8 PGC−Misc’. Set parameter ’Calibration 30 Hz AM Dipole (000)’ so, that indication ’30
Hz (mod.) AM main dipole 000’ becomes 30.0 %.
NOTE: Range of values: 50...200.0.
c) Subcarrier (9960Hz AM Depth, FM Index)
ca) ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main’. Check ’9960Hz AM Depth’. If indi-
cation is out of tolerance, open dialog ’Monitor2 − Calibration’. Set parameter ’Cal 9960Hz
AM Depth’ of Dipole 1 (’0.0’) to ’9960Hz AM Depth’ indication of 30.0
%.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor2−Measmt 8 PGC−9960Hz Modulation Amplitude’. Check
’Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM’. If indication is out of tolerance, open dialog ’Monitor2−Cal 8
PGC−Misc’. Set parameter ’Calibration 9960Hz AM Dipole (000)’ so, that indication ’9960Hz
(mod.) AM main dipole 000’ becomes 30.0 %.
NOTE: Nominal value 30.0 % (±1.0 %).
cb) ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main’. Check ’FM Index’ indication. If
indication is out of tolerance, open dialog ’Monitor2 − Calibration’. Set ’Cal FM Index’ so,
that ’FM Index’ indication in ’Monitor2−Measurement Main’ becomes 16.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor2−Measmt 8 PGC−Mod. Index 30 Hz FM’. Check ’Mod. Index
30 Hz FM’. If indication is out of tolerance, open dialog ’Monitor2−Cal 8 PGC−Misc Calibra-
tion’. Set parameter ’Calibrate Mod. Index 30 Hz FM’ to indication of 16 in ’Monitor2−
Measmt 8 PGC−Mod. Index 30 Hz FM’.
NOTE: Nominal value 16.0 (±0.5)
d) Azimuth
ADRACS: Open window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main’. Check ’Azimuth’ of main dipole. If indi-
cation is out of tolerance, open dialog ’Monitor2 − Calibration’. Set parameter ’Cal Azimuth Moni-
tor’ to obtain nominal value.
MCS: Open dialog ’Monitor2−Measmt 8 PGC−Azimuth’. Check ’Azimuth main dipole’. If indica-
tion is out of tolerance, open dialog ’Monitor2−Cal 8PGC−Azimuth Calibration’. Set ’Calibration
Azimuth Dipole 000’ to obtain nominal value.
NOTE: Nominal value: same as in 4.6.4.5 (±0.2)
e) Switch TX1 off.
4.6.6.2 Monitor 2 with TX2 on Aerial
a) Switch TX2 on.
b) Set TX2 on aerial.
c) Open window ’Monitor2 − Measurement Main (Monitor2−Measurements 8PGC)’. Check follow-
ing Monitor2 indications:
ca) ’RF−Level (RF Level main dipole 000)’
cb) ’30 Hz AM Depth (30 Hz Mod. AM Main Dipole 000)’.
cc), ’9960Hz AM Depth’
cd) ’FM Index’
ce) ’Azimuth’
NOTE: Nominal values: ca) 100.0 % (±5.0 %) cd) 16.0 (±0.5)
cb) 30.0 % (±1.0 %) ce) same as in 4.6.4.5 (±0.2)
cc) 30.0 % (±1.0 %)
d) Switch TX2 off.

Ed. 09.10 A4−7

CVOR 431
Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC Operation and Maintenance

4.7 GROUND CHECK

NOTE: The Ground Check procedure is automatically performed using the 8PGC option. This
is why this procedure is not performed manually any longer.

4.7.1 Calibration Dipole 045 to 315 with TX1 and Monitor1

NOTE: TX1 is radiating.
Switch TX1 on. Set TX1 aerial.
a) RF level
Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurements 8PGC (Measurements 8PGC)’. Open dialog window
’Monitor1 − Calibration (Calibration)’. Set ’AGC Adjust’ value of monitor dipole 2 (’45.0’) to ’RF
level’ indication of 100 % for ’45.0’.
Perform this also for the monitor dipoles 3...8 (... dipole 90.0 to 315.0).
NOTE: If necessary, use setting ’Digital Attenuation’ for correspondent monitor dipole ( 45.0 to 315.0).
Indications values for ’30 Hz AM Depth’ of dipole ’45.0’ and 90.0 ... 315.0 are informatively only.

dialog window ’Calibration’ with 8PGC option

(example)

dialog window ’Measurements 8PGC

(example)

(shown values are examples only)

Fig. A4−3 Dialog windows ’Monitor1 − Calibration’ and ’Monitor1 − Measurements 8PGC’

4.7.1.1 Check Calibration Dipole 045 to 315 with TX2

a) Switch TX2 on.
b) Set TX2 on aerial.
c) Use masks given above.
d) Check values for RF−level for the monitor dipoles 2...8 (... dipole 045 to 315).

A4−8 Ed. 09.10

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC
4.7.1.2 Store 8PGC Measurement Result as Reference Data

The data obtained in the dialog window ’Measurements 8PGC’ for Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 can be
taken over to the ’Reference data 8PGC’ window (see Fig. A4−4). This window is used as reference
of the data obtained during first setup.

a) Open dialog window ’Monitor1 − Reference Data 8PGC’. Click the button ’Store’ in the window
’Reference data 8PGC’ to update its contents with the current measurement data 8PGC.

click to store data of Measurements 8PGC obtained

as Reference Data (stored in EEPROM)

(shown values are examples only)

Fig. A4−4 Dialog window ’Monitor1 − Reference Data 8PGC’

4.7.2 Evaluation of Ground Check Measurement Results

The results of the automatic ground check measurement will be found in dialog ’Monitor1−Measure-
ment 8PGC (Measmt 8 PGC−Misc)’. The results are indicated as:
− ’Quadrantal error term sine’ − ’Duantal error term sine’
− ’Quadrantal error term cosine’ − ’Duantal error term cosine’
− ’Average error term’
Fig. A4−5 shows an example of the error curve. Comments to these indications will be found in the
chapter 5, section 5.2.7.

Fig. A4−5 Example of an 8PGC azimuth error curve

Ed. 09.10 A4−9

CVOR 431
Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC Operation and Maintenance

4.8 SETTING OF MONITOR ALARM LIMITS

4.8.1 Monitor 1
Open window ’Monitor1 − Measurements Main (Measurements/Limits)’, and open additionally in
ADRACS dialog ’Monitor1 − Alarm Limits’.

4.8.1.1 Azimuth
a) Select ’Azimuth’ reading in ’Monitor1 − Measurements Main (Measurements/Limits)’, equal to azi-
muth value of main monitor dipole (0.0). Use average value of the main dipole 1 to define alarm
limits.
b) Upper limit: Add 1.0° to ’Azimuth’ reading and key in this value in ’Azimuth Alarm Limits’
as ’UL’ for ’Dipole 1’.
c) Lower limit: Subtract 1.0° from ’Azimuth’ reading and key in this value in ’Azimuth Alarm Limits’
as ’LL’ for ’Dipole 1’.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9; if during flight check azimuth of transmitters has to be changed, these
azimuth alarm limits have to be readjusted.

4.8.1.2 RF Level
a) Upper limit of ’RF Level’, e.g. 129 %
b) Lower limit of ’RF Level’, e.g. 71 %
NOTE: Range of values: Upper Limit 100...150, Lower Limit 50...100

4.8.1.3 Distortion 9960 Hz

a) Upper limit of ’9960Hz Distortion’, e.g. 5.0 %
b) Lower limit of ’9960Hz Distortion’, e.g. 0.0 %

4.8.1.4 30 Hz AM Signal
a) Upper limit of ’30Hz AM’, e.g. 34.5 %
b) Lower limit of ’30Hz AM’, e.g. 25.5 %
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.9

4.8.1.5 9960 Hz Signal

a) Upper limit of ’9960Hz AM’, e.g. 34.5 %
b) Lower limit of ’9960Hz AM’, e.g. 25.5 %
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.9.

4.8.1.6 30 Hz FM Signal
a) Upper limit of ’FM Index’, e.g. 17
b) Lower limit of ’FM Index’, e.g. 15
NOTE: Range of values: 0...39.9

4.8.1.7 Identity AM Signal

a) Upper limit of ’Mod. Depth Identity AM’, e.g. 12 %.
b) Lower limit of ’Mod. Depth Identity AM’, e.g. 8 %.

A4−10 Ed. 09.10

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC
4.8.1.8 Distortion 30 Hz FM
a) Upper Limit of ’30 Hz FM Distortion ’, e.g. 3.0 %

4.8.1.9 Carrier Frequency Difference

a) Upper limit of ’Frequency Delta’, e.g. 2400 Hz
b) Lower limit of ’Frequency Delta’, e.g. 2400 Hz

4.8.1.10 Alarm Delay

a) Set parameter ’Alarm Delay (Time)’ to e.g. 20 s
NOTE: Range of values: 2...255

4.8.2 Monitor 2
Set alarm limits for Monitor 2 in the same way as described for Monitor 1 in Section 4.8.1.

4.9 BATTERY MONITORING

4.10 NORMAL OPERATION
The above chapter headers are used for numbering reasons only. There is no change due to 8 PGC.
Changes to the standard version are mentioned in the next section.

4.11 FLIGHT CHECK

The Flight check procedure is as described in Section 4.11 of the standard procedure without 8PGC.
NOTE: If during flight check the azimuth indication of the main dipole 1 has to be corrected the
other dipoles 2 to 8 are adjusted automatically according to the changed value.

Ed. 09.10 A4−11

 CVOR 431
Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC Operation and Maintenance

Monitor dipole 1 (0° reference, 000)

(or standard field dipole)
(main dipole)

Monitor dipole 2 (045)

Monitor dipole 8 (315)

SBA SBB
Monitor dipole 7

Monitor dipole 3
CSB−antenna

Monitor dipole 6
Monitor dipole 4

Monitor dipole 5

Note:
Does a CVOR installation already exist, the CVOR antenna has to be rotated in a way that the range distance
between maximum and zero of the sideband antennas is 45° related to the monitor main dipole 1.

Fig. A4−6 Alignment of antenna, arrangement 8 PGC dipoles

A4−12 Ed. 09.10

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC

(D)VOR (D)VOR
ETX−CPU COM4
SB1
LGM1 Local PC ASU−CONTROL DIAGNOSIS DME−IDENT

CSB LGM2/DME LGM3/NDB VAM ANALOG OIO LCP IN OIO LCP OUT
ETX−CPU COM2 ETX−CPU COM3

SPARE 1 SPARE 2 VARP LOCAL VOICE ETHERNET PTT LINE/LGM1

SB2
DVOR DVOR
CVOR MON4 MON3 MON2 MON1 CVOR

BCPS MON1 MON2 MON3 MON4 MON5 MON6 MON7 MON8

TNC

Transmitter rack
rear side, top view

Power meter

optional attenuators,
if need be
Attenuator Attenuator
TNC 20 dB 20 dB
10 W 10 W
Attenuator
MON1 MON2 MON3 MON4 MON5 MON6 MON7 MON8
26 dB
50/100 W* 0° 45° 90° 135° 180° 225° 270° 315°
N N
MONITOR SIGNAL SIMULATOR 8PGC
N TNC 58351 00500
CSB SB1 SB2
* depends on RF level
TNC TNC

8PGC Simulator, cable kit

8 PGC Simulator

Fig. A4−7 Simulator test setup with Monitor Signal Simulator 8PGC

Ed. 09.10 A4−13

CVOR 431
Annex Alignment Procedure 8 PGC Operation and Maintenance

A4−14 Ed. 09.10

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Maintenance

CHAPTER 5
MAINTENANCE
5.1 GENERAL
Maintenance of a system can be defined as preventive and corrective maintenance (corrective main-
tenance may also be defined as ’Repair’ activity in case of a fault). Within this chapter two basic types
of preventive maintenance are described, namely periodic maintenance and normal maintenance.
It is essential to ensure that the radiated signals remain within the fixed tolerances at all times after
the navigation system has been handed over for service to air traffic. With this aim in mind, ICAO rec-
ommends verifying the most important signal parameters of the ground station within the framework
of periodic maintenance.
In case of a heavy snowfall, the snow should be removed from the counterpoise of the antenna.
NOTE: Change of parameters is allowed only by maintenance people with specific access level
(i.e. > level 2) to the PC user program (ADRACS or MCS).
In Navaids 400, all the main parameters are maintained at the preset values throughout the entire life
of the system by means of a microprocessor controlled transmitter, so that drift as a result of ageing
should not normally occur. In addition, the radiated signals are checked by two high−precision micro-
processor controlled monitors. These prevent fault signals from being emitted by either switching
over to the standby transmitter or shutting down the system completely.
Since, moreover, no parts which are subject to mechanical wear and tear are used, the periodic main-
tenance intervals can be made longer than usual and the number of measurements restricted to a
minimum. Due to the measurement facilities which are integrated in the system, only a few external
instruments are required. In addition to the periodic maintenance tasks, there are a few activities of
normal maintenance which should be performed as and when necessary.
NOTE: The responsible authorities (e.g. ATC/Controls) must be informed before commencing
any maintenance work in accordance with national regulations!

5.1.1 Elimination of Static Charges

A grounding strip with a large cross−sectional area is connected between the shelter grounding ter-
minal, the equipment racks and the worktable to act as the system ground and to eliminate electro-
static charges. It is firmly connected to the table and a grounding bus on the working surface. This
system ground should not be connected to either the mains protective ground conductor or to hous-
ings and grounds of external consumers, i.e. consumers not associated with the worktable, except
at the potential equalization bus for the overall installation.
The protective ground wire offered with mains cable or plug connections is not suitable for potential
equalization of equipment on a worktable. Depending on local circumstances, it can carry quite high
RF interference voltages. Mains−supplied equipment, power supplies and test equipment should be
connected via two−wire cables and two−pin plugs.
For measures to be taken with respect to components sensitive to electricostatic charging (MOS, Low
Power Schottky) please refer to the customer service documentation of the manufacturer. If an em-
ployee is required to handle subassemblies for transport purposes, he should place both hands flat
on a grounded surface beforehand (e.g. on the ground bus of the work table).
The module can be picked up by its insulator immediately following this potential equalization. It is
safer to avoid touching the terminals. Only remove short−circuit links where absolutely necessary.
Place printed circuit boards only on tables with a conductive, grounded working surface. Leave indi-
vidual subassemblies in the antistatic plastic bags for as long as possible.

Ed. 01.12 5−1

CVOR 431
Maintenance Operation and Maintenance

5.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

NOTE: The items marked with an asterisk (*) are normally performed continuously via the re-
motely connected RMMC system, or locally via a connected Laptop/PC.
Compare also measuring values with those of recorded data (refer to section 5.2.4)
Handling with subassemblies regard instructions in section 5.1.1.
We recommend performing the maintenance activities listed in the table below once every month or
six months. The following measuring instruments are required for this:
− Personal Computer (Laptop or standard PC; used for maintenance on site)
− Headphones (600 ohms, 3.5 mm plug; for station identification)
− Portable field dipole
− RF terminating resistor (50 ohms, 1 W)
− Multimeter
− Battery maintenance equipment (acidimeter, acid syringe, areometer, thermometer, funnel).

No. Monthly maintenance

1 Check system status/visual inspection (refer to 5.2.1 and 5.2.6).
2 Check station frequency of former master transmitter.*
3 Check station identification of former master transmitter.*
4 Check settings of both transmitters and monitors.*
5 Check measured values of former master transmitter and monitors.*
6 Check switch over function by simulating monitor alarm and changing master transmitter.*
7 Check station frequency of new master transmitter.*
8 Check station identification of new master transmitter.*
9 Check measured values of new master transmitter and monitors.*
No. Additional six−monthly maintenance
10 Check ground error curve of former master transmitter (ref. to 4.7; evaluation 8 PGC opt.: 5.2.7)
11 Check ground error curve of new master transmitter (refer to 4.7; evaluation 8 PGC opt.: 5.2.7).
12 Remote control system (line loss): check LCD window ’Alerts’ for remote control alert message.
13 Check lead batteries/visual inspection (refer also to section 5.3.2 and 5.4, if need be).
14 Check battery function by simulating a power failure (refer to 5.2.3).
15 Clean all equipment thoroughly (refer to 5.2.5).
No. yearly maintenance
16 Take a complete memory readout of all possible parameters (5.2.4).
17 Check RF cable connections and all screwed connections, internal and external
(refer to 5.2.1 and 5.2.6).

5.2.1 Damage check

The following system parts have to be checked visually for entirety and damage:

− shelter,
− counterpoise, antenna radome
− monitor dipole, monitor mast and cable
− obstruction lights
− fence around the station
− tight fitting of all RF cable connections (internal and external), perform it yearly only.
− tight fitting of all screwed connections (electrical and mechanical), perform it yearly only.

5−2 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Maintenance
5.2.2 Check of Transmitter Parameters and Monitoring
There are various methods to validate periodically the transmitter− and monitor functions depending
on the procedures laid down by the national customer procedures. The check of monitor parameter
alarms is proposed to be done with a change of corresponding transmitter parameter.
NOTE: The procedures to change transmitter parameters and check of monitoring alarms can
be performed locally via a connected Laptop/PC or remotely via the RMMC system. The
check of transmitter and monitoring parameters is performed with the PC User Program.

5.2.3 Check of Battery Function

This check shall ensure that the battery is able to supply the installation in case of a mains interrupt.
To check the battery function perform the following procedure:
a) Both TX are on. Switch off mains supply, e.g. switch off the ACC modules. The equipment should
be supplied by the battery and runs without interruption. The LCD screen should indicate a mainte-
nance alert with ’BCPS1 Failure’ and ’BCPS2 Failure’ (and ’BCPS3 Failure’ or ’BCPS4 Failure’, if
equipped).
b) After a few minutes (e.g. about 5 min) switch on ACC modules again. The equipment should be
supplied by the mains again and runs without interruption.
5.2.4 Documentation of System Data
The data recorded during the flight test is the only data which is binding for operation of a navigation
installation. It is advisable to check this data in accordance with the chart for periodic maintenance.
A documentation is performed by the printer of the connected PC or in a file for the transmitter data
and monitor data on the PC (.lda files).
The first data so−obtained of the basic adjustments of the alignment procedure at commissioning
and flight check should be recorded and stored in a reference file or on a floppy disk. One hardcopy
of the data should be completed with date and signature. The same procedure should be followed
when performing further checks, when the data recorded can be compared with the original flight
check data.

5.2.5 Cleaning

CAUTION

Cleaning aids, such as brushes and dusters, must be made of antistatic material. See also
the instructions in Section 5.1.1.
− Shelter
Brushes, dusters and a vacuum cleaner should be used to clean the transmitter rack and the rack
for the battery−charged power supply. The transmitter room should not be cleaned with a broom,
but rather using a vacuum cleaner. The floor should be washed regularly every 6 month. The deter-
gent should be added in small quantities only to the water; no aggressive cleaning agents should
be used. Floor cleaning agents should be avoided, since these have the same effect as a dielectric
and encourage the build−up of static charges.
If the floor covering is made of a conductive material, then similarly only those cleaning agents ex-
pressly recommended by the manufacturer of the floor covering should be used.
The air filters of the fans, ventilation openings or air conditioners in the shelter should be checked
from time to time in accordance with the volume of dirt which accumulates at the particular location.

Ed. 01.12 5−3

CVOR 431
Maintenance Operation and Maintenance
The filters should be replaced by new ones before they become clogged. If no new filters are avail-
able, the dirt may − as an exceptional measure − be banged out of the old filter to permit the filter
to be re−used. Damaged filters on the other hand, should not be re−used. If an air conditioner
should become iced−up, switch it off and let it defrost. Observe the manufacturers maintenance
recommendations.
The separate battery compartment should be dusted out once a year. Avoid transferring dirt from
the battery compartment into the transmitter room.
− Transmitter rack
Only two types of alcohol, namely Ethyl alcohol or Glycol,or clean water should be used to remove
layers of dirt on the LCP panel. Check that key−lock switch is not in position LOCAL so that
unintentional control is avoided. Cleaning procedure: Moisten a cloth with one of the liquids men-
tioned above and remove dirt. Dusting of the subassemblies should only take place in conjunction
with removal of a subassembly when this becomes necessary in any case for some other purpose.
Even then, subassemblies should only be dusted if dust can be detected by means of a visual
check. They should always be dusted using a soft brush, and if possible with the aid of a vacuum
cleaner. During such operations it is essential to observe all precautionary measures described
in Section 5.1.1 for voltage−sensitive semiconductors.
− Antenna and counterpoise (see section 5.2.6).

5.2.6 Cleaning and Maintenance of Antenna and Counterpoise

WARNING

Take appropriate safety measures when mounting and working on the counterpoise.
Avoid walking on the counterpoise outer parts during maintenance activities on the roof.
Do not work on the counterpoise in case of stormy weather and during tunderstorms.
The counterpoise, the RF cables, the ground wires with connections, and the antenna (PALESIT
seal) should be subjected to a visual check for corrosion and cracks at intervals to be determined
in accordance with the particular climatic conditions. Make a repair of damages if need be.
NOTE: Accessing the roof of the shelter for visual inspection or removement of snow, it should
be remembered that the counterpoise must not be mounted via the lateral counter-
poise sections.
In case of a heavy snowfall, the snow should be removed from the counterpoise of the antenna.
Air traffic control should be informed before the counterpoise is mounted.

5−4 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Maintenance
5.2.7 Evaluation of 8 Point Ground Check (8PGC) Measurement Results
The results of the automatic ground check measurement will be found in dialog window ’Monitor1
− Measurement 8PGC’ and ’Monitor2 − Measurement 8PGC’. These results are indicated as:
− Quadrantal error term sine − Quadrantal error term cosine
− Duantal error term sine − Duantal error term cosine
− Average error term
To show the 8PGC azimuth error curve, use ’Commands’ and ’8PGC Azimuth Error’.
Error term Prealarm Cause Action
Value
Qs > 1° Bad quadrature of antenna pattern Check the antenna system
Quadrantal semi cardinal
(sine) Bad quadrature between LF sine and
cosine signal
Qc > 1° Difference of RF level between side Check the sideband SWR
Quadrantal cardinal band sine and cosine (SBA and SBB)
(cosine)
If Qc > 0 then SBsin > SBcos Adjust the RF phase between
SBA and SBB
If Qc < 0 then SBsin < SBcos Adjust the level of the side
band to obtain the same level
Ds > 1° Zero of the pattern of the sine side Check the antenna
Duantal sine band antenna is not in a same line.
If Ds > 0 then lobe at 45° is less than
lobe at 225°.
If Ds < 0 then lobe at 45° is greater
than lobe at 225°.
Dc > 1° Zero of the pattern of the sine side Check the antenna
Duantal cosine band is not in a same line.
If Dc > 0 then lobe at 315° is less than
lobe at 135°.
If Dc < 0 then lobe at 315° is greater
than lobe at 135°.
Average error > 1° Bad adjustment of the phase between Adjust the phase or
30 Hz var. and ref.

Bad adjustment of the probes Adjust the probe position to

the good place
NOTE: This table shows the value for a pre−alarm threshold (alarm does not exist), the origin of the prob-
lem and the possibility to repair, which are informative for operation and analysis.
Description of the data: Each time the 8PGC polls all the eight probes, the calculated azimuth of each points
is compared with the geographic azimuth of the probe. Each data is recorded by the monitor software and
5 values are calculated from this data :
Qc : Cardinal (1) Quadrantal error: Analyses the asymmetry between the levels of the sideband SBA and
SBB
Qs : Semi cardinal (2) Quadrantal error: Analyses the quadrature of the Sine sideband pattern (SBA) and
Cosine side band pattern (SBB)
Dc : Duantal error (cosine): Analyses the alignment of the cosine pattern.
Ds : Duantal error (sine): Analyses the alignment of the sine pattern.
Av : Average error: Gives the offset of the curve
1) The meaning of cardinal is in reference with the cardinal point (North, South, East West)
2) The meaning of semi cardinal is a same than cardinal but with a rotation of 45 degrees ( NE, SE, SW, NW)

Ed. 01.12 5−5

CVOR 431
Maintenance Operation and Maintenance
The 8 point ground check analyses the drift of the bearing and gives the causes of this drift. This analy-
sis use the data coming from the eight probes arranged around the counterpoise. For each revolution,
(8 points) the monitor software calculates 5 parameters. These parameters allows to determinate the
origin of the drift (side band level, or adjustment of the antenna). It is possible for a specific application
to put the probe at 20 meters around the station. The results obtained by the pooling of the 8 probes
are similar. But in this case, the 8 point ground check analyses the behavior of the station and indi-
cates if somebody or something goes into the area inside the circle of the probes.

5−6 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Maintenance
5.3 NORMAL MAINTENANCE
5.3.1 Replacing the Lithium Batteries (MSG−C, MSP−CD, LCP)
To back up data in the non volatile RAM in case of a voltage drop, the subassemblies MSG−C,
MSP−CD and LCP contain Lithium batteries. Lithium batteries have an extended life time. The battery
voltage is checked by the BIT of the system. The individual batteries are soldered to the pc boards.
The battery back up function is enabled via jumpers, set during first setup or before replacing the re-
spective pc board. Always observe the label on the battery. The Lithium battery has to be replaced
by the same battery type. Other types of lithium battery are not approved by Thales.
Recomended types of batteries:
− MSG−C, MSP−CD:
Lithium Battery SL−389, 3.6V/1Ah, make Sonnenschein; Thales Ref. Nr. 54131 28002
− LCP:
Lithium Battery LS 14250, 3.6V/0.95Ah, make SAFT; Thales Ref. Nr. 97991 28479

WARNING

Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100 °C or incinerate the lithium cell. Do not
short circuit, or solder directly on the cell. Disregard of the norms regarding the use of
lithium batteries may cause risk of fire, explosion or leaking out of toxid liquid and gas.
Run−down batteries are objects that can pollute the environment and must be disposed
of with proper precautions regarding the national regulations.

CAUTION

Contents of the RAM will be lost when the jumper is opened which enables battery voltage
to the RAM device.
Replacing the Lithium battery:
We recommend switching the transmitter whose Lithium batteries are to be replaced over to standby
operation and then switching it off. The other transmitter will remain switched onto the antenna. This
will ensure that any interference resulting unintentionally from the replacement procedure will not af-
fect the radiated signal. A soldering iron with a grounded soldering tip should be used. A battery
short−circuit via the soldering iron for the duration of soldering is unlikely to harm the relatively high−
impedance battery, but should however be avoided wherever possible. Regard also notes for han-
dling electrostatic sensitive subassemblies in section 5.1.1.
The procedures is as follows:
− Back up the data of the respective transmitter being serviced.
− Draw out halfway concerned pc board (MSG and MSP only).
− Remove correspondent jumper (X7 on MSG−C, X7 on MSP−CD, X36 on LCP).
− Re−tin the soldering tags of the new battery in order to ensure a good soldered connection
− Unsolder the minus and plus pole of the old battery, and remove the battery from the pc board.
− Insert the new battery, and solder the minus and plus pole of the battery.
− Slide in concerned pc board again (MSG and MSP only).
NOTE: If the rack supply voltage needs to be disconnected during the period when the batteries
are unsoldered, the charge stored in the circuit capacitors will protect the RAM contents
for approx. 30 s. If the information is lost however, all transmitter parameters must be re−
entered when the batteries have been resoldered.

Ed. 01.12 5−7

CVOR 431
Maintenance Operation and Maintenance

5.3.2 Maintaining Emergency Battery

5.3.2.1 Battery Voltage
Measurement of the battery voltage is performed via the CSL and evaluated by the LCP processor.
The voltage measured is that between the BAT1 or BAT2 terminals against GND (BAT0). The half volt-
age value should be exactly half the full value. Should unbalance occur, a fault is indicated. The devi-
ation in the ratio of 2:1 for the half voltage measurement increases the further the aging process of
a cell is advanced. If the deviation from the ratio of 2:1 is minimal, the battery can be maintained in
service, but should be kept under observation. If the deviation is greater (from as little as a few tenths
of one volt), each cell must be measured under load in order to determine the weak cell. This should
be replaced by a new cell as soon as possible.
NOTE: Run−down lead batteries are objects that can pollute the environment and must be dis-
posed of taking the proper precautions regarding the national regulations.

CAUTION

Before replacing the battery or individual cells, always check:

− Is the battery−charged power supply switched on ?
− If the BCPS is on, switch off fuse switch F20 (50 A) in battery fuse box.
The battery half to be examined may be determined as follows.
Voltage ratio: locate faulty cell:
greater than 2:1 (e.g. 47: 23 V = 2.043:1) between center and minus
smaller than 2:1 (e.g. 47: 24 V = 1.958:1 ) between center and plus
5.3.3 Matching the Charging Voltage of BCPS Modules
5.3.3.1 Reasons for Voltage Matching
The BCPS has a fixed voltage of 54 V±3 % for parallel operation with lead batteries. It is not possible
to vary the output voltage for operation with other types of battery, e.g. nickel cadmium batteries. An
adjustment of ±1 V is however possible on the front panel of the slide in units. This is intended for
optimization of the trickle charge. The most important parameter for operation of lead batteries at the
BCPS is the trickle charge voltage. This voltage is 2.23 V/cell ±1% in accordance with VDE (registered
society of german electrical engineers).
In the interests of optimizing the charge Thales has utilized the upper tolerance limits and fixed the
trickle charge voltage at 2.25 V/cell. This results in a trickle charge voltage of 54 V for a battery with
a rated voltage of 48 V. Strictly speaking however this fixed trickle charge value of 54 V is only valid
at a temperature of 20 °C in the battery compartment. If the temperature rises above 20 °C, it is neces-
sary to reduce the voltage in order to maintain a sufficient difference with respect to the gassing volt-
age of 2.4 V cell. If the temperature falls below 20 °C, it is necessary to increase the charging voltage
in order to ensure optimum charging. The relationship between the temperature and the charging
voltage is shown in the table below. It is valid for the types of battery proposed or provided by Thales.
Please consult the manufacturer if using other types.
BATTERY TEMPERATURE IN °C TRICKLE CHARGE VOLTAGE IN V
10 55.08
15 54.54
20 54.0
25 53.46
30 52.92

5−8 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Maintenance
The internal temperature in the battery compartment is subject to fluctuations dependent on the time
of day and time of year. The considerable mass of the batteries and the associated high thermal inertia
mean that temperature fluctuations dependent on the time of day are insignificant and can be ignored.
It is necessary on the other hand to determine the average temperature in the battery compartment
during the hot and cold seasons or to estimate it on the basis of experience. The optimum charging
voltage can be read off from the table when the average temperature has been calculated.

It is not necessary in moderate climatic zones to take seasonal fluctuations into account. If the batter-
ies are accommodated inside a shelter or a building, the fluctuations between summer and winter are
not very great, and the mean temperature will not deviate substantially from 20 °C. In such cases it
is not necessary to optimize the trickle charge voltage as described here. This only becomes neces-
sary if the batteries are installed outside the shelter or in hot or cold zones without an air−conditioned
battery compartment.

If the mean annual temperature is known during the installation phase, adjustments can be carried
out by the Thales installation team. Otherwise they should be carried out by the customer’s own main-
tenance personnel as follows.

5.3.3.2 Matching the Voltage

NOTE: This procedure is performed once during installation or if other battery types are used.

The battery must be connected. Switch off the transmitters. Using the switches on the front panel
switch off the ACC units except the outer left one, which has to be adjusted first. Beginning with left
ACC unit adjust the ACC units as follows:
− Connect a digital voltmeter to the test jacks on the front panel of the switched on ACC unit.
− Set the desired voltage carefully at the potentiometer on the front panel with the aid of a calibration
screwdriver. It should be possible to obtain the value specified in the table in 5.3.3.1 to within a
tolerance of ±0.2 V.
− Switch off the adjusted ACC unit.
− Switch on the next ACC unit and adjust it in the same way.
− Adjust all installed ACC units in the same way.

When all units have been set in this way measurements should be performed as follows:

− Disconnect the battery.

− Perform measurements between +BAT and −BAT on the BCPS terminal plate using a digital
voltmeter:

First measurement : Transmitter off, BCPS without load

Second measurement : Transmitter on, BCPS with load

The values should not deviate from the set value by more than ±1 %. If the deviation is greater, the
relevant module can be determined by deactivating the power units individually and observing the
voltage change. The voltage of this unit must then be corrected upwards or downwards. The BCPS
is then ready for service.

Ed. 01.12 5−9

CVOR 431
Maintenance Operation and Maintenance

5−10 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Maintenance
5.4 STARTUP, CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE LEAD BATTERY
5.4.1 Startup Specifications for the Lead Battery in Navigation Installations
5.4.1.1 General

For countries in Europe, the sets of lead batteries in the navigation installations are normally supplied
already filled and charged by the manufacturer. On site the batteries then merely need to be installed
and connected to the power supply unit of the navigation installation. Batteries supplied in a non−
filled state to their point of installation must be set up, filled and charged there in accordance with the
manufacturers handling specifications. The batteries can be supplied non−filled in either a dry pre−
charged state, or a non pre−charged state (see 5.4.1.3.2 and 5.4.1.3.3 ). The battery may not be
removed from its transport packing until immediately prior to startup.

CAUTION

Maintenance−free batteries have to be set into operation within half a year after delivery
to prevent drawback in the battery lifetime

The startup procedure comprises the following stages:

a) Installation on site, interconnection of the cells with the cell connectors and connection to the
electrical installation;
b) Filling with accumulator acid;
c) Immediate subsequent charging or activation of the plates (see 5.4.1.3)
d) Immediate subsequent activation in standby parallel mode.

These instructions do not cover the installation work, but instead deal merely with filling and activation
using tools which, even in remote areas, are either available or easily obtainable. They moreover ap-
ply only to batteries for which a rated acid density of 1.24 kg/l is specified by the manufacturer, e.g.
Gro E, iron−clad and block batteries, and not to starter batteries or batteries with a fixed electrolyte.
The aids required are as follows:

Accumulator acid The acid must have a particular density. If this value is incorrect, the mixture
should be made up of high−density sulphuric acid and specially purified wa-
ter (see 5.4.1.2.2 ).

1 Acid syringe with areometer

1 Thermometer
1 Acid jug (non−metallic)
supplied with battery
1 Funnel (non−metallic)
− Float acid level indicator
− Handling specifications

− Battery−charging power supply (BCPS), type FRAKO

− Various resistors
− Single−wire cables (2.5... 6 mm)
− Ammeter and voltmeter (accuracy <1 %)

Ed. 01.12 5−11

CVOR 431
Maintenance Operation and Maintenance

5.4.1.2 Preliminary Operations

5.4.1.2.1 Accumulator Acid and Specially Purified Water

Diluted sulphuric acid and specially purified water are used for filling and topping up lead batteries.
The regulations specified in VDE 0510 (regulations for accumulators and battery installations), ac-
cording to which no components which may be harmful to the plates may be used, must be con-
formed with. Particularly harmful substances are chlorine, which is present both in the water and in
the acid, and iron which is sometimes contained in the acid. These impurities can however easily be
evidenced. Only specially purified water, i.e. water which has been distilled or fully desalted, may be
used. It must moreover be clear, colorless and odorless

CAUTION

Boiled water, rainwater, well water, river water, tap water or condensation from machines,
heating systems etc. are unsuitable.

The sulphuric acid and the water should be kept in glass or plastic containers, which must be sealed
and covered carefully. Dust and vapors which penetrate may contaminate originally pure liquids.

5.4.1.2.2 Mixing Sulphuric Acid

If the accumulator acid does not have a specified density, specially purified water should be mixed
with a high−density acid (mixed acid) in order to obtain the values shown in the chart (Fig. 5−1).

WARNING

When mixing high−density acid with water the acid must be added to the water in a thin
stream whilst stirring with a clean wooden rod. If the water is added to the acid, the latter
will splash dangerously.

special purified water density of mixed acid (kg/l) *

Litres 0 1,200 1,250 1,300
100
1,350
10
90
20 1,400
80
30
70
40 1,500
60
quantity of mixed acid

50 1,600
50
60 1,710
40 1,800
70
A
30
80
20 90
10 100
0
1,180 1,220 1,260 1,300 1,340
nominal density of accumulator acid (kg/l)
values at 20 °C (68 °F)
* mixed acid: available high−density acid

Fig. 5−1 Accumulator acid chart

5−12 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Maintenance
Example for mixing accumulator acid:

100 l accumulator acid with a density of 1.24 kg/l is required. The mixing acid available has a density
of 1.71 kg/l. The intersection A on the right−hand side of the chart (Fig. 5−1) is obtained as follows:

The slope 1.71 (density of mixed acid) intersects the vertical 1.24 (nominal density of accumulator
acid). The horizontal through point A intersects the slope at 72 l (specified purified water) and the verti-
cal at 31 l (quantity of mixed acid) in the left−hand section of the chart. The two quantities must then
be mixed in order to obtain 100 l acid with a density of 1.24 kg/l. This chart is only valid for tempera-
tures of +20 °C. For other operating temperatures see 5.4.1.2.3

When purchasing mixed acid it may be that the quantity is specified in kilograms on the container.
The chart (Fig. 5−1) is however only valid for quantities specified in liters. Kilograms can be converted
to liters as follows:

Quantity in kg
Quantity in l =
Acid density in kg/l

5.4.1.2.3 Relationship between the Acid Density and the Temperature

The nominal acid density of fixed batteries is valid at an acid temperature of 20 °C. If the temperature
increases the density will be reduced by 0.0007 kg/l per °C; if the temperature falls it will be increased
accordingly. Thus if the temperature rises by 15 °C the density will be reduced by approx 0.01 kg/l;
if the temperature falls by 15 °C the density will be increased by approx. 0.01 kg/l. The chart (Fig. 5−2)
shows the acid densities for various temperatures in relation to a temperature of +20 °C.

measured density
kg/l

1,35 density at +20 °C

(reference temperature)
kg/l acid temperature
°C
1,30
1,30 50

40
1,25
1,25
30

1,20 1,20 20

10
1,15
1,15 0

1,10 −10
1,10
−20

Example:
− measured density=1.23 kg/l
− measured acid temperature =+35 °C
The line between the two points intersects the middle scale at 1.24 kg/l (density at reference temperature of +20 °C).

Fig. 5−2 Chart showing the relationship between the acid density and the temperature

Ed. 01.12 5−13

CVOR 431
Maintenance Operation and Maintenance

5.4.1.2.4 Basic Rules for Handling Batteries

A few basic rules listed below should be observed when handling batteries:

WARNING

It is forbidden to use naked flames or incandescent bodies in the vicinity of accumulators.

This is particularly dangerous during the charging procedure, since oxyhydrogen gas is
produced when the gassing level of the accumulator acid is reached.
Caution should be observed when opening the inspection plugs. On no account should
salt crystals or other foreign bodies be allowed to get into the acid is reached.
Caution should be observed when topping up with specially purified water and when mea-
suring the acid density. Remove splashes of liquid, or conductive layers might form, allow-
ing creepage. Seal the inspection plugs again.
Maintenance−free batteries need not to be refilled. No acid density check is necessary.
Caution should be observed when mixing high−density acid with water. The acid should
be added to the water in a thin stream whilst stirring with a clean wooden rod. If water is
added to the acid, the latter will splash dangerously.
Splashes of acid should be neutralized and salts removed using a lukewarm soda solu-
tion (100 g soda to 1 l water).
Care should be taken to ensure that no soda solution gets into the cells. After treating with
the soda solution, clean with clear water and wipe dry.
Sufficient ventilation should be provided for the battery compartment. The acid vapors are
aggressive; be careful of clothing.
Specially marked and stored test leads should be used for battery measurements on ac-
count of the acid residues which may be present.

NOTE: Run−down lead batteries are objects that can pollute the environment and must be dis-
posed of taking the proper precautions regarding the national regulations.

The following points should be observed in order to prevent false acid density measurements with
the areometer:

a) The areometer float should not stick to the side or hit the top, and should always be clean.

b) When the battery is charged or discharged a period of about 30 minutes should be waited before
commencing measurements in order to allow time for the acid density between and above the
plates to become uniform.

c) If specially purified water is used for topping up, no measurements should be performed for the
next few hours.

d) If the temperature should deviate substantially from the reference temperature of +20 °C,
thisshould be taken into consideration when performing measurements (the density decreases
with higher temperatures and increases with lower temperatures).

5−14 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Maintenance
5.4.1.2.5 Filling the Batteries with Acid

A particular quantity of accumulator acid is required for each battery type. This quantity is specified
by the manufacturer or is defined by the cell levels (acid level indicator or max. marking on the cell
box). The tolerance of the accumulator acid density is ±0.01 kg/l.The acid temperature should not
exceed +35 °C, since heat is developed internally following filling, and higher acid temperatures may
cause the maximum permitted battery temperature to be exceeded.

In hot climates with the associated high ambient temperatures it is particularly difficult to cool down
the batteries during the day. We therefore recommend slowly filling the batteries half full in such re-
gions, then filling them right up the next day after they have cooled down during the night.

NOTE: The battery should not be removed from its transport packaging until immediately prior
to startup (see also Section 5.4.1.1).

5.4.1.3 Startup

Initial charging or activation.

5.4.1.3.1 General

The initial charging fully activates the plates, and for this special rules and data apply which deviate
from the standard values for battery operation and charging procedures. If the initial charging proce-
dure is not performed in accordance with the specifications, the plates will only be partly activated;
coarse sulphates will be produced, and the batteries will not reach their full capacity. Such damage
can only sometimes be eliminated by means of a time−consuming desulphating procedure.

As mentioned above in 5.4.1.1, the batteries may be supplied non−filled in either a dry pre−charged
state, or a non pre−charged state. This is not apparent externally except from the color of the plates.
The positive plate of activated batteries has a brown coloring (Pb O
), whilst the negative plate is light
grey (Pb).

5.4.1.3.2 Dry Pre−charged Batteries

Dry pre−charged batteries are activated by the manufacturer. They can be started up simply by filling
the battery with accumulator acid of the specified acid density. The battery can then be operated in
the navigation installation without any further delay. This however applies only to brand new batteries,
since these batteries are extremely sensitive to climatic conditions.If dry pre−charged batteries are
stored for some time without being filled with acid, the plates will gradually become deactivated. This
process is accelerated in a moist or warm environment.They will be completely deactivated after
about 6 months, and the battery must be treated and started up in almost the same way as a non−acti-
vated battery. The initial charging procedure will take more or less time depending on the storage peri-
od and the state of the plates.

5.4.1.3.3 Non Pre−charged Batteries

These batteries have the longest initial charging period. They can be recognized by the fact that the
acid density drops substantially 1 to 2 hours after filling (density <1.15 kg/l), and/or the acid tempera-
ture rises by a few degrees.

Ed. 01.12 5−15

CVOR 431
Maintenance Operation and Maintenance

5.4.1.3.4 Initial Charging

WARNING

There is a particular risk during the charging procedure, since oxyhydrogen gas develops
in the gassing level of the battery acid is reached. It is therefore forbidden to use naked
flames or incandescent bodies in the vicinity of accumulators. Sufficient ventilation should
be provided for the battery compartment. The acid vapors are aggressive, therefore care
should be taken of clothing.
The battery manufacturers specify various methods with settings and nominal data. The appropriate
instructions are contained in the handling specifications accompanying with each battery. A constant
current charge (I−characteristic) is used for the battery charged power supply in the navigation instal-
lation. Two test shunts, which generate a voltage drop of 2 mV/A, are installed in the BCPS. Current
measurements can thus be performed via the software.
The acid density and temperature must be measured and noted once an hour during the charging
procedure at every 6th or 3rd cell (test cells). The same applies to the battery voltage, which should
be measured at the battery poles. For voltage measurements see Chapter 5.4.1.1 ).The duration of
the charging procedure depends on the state of the plates, and should be at least 6 hours.The crucial
factor for determining the end of the charging procedure is that the battery voltage and the acid densi-
ty no longer rise over a test interval of 2 hours, and that the nominal values have been reached.If the
acid density and the battery voltage do not reach their nominalvalues despite absolute conformance
with the charging specifications, the charging procedure must be continued with the same charging
data for a further 10 hours. If the acid density still does not reach its nominal value, the acid density
must be adjusted. If the density is too low, higher−density acid (mixed acid) must be added. If the
acid density is too high, specially purified water must be used for topping up. The temperature and
acid level must be taken into consideration when measuring the density, in other words the nominal
acid density is valid when the acid level indicator is at max.

If water is lost during the charging procedure on account of gassing, the acid must be topped up with
specially purified water. If it is necessary to correct the acid density or acid level, the battery must be
topped up beforehand with specially purified water. If it is necessary to correct the acid density or acid
level, the battery must be charged again with the same charging values for approx. 1 hour in order
to make sure the acid is properly mixed. This is ensured by means of the gassing which results.The
acid temperature must be monitored during the charging procedure. This is particularly important in
case of high ambient temperatures. The acid temperature may not exceed 55 °C. If a temperature
of 50 °C is reached, a cooling period should be allowed until the temperature has dropped to 35 °C
again.
The battery is ready for service when the nominal values have been reached and each cell has the
correct acid level (max. marking of acid level indicator). Finally the outside of the battery should be
cleaned with water to remove acid and dirt. The battery should then be installed immediately in the
navigation installation, and operated in standby parallel mode. This procedure ensures that the bat-
tery is always charged, but that it is not operated close to the gassing level. The charge characteristic
of the BCPS (current/voltage characteristic or I−U characteristic) ensures that the limit values speci-
fied by the battery manufacturer are conformed with, including subsequently charging and discharg-
ing operation. No further measures are necessary.
NOTE: Each battery cell/battery must have the same charge or discharge state on account of the
series connection.
The following table summarizes the procedure.

5−16 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Maintenance

No. Procedure Duration in hrs Remarks

1 Filling with acid − See 5.4.1.2 (Preliminary Operations). Unscrew
inspection plugs, but leave over the hole in order
to prevent contamination whilst allowing gas to
escape.
2 Interval 2
3 Density measurements − The density provides information on the state of
plates. Densities less than 1.15 kg/l mean that
the battery has been stored for a long time or is
not pre−charged. A higher charging current can
be used in such cases.
4 Charging as per data, see 6 ... 55 The acid density and battery voltage should be
also WARNING in section measured every 1 or 2 hours. Note the values
5.4.1.3.4 . and compare with previous measurements and
nominal values. When the nominal values are
reached, stop charging and continue at No. 5 in
this table.
5 Interval 1
6 Acid level correction − With purified water.
7 Charging with data as No. 4 2 Repeat Nos. 7 to 9 until the acid density and bat-
in this table tery voltage cease to change when the previous
measurements, and the nominal values are
reached.
8 Interval 1
9 Acid density and battery −
voltage measurements
10 Set acid density and acid − If corrections are necessary, recommence at No.
level to nominal values. 7.
Screw on
inspection plugs.
11 Clean battery with water − See 5.4.1.2.4 (basic rules for handling batter-
(external surfaces) and ies).
grease poles.
12 Operate battery in standby −
parallel mode.

5.4.2 Care and Maintenance of the Lead Battery

5.4.2.1 Maintenance Accessories and Scope of Checks
The accessories below are required for monitoring and maintenance of the battery.
1 Acid syringe with areometer
1 Acid jug
1 Funnel non−metal
1 Container with specially purified water
Various cleaning agents (acid−resistant Vaseline, soda, cotton rags).
The maintenance chapters below refer to the scope of check to be carried out. The checks and related
operations should be performed regularly every 2 to 3 months. The Basic Rules for Handling Batteries
(see 5.4.1.2.4 ) should be observed.

Ed. 01.12 5−17

CVOR 431
Maintenance Operation and Maintenance

5.4.2.1.1 Keeping the Lead Battery Clean

The battery box with batteries, boxes, terminals and connections should be kept clean and dry. When
performing the regular check pay special attention to the poles and cell connections, since these are
particularly subject to acid aggression and susceptible to the formation of salt crystals, especially at
the plus−pole. The poles and cell connections should be greased slightly with an acid−resistant
Vaseline following cleaning.

5.4.2.1.2 Measuring the Acid Density (not for maintenance−free batteries)

The acid density should be measured using the areometer. False measurements can be avoided by
observing the rules see 5.4.1.2.4 . The density of accumulator acid is 1.24 ± 0.01 kg/l at 20 °C when
the battery is charged. If the temperature deviates substantially from the reference temperature of
20 °C, this should be taken into account when measurements are performed.

5.4.2.1.3 Topping Up the Cells (not for maintenance−free batteries)

The cells should be topped up in good time with specially purified water. A visual check of the cells
should be done approx. every 2 to 3 month. An acid level indicator with two markings 10 mm apart
is incorporated in one of the cells for determining the nominal acid level. If this indicator is missing,
the cells should be topped up to 15 mm above the top of the plates. It is not always possible to obtain
specially purified or desalinated water of the required quality at the point of installation. In countries
where the water quality is inadequate the specially purified or fully desalinated water in stock should
be checked before use in accordance with the handling specifications of the battery manufacturer
(test chemicals supplied if required). If the purified water does not meet the specifications, it must be
post−treated (ion exchanger or distilling apparatus − supplied on request) or suitable water must
be obtained.

CAUTION

The battery guarantee is only valid if the accumulator acid and water have the necessary
degree of purity.

5.4.2.1.4 Measuring the Cell Voltage

The nominal voltage of the lead cells has been fixed at 2.0 V. The no−load voltage is 2.04 to 2.1 V
depending on the acid density. The discharge voltage is dependent on the discharge current. The
higher the discharge current, the lower will be the cell voltage and vice versa. Under normal operating
conditions with trickle charging the cell voltage is 2.25 V.

In case of a failure or disconnection of the 230 or 115 V mains voltage resulting in discharging of the
batteries, the cell voltage will be 2.1...1.75 V after about 5 minutes up to disconnection of the PMM.
The cell voltage should not fall below 1.75 V during discharging. This is ensured by the supervision
of the (D)VOR installation. The cell voltage can be measured either as described in 5.4.1.1 or using
a multimeter. Only special test leads provided exclusively for battery measurements should be used,
however, due to the acid residues which may be present at the battery poles. It is sufficient to check
the voltage of all cells under charging current every 2 to 3 months.

5−18 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Fault Location

CHAPTER 6
FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR
6.1 FAULT LOCATION
6.1.1 General
Fault location in the CVOR System can be executed with the PC User Program (see Section 6.1.2)
or with the fault location support procedure in Section 6.1.3. You should print out all settings, BITE
values and monitor values of the transmitter, the monitor and LCP on the finally set system that has
reached operating temperature. This data consists of the reference values, a knowledge of which will
substantially facilitate troubleshooting. These values are assumed for the following troubleshooting
procedure. If HF modules are replaced, the printout should be updated because HF modules have
greater tolerances. This log of the ACTUAL state is a basis for the troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE: Both SB1, SB2 and SBA, SBB are used as term for sideband signals in CVOR/DVOR sys-
tems. SBA, SBB are used normally for CVOR (signals to dipole A or B), the terms SB1,
SB2 are generally used in other Navaids 400 systems.
6.1.2 Fault Evaluation with PC and PC User Program
Any fault is stored in the system memory, which occurs in the installation and is acknowledged by
the internal BIT and which leads to a WARNING or ALARM indication. Fault location in Navaids 400
can be performed by use of the BIT report in the PC User Program. This report is available in the con-
figuration menu of the PC User Program:
− Move mouse cursor to field TRANSMITTER or MONITOR or LRCI.
− Click twice left mouse button for more information about transmitter or monitor or LRCI. The ensu-
ing BIT results are displayed and can be interpreted or printed out.
6.1.3 Fault Location Support CVOR (50 W and 100 W)
In addition to the BIT fault report (see 6.1.2), the following fault location tables list typical faults, which
may occur in a CVOR installation. The tables contain 5 columns: Step, Fault, A to C. To execute fault
location in the following tables, start with left column and proceed to the right following A, B or C, and
then from next row in A to C, if necessary.
6.1.3.1 Power Supply and Module Indicators
The BIT fault report (see 6.1.2) indicates faulty operating voltages, so that the defective module
(AC/DC converter or DC/DC converter) can be defined and replaced. Before replacing the AC/DC
converters, check mains power supply. Before locating a fault, try to define roughly the defective func-
tional group, i.e. power supply, transmitter, antenna, monitor or LCP. A first localization is done by eval-
uating the LED indicators on the various modules (see Figs. 3−2, 3−3):
Step Fault A B C
1 ACC LED out? ACC switched to ON? Check power supply to
ACC or change ACC
2 DCC LED out? ACC switched to ON? Check power supply to
TX1/TX2 at PMM switched on? DCC or change DCC
3 LCP Live−lamp out? DC operating voltage ok? Reset LCP
4 MSP−CD Live−lamp out? DC operating voltage ok? Reset processor
5 MSG−C Live−lamp out? DC operating voltage ok? Reset processor
6 CSL MON1 LED lit? Monitor 1 faulty Check according to follow-
MON2 LED lit? Monitor 2 faulty ing tables 6.1.3.2 ff.
TX1 ON LED out? TX1 power supply on?
TX2 ON LED out? TX2 power supply on?

Ed. 05.06
01.04 6−1
CVOR 431
Fault Location Operation and Maintenance

6.1.3.2 Localization of the defective Equipment Part (1)

Step Fault A B C
1.1 Both monitors Feed the transmitting antenna If the fault disappears, search
show the same from the other transmitter. for it in the transmitter
fault.
Are both monitors fed from Is the transmitter correctly set? If yes, check the dipole
the same dipole via one line? and the line
1.2 The affiliation to The transmitting antenna or Check the levels of the return-
the transmitter the HF lines to the antenna ing HF signals:
or monitor is are defective. Antenna or cable defective
still unclear. TX1/2 BITE ADC−1: for:

ACA1R too high Carrier

ASB1R too high SBA (SB1)

ASB2R too high SBB (SB2)

Are the return signals in order This is an indication of a

when the transmitter is running fault in the antenna sy-
on dummy load? stem.

If no success, search directly

via the displayed monitor fault.
1.3 Only one moni- Continue searching for a
tor shows a monitor fault as from 8.1.
fault.

6.1.3.3 Status Check of the Microprocessor of the MSG−C (2)

Step Fault A B C
2.1 Status check The bottom LED on the The processor is running, ok.
by LEDs. MSG−C lights up continu-
ously. This is the Live lamp.

The bottom LED on the The processor has stopped. Attempt a reset; if the pro-
MSG−C is off or lights up with Every interruption is an indica- cessor stops again, the
brief interruptions. tion of a processor fault. MSG−C is defective. Do
not repeat this; the proces-
sor must start up itself and
must not stop.
The second LED from the top The LCP polls the transmitter, 1) Replace the MSG−C
on the MSG−C lights up at ok.
brief intervals. 2) Check the 64−pole flat
ribbon cables from BP−C,
The second LED from the top The LCP does not poll the connector X82, to LCP,
on the MSG−C stays perma- transmitter, or the transmitter is and connector X71/TX1
nently off. not receiving the data. (X72/TX2) to BP−T, con-
nector X70.

3) Otherwise, replace the

LCP
The top LED on the MSG−C The transmitter is not sending 1) The MSG−C is defec-
lights up at brief intervals. any data to the LCP tive, and must be replaced

The top LED on the MSG−C The transmitter is not respond- 2) Check the 64−pole rib-
stays permanently off. ing to the polling calls of the bon cable from BP−C
LCP. (X71/TX1 or X72/TX2), to
BP−T, connector X70.

6−2 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Fault Location
6.1.3.4 RF−Level too low or missing (3)

* 100 W version only

Step Fault A B C
3.1 One monitor Fault in the monitor dipole Fault in the HF cable from Search for the fault in the
good, one mo- monitor dipole to transmitter bad monitor and continue
nitor bad with 8.1.
3.2 Both monitors Search for the fault in the line
show the same from monitor dipole to trans-
fault. mitter or in the transmitter.
3.2.1 Antenna or Measure the leading HF sig- TX1/2 BITE ADC−1: ACA1 If the rated value is good,
cable defective. nal at the transmitter output. examine the monitor. If the
signal is too low, search
Check the returning signal at TX1/2 BITE ADC−1: ACA1R for the fault in the transmit-
the transmitter output. normal? Otherwise, check the ter.
impedance of the transmitter’s
termination.
3.2.2 Transmitter in- CSB power correctly set? TX1/2−Adjustm. CSB−Power? The nominal value should
correctly set. be set here.
3.2.3 Transmitter RF CSB power switched off via TX1/2 BITE Digital: CSB−Power State must
power off? the control bit? CSB−Power State? be ON.
3.2.4 Supply voltage One or several supply volt- MON1/2 BITE Measurement: Nominal voltage ±5 %; in
for HF section? ages considerably below the DCC−MV TX1/2 (+28 V) the event of a fault, re-
minimum? supplies the modulators. place the power supply,
DCC−MV or DCC−28*.
TX1/2−BITE ADC−2: V281
(+28 V) supplies CA−100* .
3.2.5.1 Synthesizer Synthesizer operating outside MON1/2 Measurement:
of the frequency range from Carrier Frequency?
108 to 118 MHz Both monitors show a fre- Replace the synthesizer.
quency error.
Only one monitor shows a fre- Replace corr. MSP−CD or
quency error. check cable; see 8.6, 8.7.
3.2.5.2 Synthesizer Synthesizer HF output level TX1/2 BITE Digital: Replace the synthesizer.
too low. Synth. Level CSB−Signal?
3.2.6 Switched off because the con- TX1/2 BITE Digital: If yes, continue with
trol loop has a discontinuity. Loop Modulator CSB−1? 3.2.6.1.
3.2.6.1 Control loop of First set CSB=0 W. RF−Level >50 %:
the transmitter Then set CSB=5 W or less. control loop open, thin HF − Check cable
has a disconti- cable has come off CA−100,
nuity. or has been pressed out of − Check cable
CCP−V,
Directional coupler in the − Replace CA−100*
CA−100* defective or has a
discontinuity,
MOD 110 for CSB is defective − Replace MOD−110
or CCP−V defective for CSB
− Replace CCP−V
3.2.6.2 Check ampli- First set CSB=0 W, 30 % < RF−Level <40 % Modulation depth at nomi-
tude control Then set CSB=0.1 Pnom. Control loop is good. nal power is reduced
loop. CA−100 only operating with Replace CA−100*.
partial power.
3.2.7 Control signal from the TX1/2 BITE ADC2: Substantially less than the
MSG−S is too low. Set the CSB_1S2, CSB_1_ST_6 at the nominal value.
transmitter’s nominal power. nominal value? Replace the MSG−S

Ed. 01.04 6−3

CVOR 431
Fault Location Operation and Maintenance

6.1.3.5 Modulation Depth of the Carrier is too low (4)

Applicability: CVOR: 9960 Hz auxiliary carrier, identity and voice, not for 30 Hz AM composed of carrier and sideband.
DVOR: 30 Hz AM, identity and voice, not for the 9960 auxiliary carrier, which is composed of carrier and
sideband.
* 100 W version only
Step Fault A B C
4.1 One monitor Search for the fault in the bad Condition: neither monitor may
good, one monitor and continue with 8.1. have more than 110 % RF
monitor bad level; otherwise, measuring er-
rors may occur.
4.2 Both monitors Search for the fault in the Condition: neither monitor may
show the same transmitter. have more than 110 % RF
fault. level; otherwise, measuring er-
rors may occur.

TX1/2 BITE ADC−1: Check the impedance of

ACA1R normal? the transmitter’s termina-
tion if ACA1R is substan-
tially higher.
4.2.1 Adjustment er- Modulation depth correctly − Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM Correctly set modulation
ror set? − Mod. Depth Voice AM* depths.
− Mod. Depth Identity AM
4.2.2 Limiting in the CA−100* goes into limiting TX1/2 BITE ADC−1:
HF power sec- too early. ACM1 higher than normal? Replace CA−100*
tion
Halve the set power "Carrier
Power":
− Mod. depth is increased: CA−100* defective
− Mod. depth remains: Other fault
4.2.3 Carrier modulator MOD−110 TX1/2 BITE ADC−1:
goes into limiting. ACM1 normal or lower? Replace MOD−110 (CSB)

Halve the set power "Carrier

Power":
− Mod. depth is increased: MOD−110 (CSB) faulty
− Mod. depth remains: Other fault
4.3 Control signals Control signal from the CSB_1_S2 normal? If no, replace MSG−S.
MSG−S is not correct. CSB_1_ST6 normal?
4.3.1 30 Hz FM index is wrong, too Is Mod. Index 30 Hz FM cor- Replace MSG−C; if nec-
low or 0. rectly set? essary, replace also
The FM is generated on the MSG−S.
MSG−C together with the
MSG−S.
4.3.2 The modulation depth of the Transmitter Commands: Identity must be "ON".
identity is wrong or is missing. − Is "Identity OFF"?
− Is Mod. Depth Identity AM
set correctly?

Set output power to 0.5 Pnom:

− Is the identity then OK? If yes, CA−100* or
To recheck this, you may MOD−110 (CSB) are
need to set Ident CW− overdriven; see 4.2.2 and
Mode 4.2.3.

6−4 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Fault Location
Step Fault (4 cont.) A B C
4.3.3 The modulation depth of the Re−check under ’TX1/2 BITE If these signals are not
identity is wrong and, inde- ADC−2’: good, replace MSG−S or
pendently of the transmitted ID_ST_2 and ID_ST_5 MSG−C.
power, the control signal is
wrong.
4.3.4 Ident Morse code is not work- Is the code correctly set? Replace MSG−C
ing or is defective. The Morse code is generated
completely on the MSG−C.

6.1.3.6 Modulation by Sidebands too low or wrong (5)

This description concerns signals that are composed of carrier (CSB) and sideband signals (SB). Here, not only the right level
conditions of CSB and SB must be ensured, but also the right phase. Errors of the sidebands almost always lead to azimuth
errors. Both error types must be considered in relation to one another.
Step Fault A B C
5.1 One monitor Search for the fault in the bad Condition: neither monitor may
good, one monitor and continue with 8.1. have more than 110 % RF
monitor bad level; otherwise, measuring er-
rors may occur.
5.2 Both monitors Search for the fault in the Condition: neither monitor may
show the same transmitter. have more than 110 % RF
fault. level; otherwise, measuring er-
rors may occur.

TX1/2 BITE ADC−1: Otherwise, check the im-

ACA1R normal? pedance at the corre-
ASB1R and ASB2R normal? sponding transmitter ter-
mination.
5.2.1 Amplitude TX1/2 Adjustments:
wrong Level of the sideband set cor- − SBA Power Level
rectly? − SBB Power Level
Phase of the sideband set − SBA Phase Adjustment
correctly? − SBB Phase Adjustment
5.2.2 One or both SB modulator(s) SB power too low? If ASB1 and ASB2 deviate
is/are not producing enough Check the test output for side by less than ±5 % from
modulation depth. band forward signal: the previously measured
TX1 BITE ADC−1: value in the same operat-
ASB1 and ASB2, right or too ing state, the output level
low? is good, and the fault is
presumed in the phase.
Continue with 5.2.3 ff.

Carrier level too high. Check Ensure the correct carrier

whether carrier power is cor- level.
rectly set; forward ACA1 right
or too high?
5.2.2.1 The synthesizer does not os- MON1/2 Measurement: If the frequency is wrong,
cillate in the range from 108 to Carrier Frequency? replace SYN.
118 MHz.

Synthesizer output level too TX1/2 BITE Digital: Level too low, replace
low Level SB1: BFSBA0 ok? SYN.
Level SB2: BFSBA0 ok?

Ed. 01.04 6−5

CVOR 431
Fault Location Operation and Maintenance

Step Fault (5 cont.) A B C

5.2.2.2 Supply voltage: The control 28V present? Otherwise, replace
signals at the output of the MON1/2 BITE Measurement: DCC−MV.
modulators ASB1 or ASB2 are 28V DCC−MV > 26.5V?
lower than in the basic setting.
5.2.2.3 The control signals at the out- Compare the control signals If SB1A_ST3 and
put of the modulators ASB1 or SB1A_ST3 and SB2A_ST3 SB2A_ST3 are equal to or
ASB2 are lower than in the with the original values. more than originally, re-
basic setting. place the corresponding
modulator.
The fault is unlikely to be
caused by the CCP−V.

If SB1A_ST3 and SB2A_ST3 Replace MSG−S, possibly

are lower or zero, then control replace MSG−C.
by the MSG−S is defective.
5.2.3 Side band and carrier phases do not match.
5.2.3.1 Wrong carrier First check the carrier phase. TX−1 Measurement:
phase CSB RF Phase Measurement
Is the original value of ±5°
reached?

TX1/2 BITE ADC−1:

BU_MOD_C1?

TX1/2 Miscellaneous:
MOD−CSB−1 Sign Control?

Do both have the original

value?

BU_MOD_C1 should lie within

the range from +2V to +8V.

Phase adjustment of carrier is Replace:

not possible ifBU_MOD_C1 − MOD−110 (CSB)
lies between −0.5 and +1.5 V − CCP−V
or between 9 and 27 V. − (possibly MSG−C )
5.2.3.2 Wrong SBA Check the side band phase. TX1/2 Adjustments:
phase SBA Phase Adjustm. Original value?

TX1/2 Measurement:
SBA RF Phase Measurement Do both values agree to
±5°?
TX1/2 Miscellan.:
MOD−SB1 Sign Control Original value?

TX1/2 BITE ADC−1:

BU_PH_SB1 Original value?

The value must change with In the event of a deviation,

the phase setting of SB1. replace:
− MOD−110 (SBA)
− (possibly CCP−V)
− MSG−S or MSG−C

6−6 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Fault Location
Step Fault (5 cont.) A B C
5.2.3.3 Phase of sideband A wrongly Set the level of sideband B to 0. If a module has been re-
set. Change the phase of SBA until placed, first set the original
Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM reaches value; only check the mini-
a minimum. Add or subtract mum and maximum.
90°. Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM must Change them only if re-
reach a maximum. quired.
Set the level of sideband B back
to normal.
5.2.3.4 Wrong SBB Check the sideband phase. TX1/2 Adjustments:
phase SBB Phase Adjustm. Original value?

TX1/2 Measurement:
SBB RF Phase Measurement Do both values agree to
±5°?
TX1/2 Miscellan.:
MOD−SB2 Sign Control Original value?

TX1/2 BITE ADC−1:

BU_PH_SB2 Original value?

The value must change with In the event of a deviation,

the phase setting of SB2. replace:
− MOD−110 (SBB)
− (possibly CCP−V)
− MSG−S or MSG−C
5.2.3.5 Phase of sideband B wrongly Set the level of sideband A to If a module has been re-
set. 0. Change the phase of SBB placed, first set the original
until Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM value; only check the mini-
reaches a minimum. Add or mum and maximum.
subtract 90°. Mod. Depth 30 Change them only if requi-
Hz AM must reach a maxi- red.
mum.
Set the level of sideband A
back to normal.
CAUTION:
If the side band phase is offset from the right value by 180°, a perfect maximum is the result,
but the azimuth angle rotates in the wrong direction. The original angle values must be re-
stored before final commissioning.

6.1.3.7 Wrong Carrier Frequency (6)

Step Fault A B C
6.1 One monitor Search for the fault in the bad
good, one monitor and continue with 8.1.
monitor bad
6.2 Both monitors Is the right frequency en- TX1/2 Adjustments: Replace the synthesizer if
show wrong tered? Transmitter Frequency? the set and measured fre-
frequency va- quencies deviate from one
lues. another by more than
1.2 kHz.

Ed. 01.04 6−7

CVOR 431
Fault Location Operation and Maintenance

6.1.3.8 Azimuth Indication (7)

Step Fault A B C
7.1 One monitor Search for the fault in the bad
good, one monitor and continue with 8.1.
monitor bad
7.2 Both monitors Check the following values on TX1/2 Adjustments:
show wrong va- both monitors: Azimut Alignment correctly set?
lues.
MON−1/2 Measurement:
− Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM 30 ±2 % ?
− Mod. Index 30 Hz FM 16 ±2 % ?
− Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM 30 ±2 % ?
7.2.3 Measure the azimuth values The measured azimuth angle One sideband is missing
as a function of the geograph- does not change continuously or has a phase offset by
ical angle. Feed one monitor with the position of the monitor 90°.
input with the signal of the dipole, but has only two values
roof edge portable monitor di- that differ by 180°.
pole and record the azimuth
values and 30 Hz AM in 45° The displayed azimuth values One sideband is too small
increments. does not change continuously or has a wrong phase.
with the geographical mea-
sured angle.
Has Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM
Maxima and Minima?
7.2.3.1 Locate the de- Check settings and measured Check on the activated side-
fective side- values. band:
band.
TX1/2 Adjustments: Deviation from the set-
SBA/SBB Power Level tings?
If yes, continue with 5.2.1

TX1/2 Measurement: Deviation from the set-

SBA/SBB Amplitude Measu- tings?
rem. If yes, continue with 5.2.3.

TX1/2 Adjustments: Deviation from the set-

SBA/SBB Phase Adjustment tings?
If yes, continue with 5.2.3.

TX1/2 Measurement: Deviation from the set-

SBA/SBB RF−Phase Measu- tings?
rem. If yes, continue with 5.2.3.
7.2.3.2 Is the direction of rotation of When you walk around the Search for the position of
the azimuth correct? system in clockwise direction, the greatest azimuth error.
the azimuth angle must in- Only set the sideband
crease: level to "0" that does not
Wrong direction of rotation? influence Mod. Depth 30
Hz AM or only has a slight
Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM influence on it. Change the
constant over the azimuth? phase of the remaining
sideband by 180°.

6−8 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Fault Location
6.1.3.9 Fault in the Monitor (8)

The fault is presumed in the monitor. As both monitors are independent of one another, only one monitor will show the fault.

Step Fault A B C
8.1 Status check The third LED from above on The processor is running, ok
by LEDs the MSP−CD lights up contin-
uously. This is the Live lamp.

The third LED from above on The processor has stopped. Attempt a reset; if the pro-
the MSP−CD is off or lights Every interruption is an indica- cessor stops again, the
up with brief interruptions. tion of a processor fault. MSP−CD is faulty, re-
place.
The second LED from the top The LCP polls the monitor, ok.
on the MSP−CD lights up at
brief intervals.
The LCP does not poll the
The second LED from the top monitor, or the monitor is not 1) Replace MSP−CD
on the MSP−CD stays per- receiving the data. 2) Replace LCP
manently off.
The top LED on the MSP−CD The monitor sends data to the
lights up at brief intervals. LCP, ok

The top LED on the MSP−CD

stays permanently off. The monitor is not responding The MSP−CD is defective;
to the polling calls of the LCP. replace it.
The bottom LED indicates the The LED is bright when the
identity tone. 1020 Hz identifier tone is pres-
See: 4.3.2 to 4.3.4. ent.
8.2 Check with the The test generator on the CSL MON−1/2 Measurement: The MSP−CD module
test generator generates normal navigation contains the complete sig-
signals in 45° increments of − TSG RF−Level nal processing and evalu-
the azimuth, as well as one − TSG Azimuth ation circuitry.
without 30 Hz modulation and − TSG Mod.Depth 30Hz AM
one without 9960 Hz auxiliary − TSG Mod.Depth 9960Hz AM
carrier. With the hexadeci- − TSG Mod. Index 30Hz FM
mally coded switch on the
CSL, the corresponding chan- The MSP−CD is defective if In the event of a fault, re-
nel is set and is fed into the one or several of these signals place the MSP−CD.
monitor instead of the demo- show(s) the same fault as in Calibrate the new one.
dulated HF signal. the case of the transmitter. Be-
fore replacing the MSP−CD,
check the calibration of the in-
correctly displayed value.
8.3 Checking the All TSG signals are displayed The branches: band filter, HF
HF branch of correctly, but the monitor amplifier, AGC setting and de-
the MSP−CD shows incorrect signals of the modulator are not used by the
transmitter. TSG signals. These faults can-
not be detected via the TSG.

Change the AGC value until If 100 % cannot be set, or

the RF level is at 100±5 %. only in the event of a con-
siderably deviating AGC,
the HF branch of the MSP
is defective; replace and
readjust the MSP−CD.
8.4 Both MSP−CD The modules have been dam- Replace both MSP−CD.
show the same aged, e.g. by a lightning strike.
value after 8.2.

Ed. 01.04 6−9

CVOR 431
Fault Location Operation and Maintenance

Step Fault (8 cont.) A B C

8.5 The identity is Is the second monitor working One monitor is good.
not displayed. properly?

If the modulation depth of the The second monitor does not The corresponding MSP is
identifier is greater than 4%, detect the identity. defective and must be re-
the bottom green LED must placed.
indicate the identity tone.
8.6 One monitor The monitor measures the fre- MSP−CD defective Replace MSP−CD.
shows a wrong quency of both transmitters
carrier frequen- wrongly or shows 0 kHz.
cy.
8.7 Both monitors measure the Wrong frequency, but f  0 Synthesizer defective
frequency of one transmitter
correctly, but measure the fre- Frequency 0 kHz or 0.1 kHz. Synthesizer defective or
quency of the other wrongly. 64−pole flat ribbon cable
from BP−C, connector
X71/TX1 (X72/TX2) to
BP−T, connector X70, de-
fective or has come loose.

6−10 Ed. 01.04

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Fault Location
6.1.3.10 Fault of the Local Control Panel (LCP) (9)

The LCP is the focal point for communication which interfaces the local PC and the Remote Control to the transmitters and
monitors. The LCP evaluates directly the battery and the mains monitoring. The LCP consists of two boards: LC−CPU, LCI.

Step Fault A B C
9.1 Live lamp off LCP board: live lamp on LC− Standstill of LCP−processor Measure at back panel
CPU off. Liquid crystal display or/and possibly no power sup- BP−C the ’5VK’ voltage
screen is dark. Keys do not ply. against GND:
function.

ALARM and NORMAL remain Reset Processor of LC−CPU If 5VK is  4,9 V change
lit, LCD screen is dark. board. ALARM and NORMAL DCC−3−05.
indicators light simultaneously,
until processor is initializing If 5VK is
4,9 V, check
and extinguish after that. 14−pole flat ribbon cable
from CSL front (connector
Execute lamp test: Press si- X4) to LCP ( connector
multaneously keys XMTR and CT5).
MON at front panel. Indicators
must light, the buzzer gives a If lamp test is not success-
short tone. For this test the ful though the 5VK voltage
processor and software must is ok, the LCP is faulty. Re-
run. place completely the LCP.
LCI: LCD LCP board: live lamp on Check −15 V voltage supply If ok, replace LCI board
screen dark LC−CPU on. from CSL. with LCD display.
If check fauls again, re-
place CSL.
9.2 Live lamp on Transmitter rack, LCP: The At least one *.sit file is missing
display in MAIN STATUS field or damaged in the LCP.
indicates WARNING.
The RAM−check states a fault.
Call in ADRACS ’RC Manage-
ment’ submenu ’Control’, resp.
start ’MCS File Transfer’ tool,
⇒ select menu ’File Transfer’
⇒ select function ’Show RAM
Directory’ All files available?
If necessary, restore the
floppy backup of the *.sit
files.
9.3 Live lamp on Transmitter rack, LCP: The The *.sit files are ok.
LCD screen shows ’Actual
Installation CVOR 431’.
"Maintenance Alert Warning" e.g. the battery at the LCP is Backup data. Replace the
in the LCD screen is indi- weak, UBat < 3.2 V . Lithium battery at the LCP.
cated. Call Menu ’Alert Indica-
tion’ for more information.
9.4 No commu- The LCP is ok. Indications Interface cable between PC Check cable? Are the orig-
nication be- and controls directly at the and LCP is defective or con- inal cable used:
tween PC and LCP are operating, but opera- tacts are contaminated. Connector 9−pole, 0−Mo-
LCP. tion via PC is not possible. dem cable?

Configuration of PC is not ok: Check serial interface port

− Is the correct port used at at PC?
the PC?
− Is any other program Check programs.
running at this port?
− PC User Program is Re−load PC User Pro-
missing or damaged? gram if necessary.

Ed. 01.12
01.04 6−11
CVOR 431
Fault Location Operation and Maintenance

Step Fault (9 cont.) A B C

9.5 No interroga- RXDA LED (second from Transmitter and monitor are The LCP interrogates only
tions to monitor above) at the MSP−CD or switched on? processors which are
or transmitter. MSG−C does not sparkle switched on.
regularly (This LED indicates
received interrogations from Check, if 64−pole flat ribbon Replace or fix cables.
LCP to monitor or transmitter). cables from BP−C, connector
X82 to LCP and from BP−C,
connector X71/TX1 (X72/TX2)
to BP−T, connector X70, are
defective or have come loose.
9.5 Both MSP−CD and both The LCP is presumably defec- Replace the LCP comple-
cont. MSG−C are not interrogated. tive. tely.

At least one MSP−CD and The fault can be located possi- Replace first MSP−CD or
MSG−C communicates with bly in the LCP or in the trans- MSG−C, than LCP (or
the LCP. mitter or monitor subassem- LC−CPU) if replacement
blies (MSP or MSG−C) of MSG−C/MSP−CD was
not successful.
9.6 LCP OIO in/out Check line connection at con- Connection is faulty or broken Repare the connection line
signals do not nector OIO LCP IN or OUT.
operate Refer to 2.3.5.12 or 2.3.5.13 External connection is ok. Check ext. signalling de-
for pin assignment. vice.

Do not short circuit the 5 Vdc Check internal connection: flat If test failes, the flat ribbon
at pin14 (OIO LCP IN) or 25 ribbon cable from LCP to con- cable is presumably de-
(OIO LCP OUT). nectors on top. fective.

Both are ok: Open dialog win- Reinstall software (applica-

dow ’LRCI − OIO’ to check the tion, oio−file) or the LCP is
in− or output lines (see exam- presumably defective. Re-
ple of ADRACS window be- place the LCP completely.
low).

x
Indication of the state of outputs:
output can be checked with activation
per click in the correspondent field and
measurement at the connector OIO LCP OUT.

Indication of the state of inputs:

shows input state at the connector OIO LCP IN.
No indication means no current flow

Dialog window LRCI − OIO for check of auxiliary LCP Input or Output

6−12 Ed. 01.12

01.04
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs
6.2 REPAIRS
6.2.1 General
The repair activities are designed to restore the ready condition of a faulty system in the shortest
possible time. The system is repaired by replacing the defective subassembly. The defective subas-
semblies can then be sent to the manufacturer for repair.
NOTE: Subassemblies and components which are sent to the manufacturer for repair or returns
must be packed in a way that no damage of the parts could arise. It is recommended to
use the original packing, e.g. of the spare part, or a comparable packing in corresponding
performance to ensure a safe shipping of defective subassemblies or components. Han-
dling of subassemblies with electrostatically sensitive components see section 6.2.1.1.3 .
The mark (!) used in Fig. 6−3 (Adjustments after change) means an important action after repair. Indi-
cated adjustments after change are normally performed using the PC User Program (measurement
values) and if necesssary repeating the correspondent sections of the Alignment Procedure.
6.2.1.1 Safety Precautions
6.2.1.1.1 General Regulations
The safety regulations laid down by the local authorities (e.g. concerning accident prevention, work
safety or operation of electronic equipment and navigation systems) must be observed at all times.
The purpose of safety precautions is to protect persons and property, and they must always be heed-
ed. See also Part 1, Section 1.4.
Work should not be carried out outside the shelter or on the antenna system during a storm, due to
the danger of injury by lightning.
Station shutdown due to repair and maintenance: The responsible authorities must be notified of any
work which may require operation of the system to be interrupted, in accordance with national regula-
tions.
Change of parameters is allowed only by maintenance people with specific access level to the PC
User Program (ADRACS or MCS). Changes to the established monitor alarm limits should only be
done during flight check procedure.
6.2.1.1.2 Work on the Equipment
In order to avoid risks to persons and consequential damage to subassemblies, the relevant trans-
mitter must be switched off with switch TX1 or TX2 prior to removing or inserting a subassembly or
prior to removing a plug−in connector during the course of repair and maintenance activities (see
Section 6.2.3.1 for exceptions). Switches TX1 and TX2 deactivate the DC converters for the trans-
mitter 1 and transmitter 2 subassemblies respectively. The subassemblies which are common to both
transmitters are exceptions: they can be switched on with TX1 or TX2 and off with TX1 and TX2. Switch
NAV deactivates the complete equipment.
The battery−charged power supply (BCPS) must always be disconnected from the mains before any
work, other than measuring the voltage is carried out on it.
Burned fuses must be changed only once. Use same type. If burned again check for short circuits!
RF cables must not be bent to a radius of less than 50 mm.
6.2.1.1.3 Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Subassemblies
The ILS and (D)VOR installations contain subassemblies (plug−in cards) equipped with components
which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. When replacing subassemblies and plug−in cards

Ed. 11.05
01.04 6−13
CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance
containing electrostatically sensitive components, special precautionary measures should be taken
during removal, transport and installation in order to prevent damage to the components. We refer
to the customer documentation of the manufacturer.

Subassemblies which contain electrostatically sensitive components are

marked with this symbol.

If any of the maintenance personnel need to touch one of these subassemblies, they should place
both hands flat on a grounded conductive surface for a few seconds to eliminate static charges. The
subassembly can be touched − preferably at an insulator (board edge, lever mechanism, etc.) − as
soon as the potential has been equalized in this manner. It is advisable to avoid touching the contacts
of the plug−in connectors, the conductor paths and the components themselves. Some of the subas-
semblies must be left in their antistatic packaging or plastic bags as long as possible. The special
procedures described below should be followed when subassemblies and plug−in boards are
replaced within the framework of repair and maintenance activities, due to the risk of damage to elec-
trostatically sensitive components.
To remove a subassembly:
− Switch off the system before beginning the replacement procedure.
− Eliminate any static body charges by touching the frame of the grounded system (rack) with both
hands.
− Remove the subassembly and lay it down on a bench with a grounded conductive worktop.
− Pack the subassembly in an antistatic plastic bag and send it off to the manufacturer for repair.
To install a subassembly:
− Eliminate any static body charges by touching the frame of the grounded system (rack) with both
hands.
− Remove the subassembly from the antistatic plastic bag.
− Install the subassembly.
− Switch on the system again.

6.2.1.1.4 Components Containing Beryllium Oxide Ceramics

Some of the subassemblies are equipped with transistors containing beryllium oxide. These transis-
tors are in line with the latest state of the art and are in use all over the world. They are absolutely harm-
less in a sealed, compact condition. Beryllium oxide dust, which is detrimental to health, may however
be produced if the transistors are opened. They should not be dismantled or shattered. This applies
likewise if they are scrapped or disposed of. The following subassemblies contain power transistors
with beryllium oxide:
− Modulator 110 : Transistor types BLF242, BLF 245
Modulator 110P : Transistor types BLF244, BLF 246
− CA−100C : Transistor type BLF248

6.2.1.1.5 Handling Lead Batteries

See chapter 5, Section 5.4 ff and Part 1, Section 1.4.

6−14 Ed. 11.05

01.04
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs
6.2.2 Correcting a Processor Standstill
See Fig. 6−1.
A processor standstill may result when subassemblies are removed under voltage or on account of
static charges which are discharged from the operators to the rack. This condition is always the result
of an operator error. It is therefore advisable to pinpoint the causes as soon as it happens. There are
in fact only four possible causes, though these may occur in combination.
− Insufficient grounding of the rack
− Unsuitable and/or incorrectly cleaned floor covering
− Non−observance of clothing regulations by personnel
− Carelessness of the personnel due to inadequate information.
Any causes determined should be remedied immediately by means of appropriate measures: the
symptom will not then recur. A distinction should be made in case of a processor standstill between
a failure in the monitor processor and a failure in the transmitter processor. Both the behavior of the
system and the measures to be taken are different.

6.2.2.1 Failure in the Monitor Processor

The LCP shows MON1 FAULTY or MON2 FAULTY due to to the failed processor. If both monitors fail,
the transmitter will be shut down. Remedy:
− Open front door of the rack.
− CPU live lamp on the MSP must be lit. If the live lamp is off, press reset button on MSP.
− Close door again.
− Perform login and enter password if more commands must be entered, otherwise this step may
be ignored.
The installation is then fully operational again.

6.2.2.2 Failure in the Transmitter Processor

If lamps light up on the system in a manner which has no meaning and cannot be interpreted, then
go out again after a short time, then the processor has fallen out of synchronism temporarily on
account of an interference pulse, but has been able to recover. If this symptom is encountered repeat-
edly, the causes should be determined. If the transmitter fails on account of a processor standstill,
this is displayed by means of TX1 or TX2 WARNING on the LCP. Remedy:
− Open front door of the rack.
− CPU live lamp on the MSG−C must be lit. If live lamp is off, press reset button on MSG−C.
− Close door again.
− Perform login and enter password if more commands must be entered, otherwise this step may
be ignored.
The installation is then fully operational again.

6.2.2.3 Failure in the LC−CPU Processor (LCP)

If the LCP screen is dark and keys on front panel do not function a LCP−processor fails on account
of a processor standstill, a first measure is to reset the LC−CPU board. Remedy:
− Open front door of the rack.
− Live LED on LC−CPU must light. If it is off, press button board reset on LC−CPU.
− Close door again.
The installation should be fully operational again.

Ed. 11.05
01.04 6−15
CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

HD LED LC−CPU
n.a. with LC−CPU 83135 21404

R1 LCD brightness
CPU live lamp, green
Reset switch

MSP−CD
1)

Modem*

Modem*

Modem*
TXDA

VAM*
RXDA
MDS−V8*

CPU live
MSP−1

MSP−2

−−
−−

DCC−3−05
LCP

ETX−CPU*
CSL

pushbutton manual reset

Ê ÊÊ
Ê ÊÊ morse code indication

Ê
Ê ÊÊ
ÊÊ
earphone jack (voice, ATIS)

Ê ÊÊ
MSG−C
MOD−110P***
MOD−110 or

Ê ÊÊ
MOD−110

MOD−110

DCC−MV

TXDA
MSG−C
MSG−S

Ê ÊÊ
RXDA
SYN

CCP

Ê
Ê ÊÊ
ÊÊ
Ê ÊÊ
MOD−110P***
MOD−110** or

Ê ÊÊ
MOD−110**

MOD−110**

pushbutton manual reset

DCC−MV**
MSG−C**
MSG−S**

Ê ÊÊ
CPU live
SYN**

CCP**

Ê ÊÊ
Ê ÊÊ
Ê
Ê
PMM
ÊÊ
ÊÊ Fuse F1 T1,0H 250V; F2 T6,3H 250V

Ê
Ê ÊÊ
ÊÊ
Ê ÊÊ
DCC−28

DCC−28

Ê ÊÊ
Ê
Ê ÊÊ
ÊÊ
Ê
Ê ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ACC**

−−

Ê ÊÊ
ACC
ACC

Ê
Ê ÊÊ
ÊÊ
front side

* optional ** not used in single version *** 50 W version only 1) 8PGC option 100 W version

Fig. 6−1 Push buttons and indications on the subassemblies LC−CPU, MSP and MSG−C

6−16 Ed. 01.12

01.04
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs
6.2.3 Replacing Subassemblies

WARNING

The heat sinks of the modulators (MOD−110P) and of the carrier amplifier (CA−100C)
may warm up during operation. This is normal and does not affect the function. When re-
placing these subassemblies it is recommended to let them cool down for a while or take
suitable measures (e.g. gloves). When replacing the subassemblies SYN und CCP avoid
touching the heat sinks of the MOD−110P.
6.2.3.1 Disconnecting the Voltage before Replacing Subassemblies

CAUTION
The voltage must always be disconnected before removing or installing subassemblies
(subject to only a very few exceptions). It is sufficient to switch off all the transmitter subas-
semblies, the DCC−MV and the DCC−28 with either of switches TX1 or TX2 on the PMM
subassembly. The transmitter subassemblies can also be switched off by means of a PC
command.
Before replacing an ACC−module the BCPS must always be disconnected from mains.
If a monitor subassembly is affected (MSP−CD), the associated DCC subassemblies
(DCC−3−05/1 and /2) must be switched off with both TX1 and TX2 on the PMM. The
DCC−03−05 cannot be switched off individually.
If the CSL must be changed, both TX1 and TX2 must be switched off beforehand.
The VAM, MODEM and the DCC−3−05 subassemblies may be removed and installed
when live. The special design of their contacts prevents damage from occurring.
6.2.3.2 Subassemblies in the Transmitter Rack and Power Supply
The table in Fig. 6−3 lists the work which may be necessary after a subassembly has been replaced.
Please also refer to Section 6.2.1.1 and 6.2.1.1.3 .
− The relevant transmitter must be de−energized before removing or installing subassemblies, pref-
erably by switching it off on the PMM subassembly. It should be noted that the following subassem-
blies are only de−energized if both switches (TX1 and TX2) and switch NAV (for CSL) on the PMM
are switched to off: LCP, DCC−3−05, CSL, MSP−CD, VAM.
− Several of the subassemblies have DIP switches or jumpers on their pc boards. It is essential to
check that the switches or jumpers on the new subassemblies are set to the same positions as
on the old subassemblies. Section 6.2.5 contains a list of the DIP switches and jumpers.
− To remove a printed circuit board assembly from the transmitter subrack release it with the front
levers of the board if available. Remove it carefully from the subrack. Regard the weight of the
MOD−110 and the CA−100C (100 W version) if removing them.
− Inserting the board regard the correct fitting to the guiding bars of the subrack. Press assembly
carefully in the socket on the backpanel.
− Some subassemblies in the assembly carrier have plug−in RF connections. These subassemblies
(e.g. MOD−110/110P, MSP, SYN, CCP etc.) may require some corrections to fit the RF connectors.
Take care for correct fitting. Sometimes it is recommended to use a suitable defitting tool.
The tool is used after withdrawing the respective subassembly to remove correctly the RF cables
from connector at the backpanel and, after replacing the subassembly, to insert the RF cables one
after the other.

Ed. 01.12
01.04 6−17
CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance
− Check that all the RF cables have been connected correctly before switching the transmitter on
again, and make sure that either the antenna or a dummy load is connected to the transmitter
output signals (CSB, SB1, SB2).

Ê Ê Ê Ê
Ê Ê Ê Ê
Ê Ê Ê Ê

Monitor & Control

RF filter RF filter

Modem*

Modem*

Modem*
1) BP−C

Ê Ê Ê Ê
VAM*
MDS−V8*

LCP
Dummy loads
PMC−D
MSP−1

MSP−2

Ê Ê Ê Ê
−−

ETX−CPU*
DCC−3−05
CSL

RFD Components

Ê Ê Ê Ê
Ê Ê Ê Ê
Ê
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
Ê
cooling baffle
Ê
Ê
Ê
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
Ê
MOD−110P***

Transmitter 1
MOD−110 or

Ê Ê Ê Ê
BP−T /TX1
MOD−110

MOD−110

DCC−MV
MSG−C
MSG−S

Ê Ê Ê Ê
SYN

CCP

Ê Ê Ê Ê
Ê Ê Ê CA−100/1
Ê
Ê Ê Ê Ê
Transmitter 2**
MOD−110P***
MOD−110** or
MOD−110**

MOD−110**

Ê Ê Ê Ê
DCC−MV**
MSG−C**
MSG−S**

Ê Ê Ê Ê
SYN**

CCP**

BP−T /TX2**

Ê Ê Ê Ê
Ê
Ê
PMM F2 F1
NAV TX1 TX2

Ê
Ê Ê
Ê
PMM Ê
Ê
Ê Ê Ê Ê
DC/DC conv. 100 W

Ê Ê Ê Ê
BP−DC

Ê Ê Ê Ê
DCC−28**

DCC−28

Ê Ê Ê CA−100/2**
Ê
Ê
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
Ê
Ê Ê Ê Ê
AC/DC converter

Ê Ê Ê Battery and power supply connection

Ê
ACC**

Ê Ê Ê Ê
ACC

ACC
−−

Ê
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
Ê
BP−BCPS
Ê
Ê
Subracks:

Mains connection and mains filter

Front Rear

* optional ** not used in single version *** 50 W version only 1) 8PGC option Version 100 W

Fig. 6−2 Locations in the CVOR rack

6−18 Ed. 05.06

01.04
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs
Subassemblies of the transmitter rack

Unit to be changed Preparation (see also Fig. 6−2) Adjustments after change
SYN − Adjust station frequency

MOD−110 − check RF level, modulation depths, phasing

MOD−110P − check RF level, modulation depths, phasing

CA−100C loosen 4 screws, remove cables check output power

CCP − (!) readjustment of transmitter neccessary

with calibrated MSP or external measuring
equipment

RFD/Filter loosen screws, remove cables −

MSG−S − (!) adjust or load all transmitter data

MSG−C * − −

MSP * − (!) calibrate monitor

CSL * − −
MDS−V8 (8PGC opt.) − check AGC in MSP

LCP complete remove cables, loosen 5 screws (!) re−load installation type, configuration,
LCP, LC−CPU remove cables, loosen screws site and PTT file, and user defined masks if
available.**

LCP, LCI remove LC−CPU, loosen screws −

VAM − check VAM settings

Modem LGM 28.8 − check modem settings
Modem LGM 1200MD − check modem settings
ETX−CPU remove interface cables check settings; spare ETX−CPU SW is al-
ready configured in flash disk as standard

DCC−3−05 − −
DCC−28 loosen screws on front panel −
DCC−MV loosen screws on front panel −
PMM loosen screws, remove cables −
ACC−54 loosen screws on front panel Check/match charging voltage

* Subassembly contains EPROM. Replacing EPROM refer to 6.2.3.2.1 and 6.2.3.2.2 .

** To reconfigure or update LCP software refer to 6.2.3.2.3 .

Fig. 6−3 Preparation and adjustments during a subassembly replacement

Ed. 01.12
01.04 6−19
CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

6.2.3.2.1 Replacing EPROM

NOTE: Before starting it is recommended to read out all parameters of the installation: Save all
parameters in a file (with ADRACS ’Data’ submenu ’Up−/Download Data’, resp. with
MCS ’Snapshot’ submenu ’Save’), make a printout of all parameters or write down manu-
ally the indicated parameters if other measures are not possible. It is also recommended
to generate a copy of the specific site files as backup:
− Using the PC User Program ADRACS, click on the ’Control’ button in the Main Status
window, select ’File Transfer’ and ’Copy SITE file to PC’ in the submenu.
Using the ’MCS File Transfer’ tool, select ’FILE OPERATIONS’ in the MASTER MENU,
select function ’COPY SITE FILE TO PC’.
− Copy all files with the extension:*.sit, *.oio, *.msk, *.ptt or *.dat.
The EPROM should always be replaced by qualified personnel only. The following subassemblies
contain EPROM which may need to be replaced: MSG−C, MSP, CSL (test generator). The locations
are shown in Section 6.2.5.
CAUTION
Since the EPROM are electrostatically sensitive components, the following safety precau-
tions must always be observed (see also Section 6.2.1.1.3 ): The person replacing the
EPROM should preferably not wear shoes with rubber or plastic soles, and should first
eliminate any static charges by touching the transmitter rack with both hands.
a) Switch off both transmitters: set the TX1 and TX2 switches on the PMM to OFF.
b) Release the MSG−C resp. MSP or CSL with the lever mechanism and remove it from the slide−in
chassis in the rack. Lay the subassembly down on an electronically conductive surface (e.g. on
the special packaging provided).
c) Remove the EPROM:
Identify the EPROM to be replaced by means of its inscription and note its orientation (notch on
one of the narrow sides). Lever the EPROM slowly out of the base by carefully applying a flat,
pointed object (e.g. a screwdriver) to the narrow sides alternately.
d) Fit the new EPROM:
Fit the new EPROM into the empty base in the same position. If the EPROM is swapped from one
unit to another, determine the correct orientation by comparing the two units. Before fitting the
EPROM, check that all the pins are aligned exactly. Press the two rows of pins into the base one
at a time.
e) Reinstall the MSG−C resp. MSP or CSL and lock it in position.
f) Execute the following checks after switching on the transmitter again:
− the live LED must light up (MSG−C, MSP)
− create new EPROM checksum for monitor 1 and 2 (refer to 6.2.3.2.2 ).
− all the transmitter and monitor settings must correspond to test reports.

6.2.3.2.2 Creating new Checksum for MSP EPROM in the PC User Program
Change of EPROM on MSP makes it necessary to create a new EPROM checksum:
− Select the station where the EPROM of MSP is changed.
− Using ADRACS: In the Detailed Status window, select menu ’Commands’, menu item ’More Com-
mands...’. The ’Commands’ dialog window appears. Select in menu ’Monitors’ the submenu ’Mon-
itor Miscellaneous’. Select command ’create EPROM checksum’. Click button ’program MON 1/2’
to create the new checksum. Click button ’Close’ to close the ’Commands’ window.

6−20 Ed. 07.06

01.04
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs
− Using MCS: In the 1st Equipment Level window (login−level: Maintenance), open the Monitor
commands by a right mouse−click on the subsystem label ’Monitor’. Select command ’Compute
EPROM Checksum’.
6.2.3.2.3 Replacing and Reconfiguring the Subassembly LCP
Before starting any replacement it is recommended to read out all parameters of the installation: Save
all parameters in a file (with ADRACS ’Data’ submenu ’Up−/Download Data’, resp. with MCS ’Snap-
shot’ submenu ’Save’), make a printout of all parameters or write down manually the indicated param-
eters if other measures are not possible.
It is also recommended to generate a copy of the specific site files as backup:
a) Using the PC User Program ADRACS, click on the ’Control’ button in the Main Status window, se-
lect ’File Transfer’ and ’Copy SITE file to PC’ in the submenu.
Using the ’MCS File Transfer’ tool, select ’FILE OPERATIONS’ in the MASTER MENU, select func-
tion ’COPY SITE FILE TO PC’.
b) Copy all files with the extensions *.sit, *.oio, *.msk, *.ptt or *.dat .
The LCP subassembly contains routines which allow to configure the LCP to the system ILS 420 or
CVOR/DVOR and which are used to update the firmware of basic ILS subassemblies. The LCP routine
checks the LCP hardware. During LCP reset and system start, two LCP screen contents are available:
− the LCP Control Menu (Fig. 6−4a), if buttons S1 and S4 have been pressed and hold,
− the LCP Warning text (Fig. 6−4b), if the LCP has been replaced and no configuration is set.

CAUTION

Do not use function S2 of LCP Control Menu unfounded. This feature is intended for fac-
tory use only or if the drive must be cleaned up, or to delete faulty *.sit or *.oio files.
To copy the LCP software to the LCP (see 6.2.3.2.4 ) use commands of the PC user program:
− Using the PC User Program ADRACS, click the ’Control’ button in the Main Status window, select
’File Transfer’. Select ADRACS command ’Copy PC file to RAM’.
− Using the ’MCS File Transfer’ tool, select ’FILE OPERATIONS’ in the MASTER MENU. Select MCS
command ’COPY PC FILE TO SITE’.
NOTE: If there is no communication to the LCP with the PC user program, the LCP control menu
offers to start a transfer routine with S3 to establish communication. Once the commu-
nication is available the LCP SW can be copied to LCP. If this fails, check the link to PC
or replace the CPU board which possibly is faulty.
a LCP Control Menu b
LCP WARNING
S1: Exit menu, start LCP operation Exit control menu to standard
used to delete bad or wrong No valid LCP station software found on
S2: Delete LCP drive d: all files .sit−files on drive d: of LCP drive c:
S3: Start Transfer to copy LCP−SW overwrite LCP.ZIP
S4: Start LGX bootloader (only ILS) update/load LG−X firmware Copy the actual LCP station software to the
S1,S4: Test LCP board with special Box Factory use only LCP

The LCP−Transfer software is started now

Press the button until beep sounded !
control buttons (S)
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Fig. 6−4 LCP front panel with LCP Control Menu and LCP Warning text (example)

Ed. 06.08
01.04 6−21
CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

6.2.3.2.4 Reconfigure the LCP board

The spare subassembly LCP is not configured to a specific subsystem (i.e. ILS 420 or CVOR/DVOR).
Configuration or update of the LCP software is performed with the PC user program.
NOTE: The LCP software upload comprises the file LCP.ZIP and in addition the conversion table
file konv_dat.dat (used with current NAV2K−SW (2nd generation) and from LCP−SW
V3.x). As a minimum also the *.sit file of the station has to be uploaded. If needed, copied
station files *.oio, *.msk, *.ptt or *.dat have to be transferred to the site again.
a) Restart the subsystem with power on. The LCP screen shows the warning text (Fig. 6−4b).
b) Copy the file LCP.ZIP for CVOR/DVOR to the LCP. The LCP.ZIP file is self extracting (extracted as
reu.exe; this file is not compatible to reu.exe of RCSE). After end of this job the LCP is ready.
NOTE: This copy mode must only be performed for the LCP.ZIP file. Other files (e.g. *.sit)
would be copied to a wrong directory, if this copy mode is used. Do not rename the
LCP.ZIP file!
c) From LCP−SW V3.x: Copy the conversion table file konv_dat.dat for CVOR/DVOR to the LCP.
NOTE: From SW V5.x this file is implemented in the LCP.ZIP file. It has not to be copied.
d) Further software upload (files: *.sit, *.oio, *.msk, *.ptt or *.dat) and configuration of the system is
to be done with the PC user program (ADRACS or MCS) as described in Chapter 4 "Alignment
Procedure", section 4.2.4.
e) Restart the system. Finally check all station settings in the LCP.
If the LCP software has been loaded, but not running correctly, it is recommended to reload or over-
write the LCP.ZIP file. This is performed with the LCP Control Menu and the PC user program:
a) Shutdown equipment with switches TX1 and TX2.
b) To start the special function menu, press buttons S1 and S4 simultaneously on the LCP immedi-
ately after power on with switches TX1 and TX2, and hold pressed until the LCP screen contains
Control menu information (see Fig. 6−4a).
c) Press button S3 at least 1 s to select "Start Transfer to copy LCP−SW" (Fig. 6−4a). This starts a
routine to establish communication between PC (user program) and the LCP.
Copy the file LCP.ZIP for CVOR/DVOR to the LCP with the PC user program. After end of this job
the LCP is ready.
d) From LCP−SW V3.x: Copy the conversion table file konv_dat.dat for CVOR/DVOR to the LCP.
NOTE: From SW V5.x this file is implemented in the LCP.ZIP file. It has not to be copied.
e) Further software upload (files: *.sit, *.oio, *.msk, *.ptt or *.dat) and configuration of the system is
to be done with the PC user program (ADRACS or MCS) as described in Chapter 4 "Alignment
Procedure", section 4.2.4.
f) Restart the system. Finally check all station settings in the LCP.
6.2.3.3 CVOR Antenna
A large number of settings must usually be re−made after replacing the CVOR antenna, the CVOR
matching device or the CVOR monitor dipole. This can require to perform steps of the alignment pro-
cedure as described in sections 4.3 to 4.4. For mechanical alignment of the CVOR antenna refer also
to section 2.2.3.2. If the CVOR antenna is replaced, a special flight test is also necessary.
6.2.4 Test after Repair
After repair, the installation is switched on as normal. The necessary adjustments indicated in Fig. 6−3
have to be performed. All parameters have to be within limits and the system state indicates NORMAL
again. The system is then operable.

6−22 Ed. 01.12

01.04
 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs
6.2.5 List of DIP Switches and Jumpers
6.2.5.1 General
Some of the subassemblies have DIP switches or jumpers on the component side. The jumpers act
either as on/off switches or as changeover switches. The DIP switches and jumpers can be set or
placed to particular positions in order to adapt universal subassemblies to specific equipment types.
Other switches or jumpers must be actuated for test and maintenance purposes, or in case of inter-
connection with a DME.
NOTE: Before installing a spare subassembly, check against the replaced subassembly and correct
position of the DIP switches and jumpers if necessary.
Overview of subassemblies containing DIP switches and jumpers:
No. Subassembly Short name Reference number
1 Control and Selector Logic CSL 83135 23100

2 Modulation Signal Generator Control MSG−C 83135 27200

3a Monitor Signal Processor MSP−CD 83135 22301

3b Monitor Signal Processor MSP−CD 83135 22302

4a Local Control Panel LCP 83135 21001 / 21002

4b Local Control Panel LCP 83135 21003

4c Local Control Panel LCP 83135 21004

5 Voice Amplifier VAM 83131 71701

6 Backpanel Transmitter BP−T 58351 00210 / 00211

7 Processor board with Ethernet controller EXT−CPU 84045 84300

8 Switched or dedicated line modem LGM28.8 84045 83245

9 Dedicated or Party line modem LGM1200D 84045 83233

10a Backpanel Control BP−C 58351 00112

10b Backpanel Control BP−C 58351 00113

11 Synthesizer CVOR SYN−V 83135 28101

Ed. 01.12 6−23

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

X14
V33
X13
S4

S3

V34

S2

S1 EPROM
S6 D10

V28
X17* X15
EPROM
V27 D9 X24X23

X12

X11
ASSOC.

X5
X6

X7
X8
S5
IND.

3 2 1

2
X3 X25

user defined
X4 voltage adjust optionally to
X19,20,21
X19 between 1.7 to 1.875 X26
X20 X18
X21 R X22
P3 P4

set open set * set with ILS 410

open
1 2 3

SWITCH POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

S1, S3 key Manual switch off TX1 or TX2
S2, S4 key Manual switch on TX1 or TX2
S5 lower Independent, DME = Master (2−3, 5−6) Slide switch for DME/TACAN−
identity interface, depends on
upper Associated, AN400 = Master (1−3, 4−6) installation
S6 0...F Test signal select
JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS
X7,X8,X11 Signal definition and drive select Morse code signal for DME
X7, X8 1−2 positive logic: device on = current flow Normal operation

2−3 negative logic: device on = no current flow −

X5,X6,X12 Signal definition and drive select to DME: Station Operational
X5, X6 1−2 positive logic: device on = current flow Normal operation

2−3 negative logic: device on = no current flow −

X9,X10 not existing
X11, X12 1−2 Drive using Darlington current source Normal operation

2−3 Drive using optocoupler only −

1 Control and Selector Logic (CSL) 83135 23100 1 of 2

6−24 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X13 set Switch off line TX1 from LCP default setting

open Interrupt Switch off line TX1 from LCP −

X14 set Switch off line TX2 from LCP default setting

open Interrupt Switch off line TX2 from LCP −

X15 set Line OP_IN− from DME default setting

open Interrupt line OP_IN− from DME −

X16 not existing
X17 set Test signal selection, ILS default setting ILS

open Test signal selection, VOR/DVOR default setting (D)VOR

X18 set Enabling cutoff for over−discharge protection Emergency battery operation

open without over−discharge protection Operation without emergency

battery or function disabled
X19,20,21 Selection of battery type/cell voltage only one jumper set simultan.!
X19 set battery switch off at 1,7 V/cell alternate to X20, X21

open −
X20 set battery switch off at 1,8 V/cell default setting

open −
X21 set battery switch off at 1,875 V/cell alternate to X19, X20

open −
X22 set enabling automatic restore with PMM−5 and (D)VOR
(power management)
open − with PMM−5 and ILS
X23 set no monitor fault monitoring MON2 −

open monitor fault monitoring MON2 default setting

X24 set no monitor fault monitoring MON1 −

open monitor fault monitoring MON1 default setting

X25 1−2 DME−Status is transmitted via remote contr. setting depends on DME−In-
terface
2−3 DME−Status is transmitted via signalling line
OP_IN+ and OP_IN−
X26 set On/off line to optocoupler interface of BCPS Default setting
from LCP via CSL closed (Power Management)

open On/off line to optocoupler interface of BCPS depends on installation

from LCP via CSL open, e.g. if no emergency
battery exists
1 Control and Selector Logic (CSL) 83135 23100 2 of 2

Ed. 01.12 6−25

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

X7
− + −
X8 X4
battery 3.6 V

V2
V3

X6
3 2 1

EPROM
D8

EPROM
D7

X5
3 2 1

S1

V4

set open set

open
1 2 3

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X4 set watch−dog fault triggers NMI −
(Non Maskable Interrupt)

open NMI function disabled default setting

X5 2−3 EPROM type 27C040 default setting

1−2 EPROM type 27C020 −

X6 1−2 RAM type 628128 default setting

2−3 RAM−Typ 628512 −

X7 set backup battery switched on default setting

open backup battery switched off −

X8 set multiple reset disabled, if watch dog fails default setting

open multiple reset enabled −

2 Modulation Signal Generator Control (MSG−C) 83135 27200

6−26 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs

X5 X6
V2
1 2 3 1 2 3
V3
V1
X7 EPROM
D7

D1 EPROM
D8 X2
X22 X8

S1

− + −

battery 3.6 V

X3 Test connector

R402
Temp. sensor

X1
* C30
X28
V4

Shielding
X12 X3
Audio socket

X25

set open set

* factory adjustment
open
1 2 3

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X3 for factory adjustment only, a solder strip is inserted
onto the soldering side after adjustment
X5 1−2 EPROM type 27C020 or 27C040 −

2−3 EPROM type 27C040 with complete decoding default setting

X6 1−2 RAM type 628128 default setting

2−3 RAM−Typ 628512 −

X7 set the RAM is battery buffered, i.e. the system parameter, default setting
alarm storage and operating hours are maintained
after system switch off

open RAM is not battery buffered, i.e. the above mentioned −

data will be lost after system switch off
X8 set multiple reset disabled, if watch dog timer fails default setting

open multiple reset enabled −

3a Monitor Signal Processor (MSP−CD) 83135 22301 1 of 2

Ed. 01.12 6−27

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X22 set watch dog fault triggers NMI, i.e. when the
processor has a fail function, the processor
monitoring circuit leaves out one interrupt

open NM function disabled default setting

X25 feed in point for GND
X28 set connects the 30 Hz FM measurement path default setting
directly and via a low pass filter to test con-
nector X3

open 30 Hz FM signal not connected to X3 factory use

JUMPER CONNECT. DEFINITION REMARKS
X12 audio socket for listening to voice signals 3.5 mm jack bush, 600 ohm
e.g. station identity, meteorological data
(ATIS)
3a Monitor Signal Processor (MSP−CD) 83135 22301 2 of 2
The MSP−CD, Ref. No. 83135 22301 replaces the MSP−VD, Ref. No. 83135 22300 and the MSP−V8, 83135 22600 (8PGC option only).

6−28 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs

X5 X6
V2
1 2 3 1 2 3
V3
V1 X7
EPROM
3 2 1 D7

EPROM
D1 D8 X2

X22 X8

S1

− + −

battery 3.6 V

X3 test connector

R402
Temp. sensor

X1
* P16 P38
C30 X28
V4
factory use only

Shielding
Audio socket
X12 X3
1
X18 2 X25
3

set open set

open
1 2 3 * factory adjustment

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X3 for factory adjustment only, a solder strip is inserted
onto the soldering side after adjustment
X5 1−2 EPROM type 27C020 or 27C040 −

2−3 EPROM type 27C040 with complete decoding default setting

X6 1−2 RAM type 628128 default setting

2−3 RAM−Typ 628512 −

X7 1−2 RAM backup battery is not used: with NAV2K software, default setting
parameter are stored in the serial EEPROM. Requires
NAV2K Monitor SW V3.x (DVOR) and V5.x (CVOR).

2−3 RAM backup battery is used: it supports previous −

SN400 software or NAV2K 1st generation software, that
stores parameter in the RAM. The RAM is battery buf-
fered, i.e. the system parameter, alarm storage and
operating hours are maintained after system switch off.
X8 set multiple reset disabled, if watch dog timer fails default setting

open multiple reset enabled −

3b Monitor Signal Processor (MSP−CD) 83135 22302 1 of 2

Ed. 01.12 6−29

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X18 1−2 Ident signal from MSP RF detector. No sup- default setting
port of DVOR 48SB advanced ident monito-
ring. Supported systems:

− SN400 VOR and DVOR monitor software

− NAV2K CVOR monitor software 1st gen.
− NAV2K DVOR monitor software, 50SB HW
− NAV2K DVOR monitor software 1st gen.,
48SB HW and PMC−D p/n 83135 31200

2−3 Ident signal from CSB forward detector on used for DVOR 48SB NxF op-
PMC−D (ID_COMP_MIX). Support of DVOR tion only
48SB advanced ident monitoring for Nextfield
option (NxF). Supported system:

− NAV2K DVOR monitor software V4.x up,

DVOR 48SB, PMC−D p/n 83135 31250
X22 set watch dog fault triggers NMI, i.e. when the −
processor has a fail function, the processor
monitoring circuit leaves out one interrupt

open NMI function disabled default setting

X25 feed in point for GND
X28 set connects the 30 Hz FM measurement path default setting
directly and via a low pass filter to test con-
nector X3

open 30 Hz FM signal not connected to X3 factory use

JUMPER CONNECT. DEFINITION REMARKS
− X12 audio socket for listening to voice signals 3.5 mm jack bush, 600 ohm
e.g. station identity, meteorological data
(ATIS)
3b Monitor Signal Processor (MSP−CD) 83135 22302 2 of 2
The MSP−CD, Ref. No. 83135 22302 replaces the MSP−CD, Ref. No. 83135 22301. It is downward compatible for previous systems.

6−30 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs

OIO−IN
LC−CPU COM5 add. in; COM9..10 OIO−OUT DME/NDB COM1...7

X8,9,11..14
X37

X38
X39
DME/NDB

X34 X33 HD LED

S1
X6 X2 X51 X52 X1
876543 21 * *
OFF
ON
1
optionally, normally not assembled

CPU X84 X83 X82 X81 1

X60 board B1 A1
RS422 only RS422/485
1

1 1
B10 X99 B1
X40 LCI rear DME/NDB
1 A1

PC−1
X15 COM4 Key lock Power COM8
X35 Supply
X16...23 X50
+ *
B10 X95 B1
X5
R1 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X4
Battery X41 1 1
2 local
A1 GND
3.6 V 3 lock
X4 1
0.8 Ah H1 Brightness
X36
1 COM3
Life LED X24
−15 V +5 V DGND
1 1 X100*
S2 X10* X53* X25...32 1
X55 X56 X54
Keyboard Printer Ethernet
Reset CPU
* optional
RS422/485

recessed opening
in LC−CPU board
RS232

1 RS232
COM3 2 TTL
3
1
2
3

RS422/
X9 RS485 X81 to 84
X32
X31
X30
X29
X28
X27
X26
X25

IAUX set to
X11 GND +5V ext.
X12 B1 A1 B1 A1
COM5 X13 B2 A2 B2 A2
1 RS232
B3 A3 B3 A3
X14 2 TTL
COM4 B4 A4 B4 A4
set 1
set X8 3 RS422/ B5 A5 B5 A5
2 RS485
open
X23
X22
X21
X20
X19
X18
X17
X16

open RS485 RS422 B6 A6 B6 A6

park posit. 3

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

bank X81 A1−B1/B2−B3 IAUX14 active low default setting
B1−B2/A3−B3 IAUX14 active high −

A4−B4/B5−B6 IAUX15 active low default setting

B4−B5/A6−B6 IAUX15 active high −
bank X82 A1−B1/B2−B3 IAUX12 active low default setting
B1−B2/A3−B3 IAUX12 active high −

A4−B4/B5−B6 IAUX13 active low default setting

B4−B5/A6−B6 IAUX13 active high −
bank X83 A1−B1/B2−B3 IAUX11 active low default setting
B1−B2/A3−B3 IAUX11 active high −

A4−B4/B5−B6 IAUX10 active low default setting

B4−B5/A6−B6 IAUX10 active high −
4a Local Control Panel (LCP: LC−CPU/LCI) 83135 21402 / 83135 21301 1 of 3

Ed. 01.12 6−31

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

bank X84 A1−B1/B2−B3 IAUX9 active low default setting
B1−B2/A3−B3 IAUX9 active high −

A4−B4/B5−B6 IAUX8 active low default setting

B4−B5/A6−B6 IAUX8 active high −
X95 A1−B1, ... , A8−B8 serial port3 set to RS232 Port 3 (COM3)
X25...X32 1−2

X24, X41 not used − −

X95 B1−B2, B3−B4 ,B5−B6, B7−B8 serial port3 set to TTL −
X25/26 2−2
X27/28 2−2
X29/30 2−2
X31/32 2−2

X24, X41 not used − −

X95 A1−B1, ... , A8−B8 serial port3 set to RS422 −
X25...X32 2−3

X24 2−3 full duplex default setting

X41 open − −
X95 A1−B1, ... , A10−B10 serial port3 set to RS485 −
X25...32 2−3

X24 1−2 half duplex default; signal RTS controls

TX enable in UART mode
X41 set adds 100 ohm termination −
X99 A1−B1, ... , A8−B8 serial port4 set to RS232 Port 4 (COM4)
X16...23 1−2

X15, X40 not used − −

X99 B1−B2, B3−B4 ,B5−B6, B7−B8 serial port4 set to TTL −
X16/17 2−2
X18/19 2−2
X20/21 2−2
X22/23 2−2

X15, X40 not used − −

X99 A1−B1, ... , A8−B8 serial port4 set to RS422 −
X16...23 2−3

X15 2−3 full duplex default setting

X40 open − −
X99 A1−B1, ... , A10−B10 serial port4 set to RS485 −
X16...23 2−3

X15 1−2 half duplex default; signal RTS controls

TX enable in UART mode
X40 set adds 100 ohm termination −
4a Local Control Panel (LCP: LC−CPU/LCI) 83135 21402 / 83135 21301 2 of 3

6−32 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X38,39 open serial port5 set to RS232 Port 5 (COM5),
X9,11...14 1−2 used with ETX−CPU option

X8/X37 not used − −

X38,39 open serial port5 set to RS422 −
X9,11...14 2−3

X8 2−3 full duplex default setting

X37 open − −
X38,39 set serial port5 set to RS485 −
X9,11...14 2−3

X8 1−2 half duplex default; signal RTS controls

TX enable in UART mode
X37 set adds 100 ohm termination −

X33 open serial port1 set to RS232, IRQ14 pathed to CPU

interrupt path
set not used −

X34 set serial port5 set to RS232, IRQ6 pathed to CPU

RS422/485, interrupt path
open for ext. device test −
X35 set watch dog on if enabled by software
open watch dog off −
X36 set battery backup enabled used for RTC on CPU

open battery backup disabled RTC not buffered

S1 input register 6 Bit 4...7: (optional assembly)

S1/8 on Bit 4 to GND Bypass not auto−disabled

off − default setting
S1/7 on Bit 5 to GND not used
off − default setting
S1/6 on Bit 6 to GND not used
off − TX1 ON, Status
S1/5 on Bit 7 to GND not used
off − TX2 ON, Status
S1/1 to 4 off IN0...IN3 always off, on not allowed
LCI rear
X5 1−2 Font select: 40 characters default setting
2−3 Font select: 30 characters −
X6 1−2 Font select: per HW (X5) default setting
2−3 Font select: per SW −
X7 1−2 Display allways on default setting
2−3 Display off/on per SW −
X8 1−2 spare default setting
2−3 not used −
X9 1−2 Buzzer on default setting
2−3 Buzzer off −
4a Local Control Panel (LCP: LC−CPU/LCI) 83135 21402 / 83135 21301 3 of 3

Ed. 01.12 6−33

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

OIO−IN
LC−CPU COM5 add. in; COM9..10 OIO−OUT DME/NDB COM1...7

X8,9,11..14
X37
X108 X107

X38
X39
DME/NDB

X34 X33 HD LED

H2
S1
X6 X2 X51 X52 X1
876543 21 * *
OFF
ON
1
optionally, normally not assembled

CPU X84 X83 X82 X81 1

X60 board B1 A1
RS422 only RS422/485
1

1 1
B10 X99 B1
X40 LCI rear DME/NDB
1 A1

PC−1
X15 COM4 Key lock Power COM8
X35 Supply
X16...23 X50
+ *
B10 X95 B1
X5 X4
R1 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9
Battery X41 1 1
2 local
A1 GND
3.6 V 3 lock 1
X4 1
0.8 Ah H5 H1 Brightness
X36
1 COM3 X105
USB n.a. Life LED X24
−15 V * +5 V DGND
H3 H4 1 1 X100*
S2 X10* USB* X53* X25...32 n.a.
1
LK LN n.a. X55 X56 X54
Keyboard Printer Ethernet
Reset CPU
RS422/485

* optional, not assembled

recessed opening
in LC−CPU board
RS232

1 RS232
COM3 2 TTL
3
1
2
3

RS422/
X9 RS485 X81 to 84
X32
X31
X30
X29
X28
X27
X26
X25

IAUX set to
X11 GND +5V ext.
X12 B1 A1 B1 A1
COM5 X13 B2 A2 B2 A2
1 RS232
B3 A3 B3 A3
X14 2 TTL
COM4 B4 A4 B4 A4
set 1
set X8 3 RS422/ B5 A5 B5 A5
2 RS485
open
X23
X22
X21
X20
X19
X18
X17
X16

open RS485 RS422 B6 A6 B6 A6

park posit. 3

NOTE: Compared with the LC−CPU 83135 21402 (see 4a), the LC−CPU 83135 21403 contains three additional jumper (X105, 107,
108). X107 and 108 are used for special setting in ILS systems. All other settings are the same as described for LC−CPU
83135 21402 (refer to 4a). Connectors USB and X100 are not applicable or assembled.

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X105 1−2 −15 V from external default setting
2−3 −15 V from internal not applicable
X107 set Maint. ILS, LCD control special setting ILS FAA
open − default setting ILS, (D)VOR
X108 set Local ILS, LCD control special setting ILS FAA
open − default setting ILS, (D)VOR
4b Local Control Panel (LCP: LC−CPU/LCI) 83135 21403 / 83135 21301 1 of 1

6−34 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs

OIO−IN
LC−CPU COM5 add. in; COM9..10 OIO−OUT DME/NDB COM1...7

X8,9,11..14
X37
X108 X107

X38
X39
DME/NDB

X34 X33 HD LED LAN

n.a.

X93 S1
X6 X2 X51 X52 X1
876543 21 * *
OFF
ON
1
optionally, normally not assembled

CPU X84 X83 X82 X81 1

X91 board B1 A1
RS422 only RS422/485
1

1 1
B10 X99 B1

X92 X40 LCI rear DME/NDB

1 A1

PC−1
X15 COM4 Key lock Power COM8
X35 Supply
X16...23 X50
+ *
B10 X95 B1 R1
X5
1
X5 X6 X7 X8 X9
1
X4
Battery X41 local
A1
2 GND
3.6 V 3 lock 1
X4 1
0.8 Ah H1 Brightness
X36
1 COM3 X105
Life LED X24
−15V * +5V DGND
1 1 X100*
S2 X10 X53* X25...32 1
X55 X56 X54
Keyboard Printer Ethernet
Reset CPU
* optional, not assembled
RS422/485

recessed opening
in LC−CPU board
RS232

LAN (option) 1 RS232

7 1
8 2 COM3 2 TTL
3
1
2
3

Definition LAN connector (CPU): RS422/

X9 RS485 X81 to 84
X32
X31
X30
X29
X28
X27
X26
X25

pin signal pin signal IAUX set to

1 TXD+ 4,5 not conn. X11 GND +5V ext.
2 TXD− 6 RXD−
3 RXD+ 7,8 not conn. X12 B1 A1 B1 A1
COM5 X13 B2 A2 B2 A2
1 RS232
B3 A3 B3 A3
X14 2 TTL
set 1 COM4 B4 A4 B4 A4
2
set X8 3 RS422/
open open RS485
B5 A5 B5 A5
X23
X22
X21
X20
X19
X18
X17
X16

park posit. 3 RS485 RS422 B6 A6 B6 A6

NOTE: Compared with the LC−CPU 83135 21402 and the LC−CPU 83135 21403, the LC−CPU 83135 21404 has a redesign due
to replacement of the previously used DIMM−CPU which becomes obsolete. As with LC−CPU 83135 21403, the LC−CPU
83135 21404 contains three additional jumper (X105, 107, 108). X107 and 108 are used for special setting in ILS systems.
All other settings are the same as described for LC−CPU 83135 21402 (refer to 4a).

Connectors USB and X100 are not applicable or assembled. Connector X55 is also not assembled any more.

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X105 1−2 −15 V from external default setting
2−3 −15 V from internal not applicable
X107 set Maint. ILS, LCD control special setting ILS FAA
open − default setting ILS, (D)VOR
X108 set Local ILS, LCD control special setting ILS FAA
open − default setting ILS, (D)VOR
4c Local Control Panel (LCP: LC−CPU/LCI) 83135 21404 / 83135 21301 1 of 1

Ed. 01.12 6−35

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

R33

S4

S2

S3

S1

4
On/Off switch 2 1 Change−over switch

DIP−FIX POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

SWITCH
S1, S2, S3 on signal path closed normal operation

off signal path open between filters for measure- factory adjustment
ment
S4 2−1 signal path closed normal operation

2−4 signal path opened for comparator test factory adjustment

5 Voice Amplifier (VAM), option 83131 71701 1 of 1

6−36 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs

Ê Ê
Ê Ê
X120...125 ASU
X87 X86 X79 X78

Ê Ê
X115 X110
X94 X93 X92 X107 X144

Ê Ê
X131 X130 X143 X141
X142 X140
X76 X85

Ê Ê
X99 X98 X97 X96 X89 X82
X88 X80 X77
X73 X84
BP−C

Ê Ê
X135 X134
X106 T1 X83 X74

Ê Ê
3 − −1
X95 X72 X71 4 −X81− 2
X104 X105

Ê Ê
1 1
50W TX2
2 2
100W TX1

Ê Ê
3 3
X84 X81

Ê Ê
1 1
50W TX2
2 2
100W TX1

Ê Ê
3 3
X70 X83 X82
BP−T X71** X84

Ê Ê
X81
1
X83 TX2
(TX1) X72 2

Ê Ê
X85 X82 TX1 3
X80
X85
X73

Ê Ê
1
TX2
2
Setting example: 100 W, TX1
TX1

Ê Ê
3
CA−100/1* 1 1
50W TX2

Ê Ê
X80 2 2
100W 3 3 TX1

Ê Ê
X84 X81
X70
BP−T X71** X84 1 1
TX2

Ê Ê
X81 50W
2 2
X83 TX1
X72 100W 3 3

Ê Ê
X80 (TX2) X85 X82
X83 X82

Ê Ê
TX2 X73 1
2
TX2
2
TX1 3 TX1

Ê Ê
3
X85

X80 Setting example: 100 W, TX2

* 100 W only ** BP−T 58351 00210: Speedy 16
BP−T 58351 00211: Speedy 10

Jumper POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X80 1−2 TX2 Definition of TX1 or TX2
2−3 TX1 −
X84, X83 1−2 50W Settings for 50 W, TX1
X85 2−3 TX1 −
X81 2−3 TX1 −
X82 2−3 TX1 −
X84, X83 2−3 100W Settings for 100 W, TX1
X85 2−3 TX1 −
X81 2−3 TX1 −
X82 2−3 TX1 −
X84, X83 1−2 50W Settings for 50 W, TX2
X85 1−2 TX2 −
X81 1−2 TX2 −
X82 1−2 TX2 −
X84,X83 2−3 100W Settings for 100 W, TX2
X85 1−2 TX2 −
X81 1−2 TX2 −
X82 1−2 TX2 −
6 Backpanel Transmitter (BP−T) 58351 00210 / 58351 00211 1 of 1

Ed. 01.12 6−37

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance
VGA X51* X52*
X11
COM1

X12 KEYBOARD Setting X46 to 48

X10

X47
X48
X46

12 3
ETX on 486
S1 CPU reset
COM4

12 3
X9 D6
ETX on P$N

12 3
COM2

X13 X49 DIMM on P4N

12 3
COM3

DIMM on 486
X8

12 3
X7
X15
X16 DVOR/CVOR
X14 USB V6
1 2 3

* *
V2
X47
X48
X46

V4
X18
X20 RJ45
+
V3 *
1 V5
X17 BAT *
X50
set open open set * not assembled
1 2 3

JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X15 closed SIB interface disabled / USART enabled Default setting

X16 open SIB interface enabled, but not used Default setting

X17 set Normal operation mode of battery battery connected

open ’Parking’ mode of battery battery disconnected

X18 set Watchdog enabled Default setting

X46,X47,X48 defines board use; depends on type of re-
mote control equipment and PAL

X46/1−X47/1 set Default setting DVOR/CVOR −

X46/1−X47/1 set Default setting DVOR/CVOR −

X49 set USART (D6) enabled Default setting

X50 2−3 Ethernet interface enabled Default setting

2−1 Ethernet interface disabled −
7 Processor board with Ethernet controller (ETX−CPU) 84045 84300 1 of 1

6−38 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs

S4
1

OFF
ST1

ON
2 LB1
3
BU3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

BU2
1 5
D5 2 6

D4 ST2
S1

BU1

1 2 3 4
S3 (side view)
1 23 4 56 S2
OFF
ON
LB1 open : BU2 pin 25b = AF signal set open set
LB1 closed : BU2 pin 25b = time slot open 1 2 3

DEFINITION JUMP./POSITION
Dialing mode: automatic recognition of type of modulation, V.25bis, auto reliable mode,
flow control with RTS/CTS (S2/M2), autobaud (AT), pulse dial mode
S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4 S1.5 S1.6 S1.7 S1.8 S1.9 S1.10
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4 S3.1 S3.2 S3.3 S3.4 S3.5 S3.6
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Dedicated line mode: V.32 (9600 bit/s), error correction with direct mode 10 bit/sign, flow control with
RTS/CTS (S2/M2), autobaud (AT), 2−wired dedicated line
S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4 S1.5 S1.6 S1.7 S1.8 S1.9 S1.10
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF for RCSE/RMC
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF for NAV−LCU

S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4 S3.1 S3.2 S3.3 S3.4 S3.5 S3.6
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
ST1 Receive level range:
Level at Z ST1
−43 dBm 1−2 (delivery setting)
−33 dBm 2−3
ST2 Transmit level range:
Switched line at Z ST2 Dedicated line (600  ST2
−4.5 dBm 3−5 −6 dBm 3−5
−6.5 dBm 5−6 −8 dBm 5−6
−8.5 dBm 3−4 (default setting) −10 dBm 3−4
−10.5 dBm 1−2 −12 dBm 1−2
NOTE: Some telephone networks may prohibit alteration of the transmit level.

8 Switched or Dedicated line Modem (LGM28.8) 84045 83245 1 of 1

Ed. 01.12 6−39

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

Test

OFF
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

BU2
BR1
1 2 3
S1

1 2 3 4
S2

open set
set
open 1 2 3

DEFINITION JUMP./POSITION REMARKS

Permanent transmission control S2.1

on OFF default setting
off ON −
Operation 1200/600 bit/s S2.2
1200 bit/s OFF default setting
600 bit/s ON −
Transmit level S1.9 S1.10
±0 dBm OFF OFF −
−3 dBm ON OFF −
−6 dBm OFF ON default setting
−9 dBm ON ON −
NOTE: Some telephone networks may prohibit alteration of the transmit level.
Impedance during transmission S1.8
300 ohms OFF for remote side (e.g. RCSE)
600 ohms ON for station side
Receive level (min.) S1.7
−43 dBm OFF default setting
−33 dBm ON −
Carrier lag time S1.6
13 ms OFF −
3 ms ON default setting
S2−M2 lead time S1.5
30 ms OFF default setting
200 ms ON −
9 Dedicated or Party line Modem (LGM1200MD) 84045 83233 1 of 2

6−40 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs

DEFINITION JUMP./POSITION REMARKS

Additional equalizer S1.4
Equalizer switched on OFF −
Equalizer switched off ON default setting
Switching on mode S1.3
Fixed switching on (M1+) operation OFF default setting
Switching on with S1.1 ON −
Operation mode S1.1 S1.2 S2.2
0...1200 bit/s, hx, asyn. (1300/2100 Hz) OFF OFF OFF default setting
0...1200 bit/s, hx, syn. with 1:1 change ON OFF OFF −
0...1200 bit/s, hx, syn. without change OFF ON OFF −
not used ON ON OFF −
0...600 bit/s, hx, asyn. (1300/1700 Hz) OFF OFF ON −
Sensitivity increase (−53 dBm) BR1
Sensitivity higher + add. equalizer 1−2 −
Sensitivity normal 2−3 default setting
9 Dedicated or Party line Modem (LGM1200MD) 84045 83233 2 of 2

Ed. 01.12 6−41

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

Ê Ê
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
X120...125 ASU
X87 X86 X79 X78
X120...125 X115 X110

Ê Ê
X85
X94 X93 X92 X107 X80

Ê Ê
X89 X82
X88
X99 X98 X97 X96 X77 X76 X84

Ê Ê
BP−C X73
X74 X89

Ê Ê
X106 T1 X83 X88
−3 − 1

Ê Ê
X95 X72 X71 −4 − 2
X104 X105

Ê Ê
Ê Ê
Ê X70
Ê
Ê Ê
BP−T X71 X84
X81
X83

Ê Ê
(TX1) X72
X85 X82

Ê Ê
X73

Ê CA−100/1*
Ê
Ê Ê
X80

Ê
Ê
BP−T X71 X70 X84
Ê
Ê
X81

Ê Ê
X83
X72
(TX2) X85 X82

Ê Ê
X73

* 100 W only
Ê
Ê X80 Ê
Ê
JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS
X120...125 Allocation of X115 PTT line to LGM1..3, La/Lb Set only one allocation
X120, 121 set Allocation of X115 PTT line to LGM1 (La/Lb) −
X122, 123 set Allocation of X115 PTT line to LGM2 (La/Lb) −
X124, 125 set Allocation of X115 PTT line to LGM3 (La/Lb) −
X88 set −12V connected (used for LGM connectors) Default setting
X89 set +12V connected (used for LGM connectors) Default setting
10a Motherboard Backpanel C (BP−C) 58351 00112 1 of 1

6−42 Ed. 01.12

 CVOR 431
Operation and Maintenance Repairs

Ê Ê
Ê X120...125 ASU

Ê
Ê Ê
X120...125 X87 X86 X79 X78
X115 X110
X94 X93 X92 X107 X144

Ê Ê
X131 X130 X143 X141
X142 X140
X141

Ê Ê
X99 X98 X97 X96 X89 X76 X85
X82
X140
X88 X80 X77
X73 X84 X144

Ê Ê
BP−C X143
X135 X134 X74
X106 T1 X142

Ê Ê
X83
3 − −1 X134 (DVOR only)
X95 X72 X71 4 −X81− 2 X135 (DVOR only)

Ê Ê
X104 X105

Ê Ê X89

Ê Ê
X88

Ê BP−T X71
X70 X84

Ê
Ê Ê
X81
X83
(TX1) X72

Ê Ê
X85 X82

X73

Ê
Ê
CA−100/1* Ê
Ê
Ê Ê
X80

Ê
Ê
BP−T X71

X72
X70

X83
X84
X81
Ê
Ê
Ê Ê
(TX2) X85 X82

Ê Ê
X73

* 100 W only
Ê X80
Ê
JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS
X120...125 Allocation of X115 PTT line to LGM1..3, La/Lb Set only one allocation
X120, 121 set Allocation of X115 PTT line to LGM1 (La/Lb) −
X122, 123 set Allocation of X115 PTT line to LGM2 (La/Lb) −
X124, 125 set Allocation of X115 PTT line to LGM3 (La/Lb) −
X88 set −12V connected (used for LGM connectors) Default setting
X89 set +12V connected (used for LGM connectors) Default setting
X134 set enables advanced ident monitoring for Mon1 MSP supports the function
open advanced ident function not available MSP does not support it
X135 set enables advanced ident monitoring for Mon2 MSP supports the function
open advanced ident function not available MSP does not support it
X140 open IAUX11 is a free configurable LCP input X140 to 144 are dedicated to
set IAUX11 connected to VARP MICRO_STATUS optional VARP function; the
X141 open IAUX13 is a free configurable LCP input jumpers connect LCP inputs
set IAUX13 connected to VARP_INSTALLED to the VARP function.
X142 open IAUX10 is a free configurable LCP input
set IAUX10 connected to VARP_EMERGENCY
X143 open IAUX12 is a free configurable LCP input
set IAUX12 connected to DME_TRIGGER
X144 open IAUX14 is a free configurable LCP input
set IAUX14 connected to DME_TRIGGER_6_5
10b Motherboard Backpanel Control (BP−C) 58351 00113 1 of 1

Ed. 01.12 6−43

CVOR 431
Repairs Operation and Maintenance

CVOR DVOR
Flash Programmimg

U9 1 J27
R513 R512*

P3V3 ok H8 gn

Center (f) locked H1 gn U11

Alert H7 red J4

G9

Ref out
Center out

Shielding cover SBB/LSB out

J9

SBA/USB out

set open set * R512 assembled with DVOR

R513 assembled with CVOR
open
1 2 3

JUMPER CONNECT. DEFINITION REMARKS

− J27 Connector for Flash programming
11 Synthesizer CVOR (SYN−V) 83135 28101 1 of 1

6−44 Ed. 01.12

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures

Annex

PC User Program−specific
Procedures

Used in Navaids
Alignment Procedure

Ed. 09.09 A−A

NAVAIDS
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance

A−B Ed. 09.09

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures

ANNEX
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Title Page

ANNEX PC USER PROGRAM−SPECIFIC PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A−1

A.1 START USER PROGRAM, PERFORM LOGIN AND SELECT STATION . . . . . A−1
A.2 SWITCH BOTH TX ON (OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A−8
A.3 SWITCH TX1 (2) ON (OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A−10
A.4 SET TX 1 (2) ON AERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A−12
A.5 SET ALL MONITOR BYPASS ON (OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A−13
A.6 OPEN THE STATION CONFIGURATION DIALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A−14
A.7 OPEN DIALOG ’<SUBSYSTEM>−<DATA SET>’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A−18
A.8 SEND TO <SUBSYSTEM1/2> THE COMMAND ’<LIST, COMMAND>’ . . . A−23

Ammendment Label Conversion Summary DVOR/CVOR

Ed. 09.09 A−C

NAVAIDS
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance

A−D Ed. 09.09

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures

ANNEX
PC USER PROGRAM−SPECIFIC PROCEDURES
The following sections give the detailed description of procedures used for the alignment of Navaids
equipment. Because two different PC user programs (ADRACS and MCS) are available, all proce-
dures are described here for both user programs.

A.1 START USER PROGRAM, PERFORM LOGIN AND SELECT STATION

A.1.1 ADRACS user program
− Click ’Start’ button, select ’Programs’, program group ’Adracs Remote Controlling’, program
’Adracs Remote Controlling Software’. The ’Adracs − Select configuration’ window appears
on the screen (see Fig. A−1).
− Select the configuration type ’STANDARD’ for starting ADRACS. Click on button ’OK’ to confirm
this selection.
NOTE: The configuration ’STANDARD’ is defined in the initialization file Adracs.ini, and is similar
to <default values> at state of delivery.
Windows NT Workstation

PC Info Accessories
Programs
Programme Command Prompt
Simulation
Windows NT Explorer
Documents Additional Tools
Settings Adracs
Programme
Remote Controlling Adracs
Programme
Remote Controlling Software
Find Autostart
Microsoft Office
Help
Run...
Adracs − Select configuration X
Shut Down
Adracs was not given a parameter to select one of the predefined
Start configurations. If you click the OK button below now, default values will
be selected. Otherwise you can select one of the predefined
configurations below and click OK then.

Select predefined configuration here:

STANDARD

OK

Fig. A−1 Starting ’Adracs Remote Controlling Software’ on PC (example)

− The Main Status window of ADRACS is generated (see Fig. A−2).

RWY−X LLZ−2F GP−2F MM OIO

ALARM

Shutdown
MAINT
switch select select select select

Site: LLZ−420 REU−Software Ver.: 2.xx

NORMAL
Login Exit Control

Fig. A−2 ADRACS Main Status window (example)

Ed. 05.06 A−1

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance
− Perform login procedure at the PC. Click on button ’Login’ in the Main Status window (see Fig.
A−2). The dialog ’Enter Password’ appears (see Fig. A−3) .
Acknowledge the selection ’User 1’ and Level 5 with button ’OK’.
Enter Password
Select User Level
User 1, max. Level 5
User 2, max. Level 5 5
User 3, max. Level 5
User 4, max. Level 5 4
User 5, max. Level 5
User 6, max. Level 5
User 7, max. Level 5 3
User 8, max. Level 5
User 9, max. Level 5 2
User 10, max. Level 5
User 11, max. Level 5
User 12, max. Level 5 1

Password

OK CANCEL

Fig. A−3 ADRACS login function using ’Enter Password’ window (example)

− Click on screen button ’select’ in the station (e.g. LLZ) status field of the Main Status window (see
Fig. A−2). The Detailed Status window of the Navaids station appears (see Fig. A−4).

RC LLZ−420 [ILS 420 − LLZ] − Controlling : Detailed Status − X

Data Commands Activities Window Checks Extras Help
MON History avail. LOCAL MODE
<user information> Thursday, January 10, 2002 11:44:02 WARNING
BYPASS TX1 AERIAL TX2 OFF Maintenance alert

NORMAL WARNING

FAULTY
STANDBY Warning STANDBY Warning
BIT Warning BIT Warning

MON − 1 MON − 2

BIT Warning
Power ON Power ON

TX−1 TX−2

LOCAL−MODE

LRCI−ECU

Fig. A−4 ADRACS Detailed Status window of the Navaids equipment (example)

A−2 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
A.1.2 MCS user program

In the standard application the local PC/Laptop is used as MCWP, i.e. the MCS application GUI, the
SNMP Proxy agents and the Direct Connect option are installed to the PC/Laptop. The Laptop is con-
nected to the connector Local PC (serial interface) on top of the cabinet.

In an optional application (currently only avialable for DVOR/CVOR systems) the local PC/Laptop is
used as CWP, i.e. the MCS application GUI is installed to the PC/Laptop and the SNMP Proxy agents
are installed to a built−in intelligent board, the optional ETX−CPU board. The Laptop is connected
to the connector ETHERNET on top of the cabinet which is fed to the ETX−CPU board.

A.1.2.1 Start Standard Application (Direct Connection via Serial Interface)

Only an MCWP (with SNMP proxy agents installed) running under a Linux operating system can be
directly connected via a serial cable (RS232) to a Navaids cabinet (see Fig. A−5).

MCS with GUI,

NAVAIDS MCWP SNMP proxy agent
installed SW
to MCS Equipment (Linux OS) and
(country−wide) DirectConnect
RS232

Fig. A−5 Direct connection to a Navaids equipment via serial interface

The tool ’MCS direct connect’ has to be is used for the standard application. For details see Technical
Manual MCS, section 1.8.1. To start the MCS Direct Connect application on the connected PC/Laptop
perform the steps:
− Click start button of Linux desktop (’red hat’), select ’System Tools’, select ’More System Tools’,
select ’MCS direct connect’ (see Fig. A−6).

Fig. A−6 Linux desktop start menu with ’MCS direct connect’ tool (example)

Ed. 05.06 A−3

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance
− The ’MCS direct connection’ start window appears (see Fig. A−7). Select the parameters for the
connected Navaids station in the following dialog windows and confirm each setting with button
’OK’.

Fig. A−7 Start window of ’MCS direct connection’ tool (example)

− If the MCS direct connection set up is finished, the MCS Main window, presenting the defined Na-
vaids station as equipment level in the Navigation Tree panel, and as an equipment icon in the Map
View panel (see Fig. A−8).

equipment level
in Navigation
Tree panel

equipment icon in
Map View panel

Fig. A−8 MCS Main window after setting up the direct connection to the station (example)

A−4 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
A.1.2.2 Start Optional Application (Ethernet Connection and ETX−CPU Board)

A CWP (running under Linux or MS Windows OS) with an MCS GUI can be connected via an Ethernet
interface (TCP/IP) only to a Navaids equipment equipped with the ETX−CPU board (see Fig. A−9).
The SNMP proxy agent of the Navaids equipment is installed on the ETX−CPU board. For details see
Technical Manual MCS, Part 1, section ’Ethernet (TCP/IP) Connection’.
The common MCS application has to be used for the optional application.
The network interface of the CWP laptop has to be configured as ’DHCP Client’, i.e. the laptop gets
its LAN interface configuration (IP address, ...) from the ETX−CPU board.

NAVAIDS

CWP installed SW MCS with GUI

MCS
with installed SW
SNMP Proxy Agents

IP address:
to MCS GPRS 192.168.10.1
(country−wide) LAN cable

ETX−CPU board

Fig. A−9 Direct connection to a Navaids equipment via Ethernet interface (example)

Start the MCS GUI on the CWP laptop via the corresponding menu entry in the desktop start menu.
The MCS Main window appears (see Fig. A−10).

no root structure
defined

Fig. A−10 MCS Main window after starting GUI on CWP (example: no root structure defined)

If the Navigation Tree panel is empty (i.e. no root structure is defined), create a new structure by clik-
king on main menu ’Configuration’, select submenu ’Position’, select function ’Create New Root
Structure’. Select a local level (’Airport’ or ’En Route Site’) in the ’Create New Root Structure’ dialog,
see Fig. A−11).

Fig. A−11 Create New Root Structure in the MCS Main window (example)

Ed. 08.09
05.06 A−5
Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance
Now the user has to add a new Navaid equipment, i.e. a new sublevel (Navaid) within the root struc-
ture. After a right mouse−click on the (now) existing local level, a menu provides the submenu ’New’,
select function ’Navaid’ (see Fig. A−12).

Fig. A−12 Start procedure to create a new Navaid equipment level (example)

The ’Create New Navaid’ dialog window appears (see Fig. A−13). Select the corresponding ’Device
Type’, define a ’Name’, set the ’Proxy Host’ parameter to IP address ’192.168.10.1’ and use the given
’Proxy Port’ (or set the parameter to a defined value). Click first button ’Test’ and then button ’OK’.

Fig. A−13 Dialog ’Create New Navaid’ (example)

The MCS Main window is presenting now the defined Navaids station as equipment level in the Navi-
gation Tree panel, and as an equipment icon in the Map View panel (see Fig. A−14).

equipment level
in Navigation equipment icon in
Tree panel Map View panel

Fig. A−14 MCS Main window after creating a Navaid station in the root structure (example)

A−6 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
A.1.2.3 Perform Login and Select Station

− Open the 1st Equipment Level window of the Navaids station by left mouse−click on the equip-
ment level in the Navigation Tree panel or by double left mouse−click on the equipment icon in
the Map View panel of the MCS Main window (see Fig. A−8 resp. A−14).

− The 1st Equipment Level window with login level ’Monitor’ appears (see Fig. A−15a). Login as
’maintenance’ user via pull−down menu ’Administration’, submenu ’Login’ in the 1st Equipment
Level window. The default password is ’MCS. The login level ’Maintenance’ is shown in the status
bar of the window (see Fig. A−15b). The Maintenance user has now access to all maintenance
functions.

a) login level ’Monitor’ b) login level ’Maintenance’

Status bar
with
login level

Fig. A−15 MCS 1st Equipment Level window of the Navaids station (examples a and b)

Ed. 05.06 A−7

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance

A.2 SWITCH BOTH TX ON (OFF)

A.2.1 ADRACS user program

− Open the menu ’Commands’ in the ADRACS ’Detailed Status’ window (see Fig. A−16).
− Click on command ’Switch both TX ON’ (resp. ’Switch both TX OFF’).

RC LLZ−420 [ILS 420 − LLZ] − Controlling : Detailed Status − X

Data Commands Activities Window Checks Extras Help

Switch TX1 ON MON History avail. LOCAL MODE

Switch TX2 ON
<user information> Thursday, January 10, 2002 11:44:02 WARNING
Switch both TX ON
BYPASS TX1 AERIAL TX2 OFF Maintenance Alert
Switch TX1 OFF
Switch TX2 OFF
NORMAL
Switch both TX OFF WARNING

ChangeFAULTY
Aerial
Set executiveWarning
STANDBY BYPASS ON STANDBY Warning
BIT Warning
Set standby BYPASS ON BIT Warning
Set all BYPASS ON
MON − 1 MON − 2
Set executive BYPASS OFF
Set standby BYPASS OFF
Set all BYPASS OFF
Reset BIT
ECUWarning
Power ON Power ON
More Commands...
TX−1 TX−2

Fig. A−16 ADRACS Detailed Status window with pulldown menu ’Commands’ (example)

A.2.2 MCS user program

− Open the pull−down menu with the commands for the subsystem ’Transmitter 1’ (or ’Transmitter
2’) via right mouse−click on the subsystem label ’Transmitter 1’ (resp. ’Transmitter 2’) in the MCS
1st Equipment Level window (see Fig. A−17).

right mouse−click

Fig. A−17 MCS 1st Equipment Level window with pull−down menu of transmitter commands
(example)

A−8 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
− Open the commands submenu ’Power’ by moving the cursor onto the submenu item ’Power’ (see
Fig. A−18).

move cursor

Fig. A−18 Open transmitter commands submenu ’Power’ (example)

− Select the command ’Both On’ (resp. ’Both Off’) by moving the cursor onto the corresponding
menu item. Send the selected command to the equipment by left mouse−click on the selected
item ’Both On’ (resp. ’Both Off’, see Fig. A−19).

left mouse−click

Fig. A−19 Send command ’Power, Both off’ to the equipment, state indication is actualized
(example)

Ed. 05.06 A−9

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance

A.3 SWITCH TX1 (2) ON (OFF)

A.3.1 ADRACS user program

− Open the menu ’Commands’ in the ADRACS ’Detailed Status’ window (see Fig. A−20).
− Click on command ’Switch TX1 (2) ON’ resp. ’Switch TX1 (2) OFF’.

RC LLZ−420 [ILS 420 − LLZ] − Controlling : Detailed Status − X

Data Commands Activities Window Checks Extras Help

Switch TX1 ON MON History avail. LOCAL MODE

Switch TX2 ON
<user information> Thursday, January 10, 2002 11:44:02 WARNING
Switch both TX ON
BYPASS TX1 AERIAL TX2 OFF Maintenance Alert
Switch TX1 OFF
Switch TX2 OFF
NORMAL
Switch both TX OFF WARNING

ChangeFAULTY
Aerial
Set executiveWarning
STANDBY BYPASS ON STANDBY Warning
BIT Warning
Set standby BYPASS ON BIT Warning
Set all BYPASS ON
MON − 1 MON − 2
Set executive BYPASS OFF
Set standby BYPASS OFF
Set all BYPASS OFF
Reset BIT
ECUWarning
Power ON Power ON
More Commands...
TX−1 TX−2

Fig. A−20 ADRACS Detailed Status window with pulldown menu ’Commands’ (example)

A.3.2 MCS user program

− Open the pull−down menu with the commands for the subsystem ’Transmitter 1’ (resp. ’Transmit-
ter 2’) via right mouse−click on the subsystem label ’Transmitter 1’ (resp. ’Transmitter 2’) in the
MCS 1st Equipment Level window (see Fig. A−21).

right mouse−click

Fig. A−21 MCS 1st Equipment Level window with pull−down menu of transmitter commands
(example)

A−10 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
− Open the commands submenu ’Power’ by moving the cursor onto the submenu item ’Power’ (see
Fig. A−22).

move cursor

Fig. A−22 Open transmitter commands submenu ’Power’ (example)

− Select the command ’On’ (resp. ’Off’) by moving the cursor onto the corresponding menu item.
Send the selected command to the equipment by left mouse−click on the selected item ’On’ (resp.
’Off’), see Fig. A−23.

Fig. A−23 Send command ’Power, Off’ to the station (example)

Ed. 05.06 A−11

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance

A.4 SET TX 1 (2) ON AERIAL

NOTE: This procedure is only necessary if transmitter 1 (2) is not yet set to the aerial transmitter.

A.4.1 ADRACS user program

− Open the menu ’Commands’ in the ADRACS ’Detailed Status’ window, select function ’Change
aerial’ (see Fig. A−24).

RC LLZ−420 [ILS 420 − LLZ] − Controlling : Detailed Status − X

Data Commands Activities Window Checks Extras Help

Switch TX1 ON MON History avail. LOCAL MODE
Switch TX2 ON
<user information> Thursday, January 10, 2002 11:44:02 WARNING
Switch both TX ON
BYPASS TX1 AERIAL TX2 OFF Maintenance Alert
Switch TX1 OFF
Switch TX2 OFF
Switch NORMAL
both TX OFF WARNING

ChangeFAULTY
Aerial
Set executiveWarning
STANDBY BYPASS ON STANDBY Warning
BIT Warning
Set standby BYPASS ON BIT Warning
Set all BYPASS ON
MON − 1 MON − 2
Set executive BYPASS OFF
Set standby BYPASS OFF
Set all BYPASS OFF
ResetBIT
ECUWarning
Power ON Power ON
More Commands...
TX−1 TX−2

Fig. A−24 ADRACS Detailed Status window; menu ’Commands’ (example)

A.4.2 MCS user program

− Open the pull−down menu with the commands for the subsystem ’Transmitter 1’ (resp. ’Transmit-
ter 2’) via right mouse−click on the subsystem label ’Transmitter 1’ (resp. ’Transmitter 2’) in the
MCS 1st Equipment Level window.
− Send the selected command ’Change Aerial Transmitter’ to the equipment by left mouse−click
on the selected item (see Fig. A−25).

right mouse−click

Fig. A−25 MCS 1st Equipment Level window with transmitter command ’Change Aerial’
(example)

A−12 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
A.5 SET ALL MONITOR BYPASS ON (OFF)
A.5.1 ADRACS user program
− Open the menu ’Commands’ in the ADRACS ’Detailed Status’ window (see Fig. A−26). Click on
command ’Set all BYPASS ON’ (’Set all BYPASS OFF’).

RC LLZ−420 [ILS 420 − LLZ] − Controlling : Detailed Status − X

Data Commands Activities Window Checks Extras Help

Switch TX1 ON MON History avail. LOCAL MODE

Switch TX2 ON
<user information> Thursday, January 10, 2002 11:44:02 WARNING
Switch both TX ON
BYPASS TX1 AERIAL TX2 OFF Maintenance Alert
Switch TX1 OFF
Switch TX2 OFF
NORMAL
Switch both TX OFF WARNING

ChangeFAULTY
Aerial
SetSTANDBY
executiveWarning
BYPASS ON STANDBY Warning
BIT Warning
Set standby BYPASS ON BIT Warning
Set all BYPASS ON
MON − 1 MON − 2
Set executive BYPASS OFF
Set standby BYPASS OFF
Set all BYPASS OFF
Reset BIT
ECUWarning
Power ON Power ON
More Commands...
TX−1 TX−2

Fig. A−26 ADRACS Detailed Status window; menu ’Commands’ (example)

A.5.2 MCS user program

− Open the pull−down menu with the commands for the subsystem ’Monitor 1’ (or Monitor 2’) via
right mouse−click on the subsystem label ’Monitor 1’ (or ’Monitor 2’) in the MCS 1st Equipment
Level window.

− Open the submenu ’Bypass’, open submenu ’All Bypass’ (see Fig. A−27) and select command
’On’ (’Off’). Send command to the equipment by left mouse−click on the selected item.

right mouse−click

Fig. A−27 MCS 1st Equipment Level window with monitor bypass commands (example)

Ed. 05.06 A−13

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance

A.6 OPEN THE STATION CONFIGURATION DIALOG

A.6.1 ADRACS user program

− Select menu ’Data’, submenu ’MON−TX−LRCI Data’ in the ADRACS ’Detailed Status’ window,
or click on corresponding functional key at the bottom of the window ( see Fig. A−28).
The ’General Data window appears.

RC LLZ−420 [ILS 420 − LLZ] − Controlling : Detailed Status − X

Data Commands Activities Window Checks Extras Help

Station Status only Ctrl+S MON History avail. LOCAL MODE

Detailed Status Ctrl+D Thursday, January 10, 2002 11:44:02 WARNING
Monitor Alarms Ctrl+A
MON−TX−LRCI Data Ctrl+M TX1 AERIAL TX2 OFF Maintenance alert
Print Data Ctrl+P
Record Data Ctrl+R
Up−/Download Data Ctrl+U
NORMAL WARNING
Fault Location Ctrl+F
Additional Windows Ctrl+W

STANDBY Warning STANDBY Warning

BIT Warning BIT Warning

MON − 1 MON − 2

MON−TX−LRCI Data

Fig. A−28 ADRACS Detailed Status window; menu ’Data’ (example)

− Select menu ’Window’, function ’Adjust Windows’ in the General Data window or click on corre-
sponding functional key at the bottom of the window (see Fig. A−29).

RC LLZ−420 [ILS 420 − LLZ] − Controlling : General Data − X

Data Commands Activities Window Checks Help
MON
Adjust History avail.
Windows... F2 LOCAL MODE
<user information> Print Window Contents Thursday, January 10, 2002 11:44:02 WARNING
Zoom Window Details...
BYPASS TX−1 AERIAL TX2 OFF Maintenance alert
Tile Windows
Cascade Windows
Customize Data Set... F3

Adjust Windows

Fig. A−29 ADRACS General Data window; menu ’Window’ (example)

A−14 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
− The ’ADJUST WINDOWS’ dialog appears (see Fig. A−30).

ADJUST WINDOWS X
RC

y
Arrangement class: STANDARD LIST
y
Arrangements: Load

Save Delete Export Import

single
System Status WINDOW−1 Destroy
MONITOR−1
Station Data WINDOW−2
MONITOR−2
Station Configuration
TRANSMITTER−1 WINDOW−3 Tile
Environmental Setup
TRANSMITTER−2 Time Counting WINDOW−4
Cascade
LRCI Miscellaneous Set
MIXED DATA Absolute time Zoom Tool
Subsystem programming results
Step Tool

Set Font Close

Fig. A−30 ADRACS dialog ’ADJUST WINDOWS’ (example)

− Select subsystem ’LRCI’, data set ’LRCI Station Configuration’. Select a presentation window
(WINDOW−1 to 4). Confirm with button ’Set’.

− The ’LRCI Station Configuration’ dialog appears (see Fig. A−31). Verify and set the required pa-
rameter.

− After parameter setting, select "Click here to accept" to confirm the settings.

RC 1 LRCI Station Configuration − X

Timestamp 26.02.2002 7:57:36
Station type Localizer
Frequency carrier Dual (2F)
Equipment configuration Dual equipment
Standby configuration Hot
Antenna type 13 el. dipole
Field Monitoring No NF, No Farfield
Ch.4 (e.g. Near Field) is present Not available
Nearfield is executive Not available
Ch.5 (e.g. Far Field) is enabled Not available
Farfield is executive Not available
Far Field monitor 2 Not available
Cable fault detection No
RF channel number 21
RF channel frequency 110.10 / 334.40MHz

Action on RCSU Comm. Loss Maintenance Alert

Maint. generates LCP Warning Yes
RWY−Control can remove OP OFF No
Accept actual settings Click here to accept

Fig. A−31 ADRACS ’LRCI Station Configuration’ window for parameter setting (example)

Ed. 05.06 A−15

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance

A.6.2 MCS user program

− Open the pull−down menu ’Operation’ via left mouse−click on the menu item ’Operation’ in the
menu bar of the MCS 1st Equipment Level window. The submenu ’Station Configuration’ appears
(see Fig. A−32)

left mouse−click

Fig. A−32 MCS 1st Equipment Level window with submenu ’Station Configuration’ (example)

− Select the ’Operation’ submenu ’Station Configuration’ via left mouse−click on the corresponding
submenu item (see Fig. A−33). The ’<equipment> Station Configuration ’ dialog is superimpose-
d on the 1st Equipment Level window.

left mouse−click

Fig. A−33 Select MCS ’Operation’ submenu ’Station Configuration’ (example)

A−16 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
− After parameter setting, send the new configuration data to the station (LRCI) via left mouse−click
on button ’OK’. The ’<equipment> StationConfiguration’ dialog is closed, the 1st Equipment Le-
vel window is visible again (see Fig. A−34).

left mouse−click

Fig. A−34 Parameter setting in the MCS ’<equipment> Station Configuration’ dialog (example)

Ed. 05.06 A−17

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance

A.7 OPEN DIALOG ’<SUBSYSTEM>−<DATA SET>’

A.7.1 ADRACS user program

− Select menu ’Data’, submenu ’MON−TX−LRCI Data’ in the ’Detailed Status’ window, or click on
corresponding functional key at the bottom of the window ( see Fig. A−35).
The ’General Data window appears.

RC LLZ−420 [ILS 420 − LLZ] − Controlling : Detailed Status − X

Data Commands Activities Window Checks Extras Help

Station Status only Ctrl+S MON History avail. LOCAL MODE

Detailed Status Ctrl+D Thursday, January 10, 2002 11:44:02 WARNING
Monitor Alarms Ctrl+A
MON−TX−LRCI Data Ctrl+M TX1 AERIAL TX2 OFF Maintenance alert
Print Data Ctrl+P
Record Data Ctrl+R
Up−/Download Data Ctrl+U
NORMAL WARNING
Fault Location Ctrl+F
Additional Windows Ctrl+W

STANDBY Warning STANDBY Warning

BIT Warning BIT Warning

MON − 1 MON − 2

MON−TX−LRCI Data

Fig. A−35 ADRACS Detailed Status window; menu ’Data’ (example)

− Select menu ’Window’, function ’Adjust Windows’ in the General Data window or click on corre-
sponding functional key at the bottom of the window (see Fig. A−36).

RC LLZ−420 [ILS 420 − LLZ] − Controlling : General Data − X

Data Commands Activities Window Checks Help
MON
Adjust History avail.
Windows... F2 LOCAL MODE
<user information> Print Window Contents Thursday, January 10, 2002 11:44:02 WARNING
Zoom Window Details...
BYPASS TX−1 AERIAL TX2 OFF Maintenance alert
Tile Windows
Cascade Windows
Customize Data Set... F3

Adjust Windows

Fig. A−36 ADRACS General Data window; menu ’Window’ (example)

A−18 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
− The ’ADJUST WINDOWS’ dialog appears (see Fig. A−37).

ADJUST WINDOWS X
RC

y
Arrangement class: STANDARD LIST
y
Arrangements: Load

Save Delete Export Import

single
System Status WINDOW−1 Destroy
MONITOR−1
Station Data WINDOW−2
MONITOR−2
Station Configuration
TRANSMITTER−1 WINDOW−3 Tile
Environmental Setup
TRANSMITTER−2 Time Counting WINDOW−4
Cascade
LRCI Miscellaneous Set
MIXED DATA Absolute time Zoom Tool
Subsystem programming results
Step Tool

Set Font Close

Fig. A−37 ADRACS dialog ’ADJUST WINDOWS’, selection of <subsystem> and <data set>
(example)

− Select the <subsystem> (e.g. ’MONITOR−1’, ’LRCI’) and the <data set> (e.g. ’Station Data’),
and select the window number. Confirm the selections with button ’Set’.
The corresponding data window appears (see Fig. A−38).

RC 1 LRCI − Station Data − X

Timestamp 26.02.2002 7:57:36
Manufacturer Thales ATM
Station Type ILS
Serial Number 0
Conversion table version 3.20
LRCI Software Version 3.24
LRCI Site Name LLZ−FFM
LRCI Station Name LLZ−421
Long LRCI Site Name Test−Site
Long LRCI Station Name Test−LLZ−421

Fig. A−38 ADRACS data window with <data set> for parameter setting (example)

If more than one data window is necessary for parameter setting, start this procedure from the begin-
ning and select another window number within the ADJUST WINDOWS dialog (see Fig. A−37).

NOTE: The ’Window’ functions ’Tile Windows’ and ’Cascade Windows’ support the operator to
get a better view on the number of data windows.

Ed. 05.06 A−19

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance

A.7.2 MCS user program

− Open the MCS 2nd Equipment Level window of the <subsystem> via double left mouse−click
on the corresponding subsystem label in the MCS 1st equipment Level window (see Fig. A−39).

double left mouse−click

Fig. A−39 MCS <subsystem> 2nd Equipment Level window for parameter setting (example)

− Select the parameter list of the <data set> via left mouse−click on the corresponding file tab (see
Fig. A−40).

left mouse−click

Fig. A−40 Select the <data set> for parameter setting (example)

A−20 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
− A double left mouse−click on a parameter value with ’write access’ (written in blue characters)
opens the ’Edit Value’ dialog (see Fig. A−41) to change the value. Confirm with button ’OK’.

Fig. A−41 ’Edit Value’ dialog for modifying parameter value (example)

For a number of parameter lists some ’sub−sets’ exist, which are accessible via file tabs in the upper
line of the 2nd Equipment window (see Fig. A−42).
Within the alignment of Navaids equipment, the procedure to open the dialog of such a parameter
sub−set is given as
"Open dialog ’<subsystem>−<data set>: <sub−set>’ for parameter setting".
In the example of Fig. A−42 the used procedure would be
"Open dialog ’Monitor1−Measurements/Limits: Current Executive Data’ for parameter setting".

Fig. A−42 2nd Equipment Level window with a <sub−set> of a parameter <data set> (example)

Ed. 05.06 A−21

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance
If more than one data window is necessary for parameter setting, start this procedure from the begin-
ning. If two data windows of the same subsystem are required, the dialog window ’Duplicate Win-
dows’ appears after double left mouse−click on the subsystem label (see Fig. A−43). Confirm with
button ’Open new window’ to get a further window of the same subsystem (in our example ’Monitor1’).

Fig. A−43 Dialog ’Duplicate Window’ to open a second subsystem data set window (example)

NOTE: To get a better view on the data windows, use the common Windows function to arrange
the data windows on the screen.

If the same data sets of both monitors or both transmitters are required for parameter setting (e.g.
’Measurements/Limits’ of Monitor 1 and Monitor 2), the functions of the pull−down menu ’Compare’
in the MCS 1st Equipment Level window can be used (for details see Technical Manual MCS).

A window appears after selecting the corresponding function (’Compare Monitors’ resp. ’Compare
Transmitters’), see example in Fig. A−44, providing the parameters of both subsystems in parallel
columns. Select the required parameter (set) via left mouse click in the left column, click again and-
hold the left mouse button, then draw the cursor into the left blank area. The parameter list appears
there.

Fig. A−44 ’Compare’ function in the 1st Equipment Level window (example)

A−22 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Annex PC User Program Procedures
A.8 SEND TO <SUBSYSTEM1/2> THE COMMAND ’<LIST, COMMAND>’
A.8.1 ADRACS user program

− Click on functional key ’ON/OFF’ at the bottom of the ’Detailed Status’ window ( see Fig. A−45).
The ’Commands’ window appears (see Fig. A−46).

RC LLZ−420 [ILS 420 − LLZ] − Controlling : Detailed Status − X

Data Commands Activities Window Checks Extras Help

MON History avail. LOCAL MODE

<user information> Thursday, January 10, 2002 11:44:02 WARNING
BYPASS TX1 AERIAL TX2 OFF Maintenance alert

WARNING WARNING

STANDBY Warning STANDBY Warning

BIT Warning BIT Warning

MON − 1 MON − 2

ON/OFF functional key

Fig. A−45 ADRACS functional key ’ON/OFF’ (example)

− Click on <subsystems> pull−down menu (see Fig. A−46). The <subsystems> command lists
appear. Select <list> and <command>. Confirm with button ’program <subsystem(s)>’. The
’Commands’ window is closed. The command is then sent to the equipment.

X pull−down menu X
Commands − Commands −
RC with <subsystems> RC

Monitors Transmitters LRCI command lists Monitors Transmitters LRCI

Select Waveforms
Monitor HistoryTX1 TX Miscellaneous
Select Waveforms TX2
selected <subsystem>
Clear alarm history command <list> Perform hard reset
TX Ident
Perform audio gen. calibration
TX Miscellaneous select command list
Initiate transfer/shutdown test
Reset to factory defaults
Perform Integrity TestSig. calib.
<command> of Set sel. waveform to norm. modul.
selected <list> Set sel. waveform to 90 Hz only
Set sel. waveform to 150 Hz only
Set sel. waveform to RF only

program MON 1 program MON 2 program TX 1 program TX 2

program MON 1/2 program TX 1/2

Close Close

Fig. A−46 ADRACS ’Commands’ window after opening the window (example)

Ed. 05.06 A−23

Navaids
Annex PC User Program Procedures Operation and Maintenance

A.8.2 MCS user program

− Open the pull−down menu with the commands for the <subsystem 1> via right mouse−click on
the <subsystem 1> label in the MCS 1st Equipment Level window (see Fig. A−47).

right mouse−click on <susbsystem>

Fig. A−47 MCS 1st Equipment Level window with <subsystem> commands (example)

− Select submenu <list>, then select <command> (see Fig. A−47), send command to the equip-
ment by left mouse−click on the selected item.

− Repeat the same procedure for the <subsystem 2>.

A−24 Ed. 05.06

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Ammendment Conversion Summary

AMMENDMENT
LABEL CONVERSION SUMMARY DVOR/CVOR
From ADRACS software version 3.8 and MCS software V1.8, the user interface implements changes
for CVOR and DVOR application handling, which shall clearify some labels and introduce some dialog
window instead of data window to improve handling. A summary of the changed labels and the new
dialog windows is given in the following table.
ADRACS up to 3.6 / MCS ADRACS from 3.8 MCS from 1.8 differs
DVOR
Data window Dialog window DVOR (N1..N4)−Transmitter 1:
Transmitter 1 − Adjustments ’TX1− Adjustments’ Setup: Adjustments
USB Power level USB Level USB Level x
LSB Power level LSB Level LSB Level x
USB LSB Power Level SB Level Multiplier SB Level Multiplier x
MCS: Alignment USB LSB Power Level
USB RF phase USB Phase USB Phase x
Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM 30 Hz AM Depth 30 Hz AM Depth x
Azimuth Alignment Azimuth Alignment Azimuth Alignment
Mod. Depth Identity AM 1020 Hz AM Depth 1020 Hz AM Depth x
Mod. Depth Voice AM Voice AM Depth Voice Modulation Depth x
Carrier Power Carrier Power Carrier Power

Data window ,TX1 ASU’ is now integrated in win- DVOR (N1..N4)−Transmitter 1:

Transmitter 1 – Adjustments ASU dow ,TX1− Adjustments’ Setup: ASU Adjustments
Alignment All Blending Levels Blending Levels Adjustment Blending Levels Multiplier x
USB Sine Blending USB Sine Amplitude Adjust USB Sine Blending x
USB Cos Blending USB Cosine Amplitude Adjust USB Cosine Blending x
LSB Sine Blending LSB Sine Amplitude Adjust LSB Sine Blending x
LSB Cos Blending LSB Cosine Amplitude Adjust LSB Cosine Blending x
Start Antenna Normal Operation Start Antenna Normal Operation Start Antenna Normal Operation
Start Antenna Single Step Set Antenna for Single Step Start Antenna Single Step x
RF Phase Upper Limit CSB/SB Phase (UL) CSB/SB Phase UL x
RF Phase Lower Limit CSB/SB Phase (LL) CSB/SB Phase LL x
ASU Blending Waveform ASU Blending Waveform ASU Blending Waveform
(50SB version has solution with jumpers)

CVOR
Data window Dialog window CVOR (8PGC)−Transmitter 1:
Transmitter 1 − Adjustments ’TX1− Adjustments’ Setup: Adjustments
SBA Power Level SBA Level SBA Level x
SBB Power Level SBB Level SBB Level x
SBA Phase Adjustment SBA Phase SBA Phase x
SBA/SBB Power Level SB Level Multiplier SB Level Multiplier x
FM Deviation Modulation Index FM Index x

DVOR
Data window Data window DVOR (N1..N4)−Transmitter 1:
’Transmitter 1 − Measurements’ ’TX1− Measurements’ Measurements
RF Phase CSB/SB Radiated Phase CSB/SB Phase x
MCS : RF Phase Measurement

Ed. 09.09 ConvT−1

Navaids
Ammendment Conversion Summary Operation and Maintenance

ADRACS up to 3.6 / MCS cont. ADRACS from 3.8 MCS from 1.8 differs
DVOR cont.
Data window Dialog window DVOR (N1..N4)−Monitor 1:
’Monitor – Alarm Limits’ ’Monitor – Alarm Limits’ Measurements/Limits
Upper Limit Nearfield Azimuth … (UL) Azimuth UL x
MCS: Azimuth Upper Limit
Lower Limit Nearfield Azimuth … (LL) Azimuth LL x
MCS: Azimuth Lower Limit
Distortion 30 Hz FM 30 Hz FM Distortion Distortion 30 Hz FM x
Distortion USB − LSB USB − LSB Distortion Distortion USB/LSB x
RF Phase Upper Limit/Lower Limit RF Level RF Level

Data window Data window DVOR (N1..N4)−Monitor 1:

’Monitor − Measurements’ ‘Monitor − Measurements’ Measurements/Limits
Azimuth Azimuth Azimuth
RF Level RF−Level RF Level x
Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM 30 Hz AM Depth 30 Hz AM Depth x
Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM 9960 Hz AM Depth 9960 Hz AM Depth x
Mod. Index 30 Hz FM FM Index FM Index x
Distortion 30 Hz FM Distortion 30 Hz FM Distortion 30 Hz FM
Distortion on 9960 Hz AM Distortion 9960 Hz AM Distortion 9960 Hz AM x
60 Hz Component on 30 Hz AM 60 Hz Modulation Modulation 60 Hz x
Distortion LSB USB Distortion Received CSB Distortion USB x
MCS: Distortion on det. LSB
Distortion USB−LSB Distortion USB−LSB Distortion USB/LSB x
MCS: Distortion on det. USB−LSB
Carrier Frequency Carrier Frequency Carrier Frequency
Upper Sideband Frequency, USB USB Frequency USB Frequency x
Lower Sideband Frequency, USB LSB Frequency LSB Frequency x
Lower Sideband Frequency, LSB Internal CSB RF − Level Internal CSB RF Level x

CVOR
Data window Data window CVOR (8PGC)−Monitor 1: Mea-
’Monitor − Measurements’ ‘Monitor – Measurements Main’ surements/Limits
Mod. Depth Identity AM 1020 Hz AM Depth 1020 Hz AM Depth x

DVOR
Data window Data window DVOR (N1..N4)−Monitor 1:
’Monitor – Measurements TSG’ ’Monitor – Measurements TSG’ Self−Check: Tsg Data/Limits
TSG Level TSG Level Signal Level x
TSG Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM TSG 30 Hz AM Depth 30 Hz AM Depth x
TSG Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM TSG 9960 Hz AM Depth 9960 Hz AM Depth x
TSG Mod. Index 30 Hz FM TSG FM Index FM Index x
TSG Azimuth TSG Azimuth Azimuth x

Data window Data window DVOR (N1..N4)−Monitor 1:

’Monitor – Miscelleanous’ ‘Monitor – Configuration‘ Setup: Configuration
Single Channel Single Channel Mode Single Channel Mode x
Identity Identification Morse Code Identification Morse Code x

ConvT−2 Ed. 09.09

 NAVAIDS
Operation and Maintenance Ammendment Conversion Summary

ADRACS up to 3.6 / MCS cont. ADRACS from 3.8 MCS from 1.8 differs
DVOR cont.
Data window Dialog window DVOR (N1..N4)−LRCI:
’LRCI − Measurements’ ‘Monitor – Environmental Setup’ Environmental Setup
Installed Batt. Capacity Installed Battery Capacity Installed Battery Rated Capacity x

Data window Dialog window DVOR (N1/N2)−LRCI:

’LRCI − Miscelleanous’ ‘LRCI – BCPS’ Measurements/Limits
Actual Charge Level Set Actual Capacity Actual Charge Level x

Data window Dialog window DVOR (N1..N4)−Monitor 1:

’Monitor – Calibration’ ‘Monitor – Calibration Nearfield’ Setup: Calibration
Digital Ctrl. Attenuation Digital Attenuation Digitally Controlled Attenuation x
AGC Adjustments AGC Adjust Calibration AGC Adjustment x
Calibrate Mod. Depth Ident Cal 1020 Hz AM Depth Calibration 1020 Hz AM Depth x
Calibrate Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM Cal 9960 Hz AM Depth Calibration 9960 Hz AM Depth x
Calibrate Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM Cal 30 Hz AM Depth Calibration 30 Hz AM Depth x
Calibrate Mod. Index 30Hz FM Cal FM Index Calibration FM Index x

CVOR
Data window Dialog window CVOR (8PGC)−Monitor 1:
’Monitor – Calibration’ ‘Monitor – Calibration Nearfield’ Setup: Calibration Misc
Calibrate Azimuth Calibrate Azimuth Calibration Azimuth

DVOR NEXTFIELD OPTION

Data window Dialog window DVOR (N1..N4)−LRCI:
,Monitor – Miscelleanous’ ’LRCI – Station Configuration’ Station Configuration
Station Type Field Monitoring Field Monitoring Mode x

Data window Data window DVOR N2−Monitor 1:

’Monitor – Measurements’ ‘Monitor – Measurements’ Measurements/Limits:
MCS: AGC Level 9960Hz AM Integral 9960Hz AM Depth Mod Depth 9960 Hz AM Nextfield x

Data window Data window DVOR N2−Monitor 1:

’Monitor – Measurements’ ‘Monitor – BITE Measurements’ Measurements/Limits
30Hz FM LSB Level (Dipole−1) Dipole 1 LSB 30Hz FM Level LSB 30 Hz FM Level x
MCS: AGC Level 30Hz FM LSB Counterpoise Dipole 1
30Hz FM USB Level (Dipole−1) Dipole 1 USB 30Hz FM Level USB 30 Hz FM Level x
MCS: AGC Level 30Hz FM USB Counterpoise Dipole 1

Data window Dialog window DVOR N2−Monitor 1:

’Monitor – Calibration‘ ‘Monitor – Calibration Dipole’ Nextfield 2 Cal
Calibration Mod. Index 30Hz FM Nextfield Mod Index Cal Factor Calibration FM Index x
MCS: Calibrate Mod. Index 30Hz FM All Counterpoise Dipoles
Analog AGC RF Level CSB Internal Internal CSB RF Level AGC AGC RF Level CSB Internal x
Adjustment Nextfield Adjustment Nextfield
Digital AGC RF Level CSB Internal Internal CSB RF Level Dig AGC RF Level Atten uation x
Adjustment Nextfield Nextfield
AGC 9960 Hz AM Level Adjustment Nextfield Integral 9960Hz AGC Adjust AGC 9960 Hz AM Level x
Adjustment Nextfield

Ed. 09.09 ConvT−3

Navaids
Ammendment Conversion Summary Operation and Maintenance

ADRACS up to 3.6 / MCS cont. ADRACS from 3.8 MCS from 1.8 differs
DVOR NEXTFIELD OPTION cont.
AGC 30Hz FM Level LSB Adjustment Nextfield LSB Level AGC Adjust Counterpoise Dipole 1 Analog x
Analog AGC Adj FM Level LSB
LSB Level Digital AGC Adjust LSB Level Digital AGC Adjust Counterpoise Dipole 1 x
Digital AGC Adj FM Level LSB
AGC 30Hz FM Level USB Adjustment Nextfield USB Level AGC Adjust Counterpoise Dipole 1 x
Analog AGC Adj FM Level USB
USB Level Digital AGC Adjust USB Level Digital AGC Adjust Counterpoise Dipole 1 x
Digital AGC Adj FM Level USB
AGC RF Level Attenuation Nextfield RF Level AGC Adjust Counterpoise Dipole 1 x
Analog AGC Adj RF Level
RF Level Digital AGC Adjust RF Level Digital AGC Adjust Counterpoise Dipole 1 x
Digital AGC Adj RF Level
Calibrate Mod. Depth 30Hz AM CSB internal Internal 30 Hz AM Depth Calibrate Mod. Depth 30Hz AM x
MCS: Calibrate Mod. Depth 30Hz AM CSB internal CSB internal

ConvT−4 Ed. 09.09